JP2019069365A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing transmission efficiency of information while reliably retransmitting information for game machines communicably connected to a game device.SOLUTION: A main control board transmits game machine information to a putout control part along with SQN. The putout control part transmits the game machine information to the game device and returns SQN incremented by one to the main control board. The main control board adds the last transmitted information to information newly generated this time and then retransmits the information, when determining that the information has not arrived on the basis of the SQN.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 79

Description

  The present invention is provided with a connection portion for communicably connecting to a gaming apparatus that adds points by using gaming value owned by a player, and it is possible to play a game by the points, and in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. The present invention relates to a gaming machine to which points are added.

  According to prior art document 1, when the main control board transmits the dispensing command to the dispensing control board, if the data corresponding to the dispensing command is not returned within the prescribed time, the main control board retransmits the dispensing command. Is described.

JP, 2011-41659, A

  However, in the prior art document 1, only the same data is transmitted at the time of retransmission, and if there is further data to be transmitted while waiting for the passage of a prescribed time, the previously transmitted data After resending, it is necessary to transmit data again, which causes a problem that the efficiency of data transmission is lowered.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of the actual situation, and its object is to increase the information transmission efficiency while reliably retransmitting information regarding a gaming machine communicably connected to a gaming apparatus. It is to provide a game machine that can do that.

(1) The present invention communicably connects to a gaming apparatus (CU) that adds points (the number of game balls, points) using game-use values (balances, balls, cash, etc.) owned by a player. It is a gaming machine (P unit, S unit) provided with a connection unit for making it possible to play games with points, and to which points are added according to the occurrence of winnings,
Game control means (main control board 16) for controlling the game state;
The gaming machine information (the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of game balls, the number of starting openings 1, 2, the number of winnings, the symbol determination, and the game machine information connected communicably to the gaming apparatus via the connection unit A point control means (disbursement control unit 17) for transmitting the number of times, etc., to the game device;
The game control means
First gaming machine information transmission means (FIG. 79; main state control board sends a game state inquiry response to the payout control portion) for transmitting the gaming machine information to the point control means;
Arrival determination means for determining the arrival of the gaming machine information to the point control means based on the arrival confirmation information (SQN) transmitted from the point control means (FIG. 79; stand state on the main control board side) Check the SQN of the query request, see Figure 77),
Adding number specifying means (specifying the number of winning balls shown in FIG. 75) for specifying the number of additions to the points when a winning occurs;
The point control means is
Second gaming machine information transmitting means (operation response shown in FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 40, etc .; P unit (payout control) for transmitting the gaming machine information transmitted from the gaming control means to the gaming apparatus Sent to CU from section 17),
And an arrival confirmation information transmission unit (FIG. 79; sending a table state inquiry request from the payout control unit to the main control board) for transmitting the arrival confirmation information to the game control unit,
The first gaming machine information transmission means transmits the gaming machine information together with the arrival confirmation information (SQN) to the point control means (see the table state inquiry response in FIG. 79).
The point control means includes a first arrival confirmation information updating means (refer to table status inquiry request in FIG. 79) for updating the arrival confirmation information transmitted together with the gaming machine information.
The arrival confirmation information transmission means transmits the arrival confirmation information updated by the first arrival confirmation information updating means to the game control means (see table status inquiry request in FIG. 79).
When the arrival determination means determines that the game machine information has not been reached, the first game machine information transmission means transmits the game machine information last time, and changes in new points that have occurred since the previous time Game point information including a total amount obtained by adding the amount and the amount of change in points of the unreached game machine information is sent to the point control means (see FIGS. 77 and 79).
The second gaming machine information transmitting means transmits information capable of specifying the added number specified by the added number specifying means as the gaming machine information to the gaming apparatus (the number of balls is included in the number of added balls) Sent as an action response),
The point control means is
Two-way communication is performed with the game control means in accordance with request information from the game device,
If the result of the two-way communication is a predetermined result, a specific process is executed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing information transmission efficiency while securely retransmitting information regarding a gaming machine connected communicably to the gaming apparatus. . Moreover, according to such a configuration, the arrival of the gaming machine information can be confirmed by the presence / absence of the update of the arrival confirmation information and the update status.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1),
The game control means includes an addition number specifying means (specifying the number of winning balls shown in FIG. 75) for specifying an addition number to a point when a winning occurs.
The second gaming machine information transmitting means transmits information capable of specifying the added number specified by the added number specifying means as the gaming machine information to the gaming apparatus (the number of winning balls is included in the number of added balls) And sent as an operation response).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to reliably and efficiently transmit information on the number of additions to a point.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1),
The game control means includes a second arrival confirmation information updating means (refer to table status inquiry response in FIG. 79) for updating the arrival confirmation information transmitted from the point control means,
The first gaming machine information transmission means responds to the transmission request from the point control means, and the gaming machine information is updated together with the arrival confirmation information updated by the second arrival confirmation information updating means. Send to the point control means (refer to the table status inquiry response in Figure 79),
If the arrival confirmation information transmitted together with the gaming machine information and the arrival confirmation information transmitted to the game control means last time are not in a predetermined relationship, the point control means determines the gaming machine information. It discards and resends the said transmission request (refer FIG. 77).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine information has arrived by updating the arrival confirmation information by both the point control means and the game control means.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
The game control means corrects the arrival confirmation information when it is determined by the arrival determination means that the gaming machine information has not been reached (see FIG. 77).

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined that the gaming machine information has not been reached based on the arrival confirmation information, the arrival confirmation information is corrected. It can be used to confirm the arrival of gaming machine information.

It is a front view showing a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view for explaining the circulation mechanism of a game ball. It is a rear view for demonstrating the circulation mechanism of a game ball. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining various data memorized in the card unit side and a pachinko machine side and its transmission and reception. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing a control mode of storing game history data on each of the CU side and the P base side. It is an explanatory view for explaining maintenance mode. It is an explanatory view for explaining a test mode. It is an explanatory view for explaining non-operating mode. It is an explanatory view for explaining transition conditions to each mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process at the time of detecting abnormality as a result of mutual authentication. It is a figure showing an example of processing with a card unit and a pachinko machine at the time of power supply starting. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of processing of a subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 13, (a) is an authentication sequence at CU power on, and (b) is at game power on. Authentication sequence. It is a figure which shows an example of a process of the subroutine program of the mutual-authentication sequence shown by Fig.14 (a). It is a figure which shows an example of a process of the subroutine program of the chip | tip ID authentication sequence shown by FIG.14 (b). It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of CU communication-control part serial ID attestation sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the apparatus authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the memory | storage setting to EEPROM of an authentication key. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a process of the operation | work message | telegram sequence at the time of normality, (b) is a figure which shows an example of a process of the operation | work message | telegram sequence at the time of abnormality. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when reconnecting a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card | curd is inserted in a card unit. It is a flowchart figure showing processing at the time of insertion which a card unit performs, when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine at the time of consuming the balance of a prepaid card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine at the time of a replay. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in the case of performing subtraction of the number of game balls by the instruction | indication of the card unit side. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine in a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the number of game balls in a pachinko machine runs out during a game. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine when returning a card. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine when interrupting a game. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking and opening the glass door in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the modification of a process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking and opening the glass door in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when releasing and unlocking the cell (front frame) 6 of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine is not connected when starting a power supply in the state in which a card unit is holding card | curd. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the operation instruction | command (non-request | requirement operation | movement) from a card unit does not reach a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response (response with respect to request | requirement absence) from a pachinko machine does not reach a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction | command (response with respect to an addition request | requirement) from a card unit does not reach a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response (response with respect to an addition request | requirement) from a pachinko machine does not arrive at a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction | command (subtraction request | requirement) from a card unit does not reach a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response (response to a subtraction request | requirement) from a pachinko machine does not reach a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of addition refusal with respect to the addition request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of subtraction refusal with respect to the subtraction request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns a clear refusal response with respect to a clear instruction | indication request | requirement of a card unit. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where the pachinko machine returns a permission denial response to the game permission request of the card unit. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where the pachinko machine responds to the gaming prohibition request of the card unit in response to the prohibition refusal. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of glass door open refusal to the glass door open request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of cell (front frame) open refusal with respect to the cell (front frame) open request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when power failure in a card unit after the operation response arrival about addition / subtraction data arrival occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when power supply interruption generate | occur | produces in a card unit before reach | attainment of operation instruction | indication. It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when power supply interruption generate | occur | produces in a card unit before reaching the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when a CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. 50. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when a CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. 51. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. 52. It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when power supply interruption generate | occur | produces in a card unit before the addition request | requirement arrival. It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case a power supply interruption generate | occur | produces in a card unit before the operation response with respect to an addition request | requirement arrival. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. 56. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. 57. It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when power supply interruption generate | occur | produces in a card unit before reach | attainment of a subtraction request | requirement. It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the power supply interruption generate | occur | produces in a card unit before the operation response with respect to a subtraction request | requirement arrival. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. 60. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. 61. It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when power supply interruption generate | occur | produces in a card unit before clearing request | requirement arrival. It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the power supply interruption generate | occur | produces in a card unit before reaching the operation response with respect to a clear request | requirement. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. 65. It is a figure explaining the display screen of the operation state displayed interlockingly with processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of a ball | bowl number counter during game. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process regarding the number-of-games ball | bowl number counter which P payout control parts perform. It is a flowchart which shows the process regarding the floating ball which the main control part of CU performs. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit in case an addition request | requirement generate | occur | produces, and a payout control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a payment control part in, when a subtraction request | requirement generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit in case an operation mode request | requirement generate | occur | produces, and a payout control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between a delivery control part and a main control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between a delivery control part and a main control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between a delivery control part and a main control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the control content of the sequence number between a main control board and a delivery control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a process between the delivery control part at the time of power activation, and a main control board. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of processing between the payout control unit and the main control board during the game. It is a figure which shows an example of a process between the delivery control part at the time of operation mode switching, and a main control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between a delivery control part and the presentation control board for indicators. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between a delivery control part and the presentation control board for indicators. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between a delivery control part and the presentation control board for indicators. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between a delivery control part and the presentation control board for indicators. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between a delivery control part and the presentation control board for indicators. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between a delivery control part and the presentation control board for indicators. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between a delivery control part and the presentation control board for indicators. It is a figure which shows an example of a process between the delivery control part at the time of power activation, and a presentation control board for indicators. It is a figure which shows an example of a process between the delivery control part at the time of card insertion, and a presentation control board for indicators. It is a figure which shows an example of a process between the delivery control part and presentation effect control board for indicators at the time of payment. It is a figure which shows an example of a process between the delivery control part at the time of an addition request | requirement, and a presentation control board for indicators. It is a figure which shows an example of a process between the delivery control part at the time of a subtraction request | requirement, and a presentation control board for indicators. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of processing between the payout control unit and the effect control board for a display during a game. It is a figure which shows an example of a process between the delivery control part and the presentation control board for indicators at the time of card return. It is a figure which shows an example of a process between a payout control part and presentation effect control board in a case where unsent data to a card unit exist. It is a figure which shows an example of a process between the delivery control part at the time of operation mode switching, and a presentation effect control board for indicators. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in a display. (A) is a flowchart showing security related information management processing as processing executed on the upper server side, (B) shows security related information setting processing as processing executed on the CU side (main control unit) It is a flowchart. It is a flowchart which shows the specific control content of the P-P security related information processing. It is a flowchart which shows P security related information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the base monitoring process performed by CU. It is a flowchart which shows the base monitoring process performed by P units. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the front door of the slot machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining various data stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission and reception mode. It is a figure showing storage control of game history data in S unit and CU. It is a front view showing a card unit and a pachinko machine in another example. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing a control mode of storing gaming history data on each of the CU side and the P base side in a modification. It is a figure which shows storage control of the game history data in S unit and CU in a modification. It is a flowchart figure which shows the modification of the process at the time of insertion shown in FIG.

  Hereinafter, embodiments according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In addition, as a concept of the term used in the present embodiment, "game machine" is a game machine (pachinko machine, slot machine, etc.), card unit, Z counter, card issuing device, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange It is a concept including all devices installed in a game arcade such as a device, and the “game device” is a concept in which only the game machine is excluded from the “game device”.

  First, referring to FIG. 1, a plurality of enclosed circulation type pachinko machines (abbreviated as pachinko machines or P units hereinafter) 2 as an example of a game machine are juxtaposed to each game island (not shown) arranged in plurality in the game arcade The card unit (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as CU) 3 of one example of the gaming apparatus is installed at a side position on the predetermined side of the pachinko machine 2 in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 There is. This card unit 3 is issued to a visitor card having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who is not registered as a member, or a member player who has registered as a member in the game arcade. A pachinko machine that accepts a membership card, which is a game storage medium to be played, and uses the gaming value (eg, card balance, number of balls held, number of balls stored, etc.) owned by the player specified by the recorded information on those cards It has a function to make the enclosed ball in 2 be bombarded and to be able to play a game. The visitor card and the membership card are constituted by an IC card.

  The pachinko machine 2 has a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium enclosed therein, and the player operates the bat operating handle 25 to drive the bat firing motor (also referred to as a firing motor) 18 to drive the enclosed ball. The game is configured to be played by hitting the game area 27 on the front of the game board 26 one by one.

  The pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first-class pachinko machine, which is not shown, but a pachinko ball driven into the game area 27 can be won with a starting opening (1) and a starting hole A variable display device is provided which is provided with a mouth (2) and is variably displayed based on a detection signal of a start winning ball in each of the starting holes, and a display result of the variable display device is predetermined. A variable winning ball device (also referred to as a big winning opening) or the like which is opened by being a combination of specific identification information (for example, every second) is provided. The starting opening (2) is composed of an electric tulip that can be changed to a first state (for example, the open state) advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, the closed state) disadvantageous to the player.

  It becomes big hit state by the variable winning a prize ball device opening. In addition, the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of odd variation symbols such as 777) of the combination (all eyes) of the big hit symbol, the probability variation big hit state is A probability fluctuation state (probability state) occurs with an increase in the probability of occurrence of the jackpot following the end of the jackpot state. There are two large winning openings, a large winning opening (1) and a large winning opening (2). For example, when a big hit occurs based on the winning opening in the starting opening (1), the big winning opening (1) is in the first state, and when a big hitting occurs based on the winning in the starting opening (2), the big winning opening (2) is in the first state. Furthermore, the game area 27 is provided with four normal winning openings (1) to (4).

  The pachinko balls thrown into the game area 27 are paid to any winning opening or are collected to the out port (not shown) without winning. The pachinko ball that has won the winning opening and the pachinko ball collected at the out port (not shown) are reduced again to the striking position through the recovery path in the pachinko machine 2. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is hit again into the game area 27.

  On the front side of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting a bill, a projecting portion 305 which is formed to project forward from the device front, and a card insertion / ejection slot for inserting a membership card or visitor card 309 and the like are provided. A membership card or a visitor card inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309 is accepted by a card reader / writer (not shown), and the information recorded in the card is read. In the above-mentioned projecting portion 305, the display card and the number of balls specified by the member card ID and the member ID recorded on the member card are accepted on the side facing the player when the member card is received. There are provided a replay button 319 for carrying out the replay game and an IR light receiving unit 320 for receiving an infrared signal from a remote controller (not shown) possessed by a staff at the game arcade and converting it into an electronic signal and outputting it. There is.

  Furthermore, a loan button 321, a return button 322, and a call button 798 are provided between the display 312 and the replay button 319. The lending button 321 is a button operated to withdraw the prepaid balance specified by the inserted card and use it for gaming. The return button 322 is a button operated when the card inserted in the card insertion / ejection slot 309 is returned. The call button 798 is a button operated by the player when calling an attendant at the game arcade.

  The display unit 312 displays a prepaid balance (also referred to as a card balance or simply a balance) recorded in the inserted game recording medium (card), but the number of game balls to be described later and various other information While being displayable, the surface is configured of a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display unit 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated, if the number of balls acquired by the player is recorded in the inserted card, it is possible to withdraw from the number of balls and play a game with a pachinko machine, When the played card is a membership card and the number of balls is not recorded and the balls are recorded in the hall management computer 1 or the like, the pachinko machine 2 can play a game by withdrawing from the balls.

  The "reserved balls" are game media deposited in the game arcade, and are generally managed by the hall management computer 1 or other management computer installed in the game arcade. On the other hand, the "number of balls held" is the number of game balls owned by the player as a result of the player playing a game with the gaming machine recorded on the card and has not been deposited in the game arcade yet It is the number of balls. Generally, the number of balls the player has acquired on the day at the game arcade is referred to as "bearing ball", and the number of balls acquired by the player before the previous day is the number of balls deposited in the game arcade "pool ball". Say.

  The number of balls held may be managed by a management device for number of balls management set in the game arcade. In short, the difference between "balls" and "balls" is the number of balls deposited in the game arcade after the operation for depositing the ball in the game arcade, or is still deposited in the game arcade It is a point of whether it is the number of balls of the stage not being.

  In the present embodiment, the ball storage data is not directly recorded in the member card but stored in the hall management computer 1 or the upper server 801 in association with the member card number, and the corresponding ball can be searched based on the member card number. It is done. On the other hand, balls are recorded directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall management computer 1 or the upper server 801 in association with the card number.

  The bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 302 is taken in by the money discriminator 344 to identify the authenticity and the bill type.

  At the lower position of the game area 27 in the pachinko machine 2, a display 54, a chance button 56 and a jog dial 57 are provided. The display 54 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and displays a display screen as described later with reference to FIG. 67 to the player. The jog dial 57 is used to select and designate various display items (icons) and the like on the display screen displayed on the display 54 when the player rotates. When the player turns the jog dial 57, the various display items on the display screen displayed on the display 54 are sequentially moved and displayed, and the jog dial 57 is turned. When the player presses the chance button 56 after designating the display item which the player desires to select, the selected display item is designated and the player's selection is decided.

  In the pachinko machine 2, a front frame (also referred to as a cell) 6 and a glass door are provided so as to be able to open and close the left edge of the frame-shaped outer frame with the left edge as a swing center.

  A front frame closure detector 13 (see FIG. 5) for detecting that the front frame 6 is pressed against the outer frame to be in a locked state is provided at a position where the outer frame contacts the front frame 6 . In addition, a glass door closing detector 12 (see FIG. 5) is provided at a contact portion of the front frame 6 with the glass door to detect that the glass door is pressed against the front frame 6 and is in a locked state. ing.

  A front frame opening solenoid 11 (see FIG. 5) is provided on the back surface side of the front frame 6, and the front frame opening solenoid 11 is excited to be in the unlocked state, and the front frame 6 is opened. Further, a glass door open solenoid 10 (see FIG. 5) is provided on the back surface of the front frame 6, and by exciting the glass door open solenoid 10, the lock release state is established and the glass door is opened.

  2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 2, FIG. 3 is a front view for explaining a circulation mechanism of the game balls, and FIG. 4 is a rear view for explaining a circulation mechanism of the game balls. With reference to FIGS. 2-4, the circulation path of the pachinko ball of the enclosed circulation type is mainly demonstrated.

  The game board holding frame 95 of the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a turning lever 100 for attaching a game board, and by turning the turning lever 100, the game board 26 can be detached. On the other hand, all winning balls winning from the winning opening and the variable winning ball device provided in the game area 27 are detected by a winning ball detection switch (not shown) and collected by the winning ball collection cover member 144 for collection. It is guided to the ball passage route 901. On the other hand, the out ball entering the out port 145 also flows down the out ball flowing path 702. An out ball detection switch 701 is provided in the out ball flow down path 702, and a ball flowing down the out ball down path 702 is detected.

  On the other hand, the foul ball flows down the far ball return path 151 and flows down the recovery ball passage path 901 from the far ball return port 150 through the far ball return path 902. In the middle of the foul ball return path 151 is provided a foul ball detection switch 33 for detecting a foul ball flowing down.

  The out ball flowing down the out ball flowing path 702 enters the recovery ball passing path 901, and flows down together with the winning balls and the foul balls to enter the ball recovery path 189. A launch ball detection switch 903 is provided in the middle of the recovery ball passage route, and all the balls in which the winning ball, the out ball and the far ball merge are detected.

  Further, a supply 50-piece detection switch (also referred to as a game ball shortage detection switch) 904 is provided at a midway point on the downstream side of the launch ball detection switch 903. The 50 replenishment detection switch 904 is for detecting whether the number of pachinko balls incorporated in the pachinko machine 2 has reached a predetermined number (50). On the other hand, the above-mentioned shot ball detection switch 903 is one in which all the pachinko balls shot into the game area 27 are collected and detected, and the number of shot balls shot into the game area 27 and the shot balls When the number of pachinko balls detected by the detection switch 903 becomes equal, it is detected that all pachinko balls driven into the game area 27 have been collected.

  The launch ball detection switch 903 having such a role is also used to detect that the number of the enclosed balls incorporated in the pachinko machine 2 exceeds a predetermined number (50). That is, when the number of pachinko balls sealed in the pachinko machine 2 is a predetermined number (50 pieces), the last 50th pachinko ball of the sealed balls suspended in the non-operating state where the game is not performed The position is configured to be located just between the refill 50 detection switch 904 and the launch ball detection switch 903. As a result, when more than a predetermined number (50) of pachinko balls are enclosed in the gaming machine 2, the pachinko balls parked in the non-played state exceed the detection position of the launch ball detection switch 903. The firing ball detection switch 903 always detects the ball, whereby it is possible to detect that the number of filled balls is too large. On the other hand, if the number of the enclosed balls is less than the predetermined number (50), the pachinko balls parked in the non-gaming state become downstream of the detection position of the 50 supply detection switch 904 and supply 50 The individual detection switch 904 is in the non-detection state in which the ball is not detected. As a result, it can be detected that the number of sealing balls is less than a predetermined number (50).

  The pachinko ball which has flowed down the ball recovery path 189 enters a conveying device 190 for conveying the pachinko ball upward. The conveying device 190 incorporates a conveying screw 190 b that is rotated by the conveying motor 40, and when the conveying screw 190 b rotates, pachinko balls are conveyed upward. The transport device 190 is further provided with a pair of left and right polishing members 913 for polishing the pachinko balls by contacting the pachinko balls in the middle of transportation, and the pachinko balls are polished upward while being transported upward. Ru. The polishing member 913 is rotated by the driving force of the polishing motor 193a to polish pachinko balls.

  A ball raising switch (lower) 41 b is provided in the vicinity of the pachinko ball inlet of the conveyance device 190, and pachinko balls entering the conveyance device 190 are detected. On the other hand, the pachinko ball which is conveyed upward by the conveying device 190 and discharged from the conveying device 190 is detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. The detected pachinko ball flows down to the rectifier 916. The rectifier 916 is for supplying one pachinko ball to the ball firing position. The player operates the striking operation handle 25 to drive the striking launch motor 18 so that the striking hammer 920 is intermittently rocked. One pachinko ball supplied to the launch position by the rectifier 916 is sprung by the ball hitting hammer 920 and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27.

  In order to supply the pachinko balls one by one to the firing position of the ball by the hitting hammer 920, the rectifier 916 is provided with a rectifier solenoid 196a and a ball feed member 196b which is pivoted up and down by the driving force of the rectifier solenoid 196a. There is. The ball feed member 196b is U-shaped as shown in FIG. 2 and receives one pachinko ball which has flowed down, and the rectifier solenoid 196a is excited in that state to drive the ball feed by its driving force. The member 196 b swings downward. Then, the pachinko ball which has been received is supplied to the one ball hitting position. The ball hammer 920 strikes one supplied pachinko ball into the game area 27.

  The striking hammer 920 is biased by a spring in the striking direction of the striking ball, and by the action of a cam rotated by the driving force of the striking launch motor 18, the striking hammer 920 is in the direction opposite to the striking direction (back swing direction). It is rocked by When the predetermined amount of rocking is performed, the action of the cam is released, and the ball striking hammer 920 is rocked in the striking direction by the biasing force of the spring, and the pachinko ball is resiliently fired. The above-mentioned spring for biasing in the hitting direction can adjust the biasing force by rotating the hitting operation handle 25 by the player, whereby the hitting launch force can be adjusted.

  A ball removal portion 915 is provided between the rectifier 916 and the ball raising switch (upper) 41a described above. The ball removing portion 915 is provided with a ball removing motor 195 a. By operating the ball removal switch 922 provided on the relay substrate 921 by the staff in the game arcade, the ball removal motor 195a is rotated by a predetermined amount, and the enclosed ball can be pulled out of the path.

  The detection signal of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is used to control the transport motor 40 on and off. In a state in which the striking operation by the striking operation handle 25 is not performed and the striking operation is not performed, the pachinko balls conveyed upward by the conveying device 190 flow down at the rectifier 916 because the rectifier 916 does not perform the ball feeding operation. Are arrested and stopped. At the stage when the pachinko ball staying there reaches the detection position of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a always outputs a detection signal of the ball. When the continuous output state of the detection signal of such a ball continues for a predetermined time (for example, several msec), the drive of the conveyance motor 40 is stopped, and the upward conveyance of the ball is stopped.

  On the other hand, when the player rotates the hitting operation handle 25 to make the ball hit and launch, the rectifier 916 executes the ball feeding operation, and as a result, the ball which is stopped at the location of the rectifier 916 is stopped. It is sent and it will be in the state where the detection signal of a ball is not output from ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Then, the drive of the conveyance motor 40 is started and the balls are lifted. Since the number of balls transported per unit time by the drive of the transport motor 40 is controlled to be larger than the number of balls fired per unit time by the drive of the launch motor 18, the drive of the transport motor 40 is started After a while, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a constantly outputs a detection signal of the ball again, and the driving of the transport motor 40 is stopped. However, since the hit shot continues, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a again does not output a ball detection signal. Then, the drive of the conveyance motor 40 is started and the balls are lifted. In the operating state in which the player performs the hitting operation, the driving and stopping of the transport motor 40 are repeated.

  The firing motor 18 is provided with a firing motor origin sensor 37 (see FIG. 5). The firing motor origin sensor 37 is for stopping the firing motor 18 at a predetermined origin position. The firing motor 18 is stopped when the player releases his hand from the touch ring 35 provided on the hitting operation handle 25 and firing is performed when the firing motor origin sensor 37 detects the origin of the firing motor 18 at that time. The motor 18 is controlled to stop. When the power of the pachinko machine 2 is turned on, the firing motor 18 is deviated from the home position, and when the output of the firing motor origin sensor 37 is OFF, the firing motor 18 is rotated forward according to the current position of the firing motor 18 Alternatively, control is performed to move the stopping position of the firing motor 18 to the origin without causing the pachinko ball to be reversed. The stop position of the firing motor 18 at the present time and the position of the origin are compared with each other to determine whether the forward or reverse rotation direction of the firing motor 18 is the rotation direction close to the origin position. The stop position may be moved to the origin by performing rotation control.

  Similarly, a deburring motor origin sensor 195b (see FIG. 5) is provided in the deburring motor 195a, and the deburring motor 195a is controlled to stop at the origin position.

  The prize ball detection switch, the game ball shortage detection switch 904, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, the ball raising switch (lower) 41b, the foul ball detection switch 33, and the out ball detection switch 701 have a capacitance by passing balls. It consists of a proximity switch that detects changes in. On the other hand, only the launch ball detection switch 903 is constituted by a light emitting and receiving type photo sensor. In a game arcade, there may be a case where a fraudulent act using a radio wave is made to transmit a fraudulent radio wave and cause a ball detection switch to be falsely detected incorrectly. When such an unauthorized radio wave is transmitted, the proximity switch may erroneously detect, but the photosensor does not have the possibility of erroneous detection.

  As a result, it is assumed that the prize ball detection switch, the far ball detection switch 33 and the out ball detection switch 701, which are configured by the proximity switch, output a detection signal associated with an erroneous detection when a fraudulent act of transmitting an illegal radio wave occurs. Also, since there is no risk of erroneous detection of the launch ball detection switch 903 configured with a photosensor, the total number of detection balls and the launch balls of the foul ball detection switch 33, the out ball detection switch 701 and the winning ball detection switch A wrinkle occurs between the number of balls detected by the detection of the detection switch 903 and the number of balls detected. As a result, it is possible to monitor fraudulent activity by radio waves. The above-mentioned winning ball detection switch, game ball shortage detection switch 904, ball raising switch (upper) 41a, ball raising switch (lower) 41b, far ball detection switch 33, out ball detection switch 701, firing ball detection switch 903 , All may be configured with the same type of switch.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, an outline of control circuits of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 will be described.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a main control unit 323 configured of a microcomputer or the like. The main control unit 323 includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a RAM (functions as a work area of the CPU). An Random Access Memory (Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided. The main control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit 324 for communicating with the hall management computer 1 or the like, and a CU communication control unit 80 for communicating with the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2. Is provided.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a connection portion 330 to the pachinko machine 2 side, and the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection portion 20 to the card unit 3 side. These connection parts 330 and 20 are comprised, for example by the connector etc. The CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are communicably connected via the connectors 330 and 20 and the connection wiring. The CPU of the main control unit 323 transmits an error display command to the display control unit 797 and detects an error on the display unit 312 when detecting an unconnected error such as disconnection of the external communication unit 324 and the hall management computer 1. Control to turn on or blink the malfunction notification lamp (not shown). Furthermore, when the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as disconnection between the CU communication control unit 80 and the P communication control unit 81, the main control unit 323 transmits an error display command to the display control unit 797 and an error to the display 312 At the same time, control is performed to turn on or blink an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) and transmit a notification signal to the hall management computer 1 that an error has occurred.

  The authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money identifier 344 and the identification result signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the IR light receiving unit 320 receives an infrared ray emitted from a remote controller possessed by a staff of the game arcade, a light reception signal is inputted to the main control section 323. The card reader / writer 327 reads the recorded information of the inserted card, and the read information is input to the main control unit 323, and is written from the main control unit 323 to the inserted card into the card reader / writer 327. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer 327 writes the data to the inserted card.

  The CPU 805 of the main control unit 323 determines the suitability of the card based on the read information from the card reader / writer 327, and when it is determined that the card is an incorrect card (forged card etc.), an error display command to the display control unit 797 Control to cause the display unit 312 to display an error, turn on or blink the abnormality notification lamp (not shown), and transmit a notification signal indicating that an error has occurred to the hall management computer 1 .

  A display control unit 797 is connected to the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 outputs display data such as the balance or the number of game balls to the display control unit 797. The display control unit 797 receives the output display data and controls the display 312 to display the display data. Also, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323 via the display control unit 797.

  When the player operates the lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the call button 798, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323.

  The pachinko machine 2 has a main control board 16 for controlling the progression of the game of the pachinko machine 2, a payout control section 17, a launch control board 31, a game ball control section 34, a launch section 38 and a presentation section 50. Is equipped.

  A CU communication control unit 80 is further connected to the main control unit 323, and the CU communication control unit 80 and a P-unit communication control unit 81 provided in the pachinko machine 2 are connected via the connector 330 and the connector 20. It is electrically connected. Also, the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17 are configured by an LSI 799 of one chip. Then, as will be described later, various commands of an addition request, a subtraction request, a game permission / prohibition request, an addition request ball number, a subtraction request ball number are transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the P communication control unit 81. Various commands are transmitted from the P-unit communication control unit 81 to the payout control unit 17.

  From the payout control unit 17 to the CU communication control unit 80 via the P unit communication control unit 81, the number of gaming balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the starting hole winning information, the number of determined symbols, the big hit information, various types of error information A response is sent.

  The main control board 16 is mounted with a game control microcomputer. The gaming machine control microcomputer includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a RAM (functions as a work area of the CPU). An Random Access Memory (Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, etc. are provided.

  The payout control unit 17 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a RAM (functions as a work area of the CPU). An Random Access Memory (Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, etc. are provided. The gaming control microcomputer mounted on the main control board 16 and the P communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17 of the LSI 799 may be integrated into one chip.

  In addition, the out ball detection switch 701, the far ball detection switch 33, the glass door open solenoid 10, the front frame open solenoid 11, the glass door close detector 12, and the front frame close detector 13 are electrically connected to the payout control unit 17. It is provided in the connected state.

  A connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting opening winning information, error information, number of symbol determinations, big hit information, manufacturer specific big hit information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 is configured to perform operation control on the condition that the payout control unit 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of pachinko balls that have won a winning opening other than the starting opening. The payout control unit 17 receiving this detection signal performs control to add the number of balls to be provided for one winning ball to the number of gaming balls and the number of additional balls.

  The starting opening winning combination information is information indicating that a pachinko ball is won in either of the starting opening 1 or the starting opening 2. The error information is information for notifying the payout control unit 17 that an error has occurred while the main control board 16 is performing game control. As a specific example of the error, for example, a magnetic sensor error that brings a magnet close to the game area 27 and guides the game ball to the winning opening, a radio wave sensor error that causes a fraudulent electric wave to be emitted and turns on the winning ball detection switch, There is an incorrect winning error or the like in which a detection signal is output from a 10-count switch that detects winning balls of the variable winning ball device when the ball device (attacker) is closed. When the CPU of the main control board 16 detects a disconnection due to such an error or a connection confirmation signal, the CPU turns on or blinks a call lamp provided on the curtain board and an I / O port of the main control board 16 An abnormality notification signal for notifying that the abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1 is output from (not shown).

  The symbol determination frequency is information of a symbol determined as a display result of the variable display device for winning on the starting opening 1 or the starting opening 2. The information on the symbol determined as the display result of the variable display device for the winning on the starting opening 1 is called symbol determination frequency 1. The information on the symbol determined as the display result of the variable display device for the winning on the starting opening 2 is called symbol determination frequency 2.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred, and the breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each maker and maker-specific jackpot information indicating a maker-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine maker, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability change information when a definite change occurs in association with the large hit, and in conjunction with the large hit When a short time state (a control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the short time information is included. The maker-specific jackpot is, for example, a jackpot state adopted only by a certain gaming machine maker, such as a sudden change.

  A health check command and a winning ball count acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether the main control board 16 is operating normally. The winning ball number reception command is a command indicating that the number of additional balls has been received.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701 to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 to which the out-of-ball detection signal is input subtracts and updates the number of playing balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27). As described later, the payout control unit 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33 adds and updates the number of added balls and the number of gaming balls, and subtracts and updates the number of playing balls.

  When the dispensing control unit 17 controls the glass door opening solenoid 10 by excitation, the glass door is unlocked and can be opened. When the dispensing control unit 17 controls the excitation of the front frame opening solenoid 11, the front frame 6 is unlocked and can be opened.

  By pressing the glass door against the front frame 6 and closing it, the glass door closure detector 12 outputs a glass door closure detection signal and inputs it to the dispensing control unit 17. By pressing the front frame 6 against the outer frame and closing it, a front frame closing detection signal is output from the front frame closing detector 13 and input to the payout control unit 17.

  The CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3 and the P communication control unit 81 of the pachinko machine 2 are electrically connected, and from the CU communication control unit 80 to the payout control unit 17 via the P communication control unit 81. Various commands of an addition request, a subtraction request, a game permission / prohibition request, an addition request ball number, and a subtraction request ball number are transmitted.

  The addition request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when the gaming balls are borrowed from the prepaid balance or the replay lending is performed as described later, and the payout control unit 17 receives the number and adds the number of gaming balls. Update. The subtraction request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when divided transfer of balls (ball sharing processing) or wagon service is performed as described later, and the payout control unit 17 receives the number of gaming balls. Subtract and update.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command for requesting the payout control unit 17 to permit the game or a command for requesting the prohibition of the game. The required number of balls to be added is a command for designating the number of balls to be added to the number of gaming balls by the above-described addition request command. The required number of balls to be subtracted is a command for specifying the number of balls to be subtracted from the number of gaming balls by the above-described subtraction request command.

  From the payout control unit 17 to the CU communication control unit 80 through the P communication control unit 81, various responses of the number of gaming balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the starting hole winning information, the number of determined symbols, the big hit information, the error information Is sent. The number of gaming balls is calculated by the payout control unit 17 based on various signals such as a winning detection signal, starting opening winning information, out ball detection signal, and foul ball detection signal transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. Total number of game balls at the current time. The number of additional balls is the number of additional balls to be added to the number of gaming balls based on the winning detection signal, starting opening winning information and far ball detection signal input from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. It is. The subtractive ball number is the subtractive ball number to be subtracted from the number of game balls based on the firing detection signal transmitted from the game ball control unit 34 described later to the payout control unit 17. Each response of the starting opening winning combination information, the number of symbol determinations, the big hit information, and the error information is a response specifying the information transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 described above.

  The launcher 38 of the game ball control unit is provided with a launch motor 18, a touch ring 35, a single shot launch switch 36 and a launch motor origin sensor 37. The touch ring 35 is for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25 and outputting a signal (touch ring input signal). The emission control board 31 generates an emission motor excitation output when the touch ring input signal is input, and drives the emission motor 18. The single-shot firing switch 36 is for performing an operation (single-shot firing operation) for the player to hit the pachinko ball into the game area 27 one by one, and when the single-shot firing operation is performed, the single-shot firing switch 36 is used. A single firing switch signal is output. The firing motor origin sensor 37 detects the origin position of the firing motor 18 and outputs the detection signal, and the origin is detected each time the firing motor 18 makes one rotation, and a signal is output.

  The signal of the touch ring and the detection signal of the single shot switch are input from the launch unit 38 to the launch control substrate 31. Further, a launch detection signal indicating that the pachinko ball has been launched and a detection signal of the launch motor origin sensor 37 are input from the launch unit 38 to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 that has received the firing detection signal updates the number of subtracted balls and the number of playing balls by 1 and updates the number of gaming balls by 1 with respect to the detection of one fired ball.

  A launch control signal and a launch permission signal are output from the payout control unit 17 to the launch control board 31. The launch control board 31 having received the signal outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18. As a result, the pachinko ball is in a state of being bombarded to the game area 27.

  The ball removal portion 39 is provided with the ball removal motor 195a, the ball removal motor origin sensor 195b, and the ball removal switch 922 described based on FIG. 2 and FIG. 3. When the attendant of the game arcade operates the ball removal switch 922, the detection signal is input to the payout control unit 17. Further, an origin detection signal of the ball removal motor origin sensor 195 b is input to the payout control unit 17. On the other hand, the deburring motor drive control signal is output from the payout control unit 17 to the deburring motor 195a.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, the transport unit 45 provided in the game ball control unit 34 includes the transport motor 40, the game ball shortage detection switch 904, the ball raising switch (lower) 41b, and the ball raising. A switch (upper) 41 a and a launch ball detection switch 903 are provided. A delivery motor excitation output signal for exciting the delivery motor 40 is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the delivery unit 45. On the other hand, 50 replenishment signals as detection signals of the game ball shortage detection switch 904 are input from the transport unit 45 to the payout control unit 17, and detection of the ball raising switch (lower) 41b and the ball raising switch (upper) 41a A signal of transport detection (pass / full) as a signal is input. Furthermore, a detection signal of the firing ball (merged ball) is input as a detection signal of the firing ball detection switch 903. Based on this detection signal, the payout control unit 17 subtracts and updates the number of balls in the game (the number of balls floating in the game area 27).

  The counting unit 46 provided in the game ball control unit 34 is provided with a foul ball detection switch 33 and an out ball detection switch 701 in addition to the above-described ball raising switch (upper) 41 a and the fired ball detection switch 903. ing. A detection signal of the far ball detection switch 33 is input to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 adds and updates the number of added balls and the number of game balls, and subtracts and updates the number of balls in the game (the number of floating balls) based on the far ball detection signal.

  A polishing motor excitation signal is output from the dispensing control unit 17 to the above-described polishing motor 193 a provided in the polishing unit 47.

  The effect unit 50 includes an effect control substrate 53 for an indicator, a power source substrate 51 for an indicator, a power source relay substrate 52 for an indicator, an indicator 54, a ROM substrate 55 for an indicator, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57. It is provided. The display effect control board 53 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a VDP. Then, by inputting a data read signal to the ROM mounted on the display ROM substrate 55, the image data is read, the display data is transmitted to the display 54, and the display 54 is displayed on the display 54. Do. In addition, the button input signal of the chance button 56 and the dial input signal of the jog dial 57 are input to the effect control board 53 for display, and the effect control board 53 for display sends the chance button input signal and the jog dial input to the display 54 Then, the display 54 displays a display screen on which the operation of the jog dial 57 and the operation of the chance button 56 are reflected.

  Power for a predetermined voltage from the display power source substrate 51 is supplied to the display effect control substrate 53 via the display power source relay substrate 52.

  A display control command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. The display control commands include a gaming machine information notification command for notifying gaming machine information, insertion of a card unit, a card insertion notification command for notifying return, and a card return notification command.

  Here, the gaming machine information is, for example, information including the current ball related information described in FIG. 6, and specifically, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of game balls, the winning of the starting openings 1, 2 Such as the number. More specifically, various types of information are shown in FIGS. 82 and 83.

  As the command from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate for display 53, the next command is transmitted every 300 ms after transmission of the previous command. Then, the display effect control board 53 detects a line disconnection when the next command is not received despite the elapse of a predetermined time exceeding 300 ms after the reception of the command, and performs a time over detection process (error process). Specifically, if the next command is not transmitted despite the fact that it has exceeded 300 ms since the previous command was received, the error count is incremented by one, and when the error count is counted ten times in a row, The effect control board 53 detects a time-out to initialize the communication state, and performs control to display the lighting of the call lamp and the error animation on the display 54.

  The variable display device is not shown in FIG. The main control board 16 is connected to a presentation control board (not shown) for display control of the variable display device, and the presentation control board is based on a command transmitted from the main control board 16. Display control.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the main ones of various data stored in each of the CU side and the P base side and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CU side manages the current number of game balls by calculating the fluctuation of the number of game balls on the P-unit side. The P game side also calculates and stores the current number of game balls. However, when the number of game balls on the P side becomes 0, the P ball controls to stop the firing of ball by itself quickly. It is a secondary thing used only to Since the main control of the number of game balls is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of game balls on the side of P, and the cost of P can be minimized.

  In particular, compared with CU, the P unit has a short replacement cycle in the game arcade and replacement is performed early. In relation to that, by giving the main management function regarding the number of game balls on P side to CU side and suppressing the cost of P side, it is possible to reduce the running cost of the game arcade introducing the enclosed type game machine It has the advantage of

  FIG. 6 shows stored data of the RAM provided in the main control unit 323 on the CU side and stored data of the RAM mounted on the payout control unit 17 on the P side. First, when the power is turned on in a state where the P unit (pachinko machine 2) and the CU (card unit 3) are electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the game arcade, the payout control unit 17 on the P unit side The main control board 16 (see FIG. 12) sends the main chip ID, the chip maker code, the gaming machine maker code and the gaming machine product code, and the main chip ID, chip maker code, gaming machine maker code and gaming machine The product code is sent to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored in the payout control unit 17 (see FIG. 12) itself is sent to the CU side. In FIG. 6, the chip maker code, the gaming machine maker code, and the gaming machine product code are not shown. The main chip ID, the chip maker code, the gaming machine maker code, and the gaming machine product code are stored in a memory such as a ROM of the main control board 16. The payout chip ID is stored in a memory such as a ROM of the payout control unit 17, for example. The main chip ID is a unique code for identifying whether or not the main control board 16 is normal. The chip maker code is a code for identifying the maker that manufactured the chip mounted on the main control board 16. The gaming machine maker code is a code for identifying the maker that manufactured the P-unit 2. The gaming machine product code is a commodity identification code attached to the P-unit 2.

  On the CU side, the main chip ID, the chip maker code, the gaming machine maker code, the gaming machine product code, and the payout chip ID which have been transmitted are stored. Next, data of the connection time, that is, the time when the CU side and the P side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the P side, and the P side stores the transmitted connection time .

  In this state, the main chip ID, the chip maker code, the gaming machine maker code, the gaming machine product code, the payout chip ID, and the connection time information identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the P side. Become. When the power is turned on after that, the P side to the CU side, that is, the main chip ID, the chip maker code, the gaming machine maker code, the gaming machine product code, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data Will be sent.

  The CU side collates the transmitted data with the already stored data, and determines whether the same P unit as the previous time is connected. As for connection time data, new connection time data for which communication between the CU side and P unit side is started every time the power is raised is transmitted from the CU side to the P unit side, and the new connection time data Is stored on the P platform side.

  Also, each time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted on the CU side and P side, the sequence number (SQN) is added and updated by one each, and the sequence number is stored on the CU side and the P side. Ru. This SQN is a communication number for checking whether the number is updated and communication is properly performed every time data is transmitted / received between the CU and P units. The SQN is the last updated number of the updated communication number.

  A specific aspect of backup of SQN in CU and P in this embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the P units in the operation instruction, and then, upon receiving the SQN from the P units, rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup into the received SQN. Then, when transmitting the next operation instruction, SQN stored in the backup storage is updated by 1 and transmitted to P units, and the transmitted SQN is backed up and stored. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in the P unit, the SQN received from the CU is backed up by the operation instruction, and next, when the operation response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 addition and transmitted Backup and store sent SQN. Then, when the next operation response is received, the backup SQN is rewritten to the received SQN and stored. Such processing is repeated on the P unit.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 66, which will be described later, when a communication break occurs in the middle of communication, the SQN is backed up and stored until the communication reconnection, but on the P side, the communication break occurrence time Since the operation response is always transmitted regardless of (see FIGS. 50 to 66), the SQN stored as backup until communication reconnection is always the last transmitted SQN. On the other hand, the CU side transmits the operation instruction according to the time of occurrence of communication disconnection or receives the operation instruction (see FIGS. 50 to 66), so backup storage is performed until communication reconnection. SQN is either the last transmitted or the last received.

  For example, the CU side transmits a certain operation instruction to the P side, and transmits the sequence number n at that time, and the P side stores the transmitted sequence number n. Then, when an operation response is returned from the P base side to the CU side, the one (n + 1) obtained by adding 1 to the stored sequence number n is also transmitted. On the CU side, it is judged that data communication has been normally performed because 1 is added to the already-stored sequence number n + 1, and the sequence number is incremented by one when the operation instruction is sent next time. Then, the n + 2 sequence number is sent to the P base.

  Next, the ball related information (ball related information being counted) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side. The current ball related information is stored in the current ball related information storage area of the RAM. Specifically, when a pachinko ball thrown into the game area 27 wins and the added ball number information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17, the added ball number counter is counted by the added ball number counter. The counting is performed, and the value of the addition ball number counter (number of addition balls) is transmitted from the P-unit side to the CU side. Further, if a pachinko ball is shot into the game area 27 and the shot ball is detected by the shot ball detection switch, the subtraction ball number counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the detection signal, and subtraction thereof The value of the ball number counter (subtracted ball number) is transmitted from the P base side to the CU side.

  Furthermore, pachinko balls are won in the starting opening (1) or starting opening (2) and the starting opening (1) winning signal or starting opening (2) winning signal is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 In such a case, the payout control unit 17 counts those winning numbers on the P-unit side with the starting opening 1 winning number counter or the starting opening 2 winning number counter, and transmits the count value from the P side to the CU side. Furthermore, the payout control unit 17 counts the number of gaming balls at the current time with the number of gaming balls counter based on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls, and the count value of the gaming ball number counter is from P to CU side Send to

  On the P side, the values of the additional ball counter, the subtract ball counter, the starting opening 1 winning number counter, the starting opening 2 winning number counter, and the gaming ball number counter are sent to the CU every time they are transmitted to the CU side After storing (rewriting) as backup data in the ball related information storage area last time, the values of the added ball number counter, the subtracted ball number counter, the starting opening 1 winning number counter and the starting opening 2 winning number counter as current ball related information are 0 clear. In the present embodiment, "clear" has the same meaning as "initialization".

  As a result, in the storage area of the last ball related information (the current ball related information transmitted immediately before), the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting opening 1 wins, which are the current ball related information transmitted to the CU side immediately before And, data of the starting opening 2 winning number is stored as backup data. This backup data includes not only the value of each current counter at the time of the next transmission but also the value of each previous counter which was not transmitted when the ball related information is not currently transmitted from the P base to the CU. It is for enabling transmission.

  On the CU side, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), total number of subtracted balls (total number of reduced balls), starting opening (1) total winning number (starting opening (1) Accumulated number of times), starting opening (2) total number of winnings (starting opening (2) accumulated number of times), the number of game balls is stored.

  The total additional balls number and the number of gaming balls are updated based on the value of the additional ball number counter (number of additional balls) transmitted from the P-unit side. In addition, the total number of subtracted balls and the number of gaming balls are updated based on the value of the number-of-subtracted ball counter (number of subtracted balls) transmitted from the P-base side. Furthermore, based on the value of the starting opening 1 winning number counter transmitted from P units, the starting opening (1) total winning number is updated and the value of the starting opening 2 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit side Based on the starting opening (2) to update the total number of winning. As described above, the CU can manage the latest number of game balls by updating the number of game balls according to the current ball related information transmitted one by one from the P-unit. Similarly, the CU updates the total additional number of balls, the total number of subtractive balls, the starting opening (1), (2) the total number of winnings according to the current ball related information transmitted one by one from P units. It becomes possible to manage information.

  In addition, the breakdown of the "number of added balls" is the game ball obtained number information and the back ball added information. A back ball is a foul ball. In addition, "subtractive ball number" is also referred to as gaming ball firing number information.

  In addition to the values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter, the CU receives the count value of the gaming ball number counter (also referred to as the number of gaming balls or the total number of gaming balls) in addition to the values of the addition ball number counter and the subtraction ball number counter. The number of game balls stored by itself is updated based on the values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter, and the count value of the game ball number counter sent from the P base is not used. For this reason, even if the number of game balls sent from the P-unit side does not match the number of game balls managed by the CU side, the game in which the number of game balls on the CU side has been sent from the P-unit side It will not be updated with the number of balls.

  Furthermore, the CU collates the value of the gaming ball number counter transmitted from the P-unit side with the current gaming ball number updated on the CU side, and determines the consistency as to whether or not they match.

  The CU sends normal (normal) operation request (command) and normal (normal) operation response with P units on condition that determination (match confirmation) is made to match (match). Continue receiving the response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control to shift to an error state, the CU performs recovery processing and transmits a command of communication start request to P units, and the number of game balls of P units is calculated according to data of bit 1 of data correction request included in the command The game ball total number information is corrected to the number of game balls after correction (game ball total number information) on the CU side. In addition, although it correct | amends to the number of game balls managed by CU side as a process to correct | amend, it replaces with it and the number of game balls managed by CU side and the game memorized by P stand side It may be corrected to an average value with the number of balls.

  Further, instead of such correction processing, for example, an error notification is performed by the display unit 312, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 or the upper server 801 (in this case) An error notification may be performed by the hall management computer 1 or the upper server 801), or a predetermined notification may be performed to urge an artificial response by a clerk.

  As described above, the CU receives the values of various counters transmitted from the P-unit side, and calculates and manages the number of gaming balls at the current time based on the value of the addition / subtraction ball number counter. It has a main management function. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function on the P unit. By that amount, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the side of P for the purpose of prohibiting the game immediately when the number of game balls reaches zero. However, the game ball number counter for storing the number of game balls may not be provided on the P platform side.

  The CU performs a game ball number match determination process of checking whether the calculated game ball number at the current point in time and the value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P base side match or not. And a function to perform control to shift to an error state when there is no match (error control at the time of mismatch).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, although the number of gaming balls is stored also on the P side, it is determined whether the number of gaming balls matches the number of gaming balls managed and stored on the CU side. It is possible to do it (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of gaming balls stored on the gaming machine side does not match the number of gaming balls managed and stored on the CU side due to improper behavior or other circumstances, that effect can be checked. Although the determination function is provided on the CU side here, for example, the number of game balls stored on the CU side and the game stored on the P base side are stored by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU. The number of balls may be received and it may be determined whether or not both match.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the CU further has a storage area for storing balls (balls) and a storage area for storing the card balance of the received (inserted) card. The main control unit 323 of the CU (see FIG. 12) responds to an input requesting use of balls (for example, pressing input of a replay button (also referred to as replay button) 319 provided on the CU). A predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area to be stored. In addition, the main control unit 323 of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area storing the card balance in response to an input requesting use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation to use for a game by debiting the value from the gaming value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls held, or the number of balls stored) owned by the player, The number of requested addition balls for adding the number to the gaming ball number counter is transmitted from the CU side to the P base side. In response to that, on the P side, the game ball counter is added and updated.

  On the other hand, when an operation is performed to order a so-called wagon service or the like in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink etc., the number of balls requested for subtraction of gaming value owned by the player is CU side Transmitted to the P platform side. On the P side, in response to that, the game ball counter is decremented and updated.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a control mode of storing game history data on each of the CU side and the P base side. The game history data is data indicating the history of the gaming state generated by the player playing a game with the P platform 2. For example, the number of times of start which is the number of times of variable display of the variable display device (variable The number of start of fluctuation of the display device), the number of occurrences of the big hit, the number of starts from the previous big hit to the present big hit, the value of the base, and the like. The game history data includes game history data throughout the day in the P units and game history data collected for each player in the P units. Then, although the details will be described later, the former game history data is stored in the corresponding P game history data storage unit provided on both the P side and the CU side, and the latter game history data is stored on the P side and the CU side Are stored in the current player game history data storage section provided on both sides or the backup storage section provided only on the P-unit side. That is, game history data throughout the day in the P units and game history data collected for each player in the P units are stored in both the CU 3 and the P unit 2.

  Referring to FIG. 7, various types of game data such as a big hit and start (variation start of variable display device) are generated by the player playing a game with P platform 2 and the game data is input to game history data management portion 291 Be done. For example, the normal game data generated as a result of the player playing a game on P units is aggregated by the business mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 291 provided in the payout control unit 17, and the accumulated game history is collected. The data is input to a display effect control unit 292 provided on the display effect control board 53, and the game history data is accumulated and stored in the P game history data storage unit. The current P game history data storage unit can store 10 days of game history data including today's game history data. When the player operates the jog dial 57 and the chance button 56 to select and operate the game history data of the day to be displayed, the game history data of the selected day is displayed by the display 54. The communication between the display effect control unit 292 and the game history data management unit 291 is one-way communication from the game history data management unit 291 to the display effect control unit 292.

  On the other hand, the aforementioned game data input to the game history data management unit 291 is also transmitted to, for example, the game history data management unit 391 provided in the main control unit 323 via the CU communication control unit 80 of CU3. The sales mode processing unit of the gaming history data management unit 391 counts up the gaming data. The counted game history data is stored in the corresponding P game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. The unit P game history data storage unit on the CU 3 side is configured to be able to store only the game history data of the day. Then, when the player performs touch operation on the display 312 configured by the touch panel to display the P game history data, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the game history data is recorded. Under the control of the management unit 391, the game history data of the day stored in the current P game history data storage unit is displayed by the display 312.

  On the other hand, CU3 is configured to be able to display game history data of the other P units 2 installed in the game arcade by means of the display 312. Specifically, when the player touches the operation button icon of the other P unit information display displayed on the display unit 312, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the other P unit information is displayed. Due to the operation of the processing unit, the other game history data request request is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the hall management computer 1. The hall management computer 1 receives the game history data of the other P's 2 via the other CU 3 and returns the received other P's game history data to the game history data management unit 391. The game history data management unit 391 processes the other P unit game history data sent back by the other P unit information processing unit and the processed other P unit game history data is processed by the data storage unit 392 other P unit game It is stored in the history data storage unit. Then, the stored other P game history data is displayed by the display 312.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to totalize the game history data for each player who has played a game in the P-unit 2 and to display the game history data for each player by the display 54, 312. In order to count the game history data for each player, it is necessary to distinguish the player who is playing a game on the P platform 2. As player identification information for identifying the player, C-ID (card ID) stored in a member card owned by a player who is a member is used. The C-ID is an ID that is stored in the card and identifies the cards. The member card is issued to the player who has become a member in the game arcade, and the member and the member card have a one-to-one correspondence relationship. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card can identify not only the member card but also the member player. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card functions as player identification information for identifying the player. In addition, the C-ID of the visitor card also sets the player in the game from the time when the player inserts cash to start the game to the end of the game (until the return button 322 is operated, etc.) It becomes the information to identify.

  When a player who is a member inserts a membership card into the CU3, the C-ID stored in the inserted membership card and the type of the card are read, and the C-ID and the type are displayed in the data storage unit 392. It is stored in the player game history data storage unit. On the other hand, the read C-ID and the type are transmitted from the CU 3 to the P base 2 by the command of the card insertion request, and in the P base 2, the received C-ID and the type from the game history data management unit 291 for display It is transmitted to the effect control unit 292 and stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the effect control unit for display 292. Further, in response to the card insertion request command, the P-base 2 sends back a response of the card insertion response to the CU. The “type” is not shown in FIG.

  In this state, the game history data from the time when the C-ID and the type are stored in the current player game history data storage unit by the player playing a game with the P platform 2 is the current condition of the effect controller for display 292 It is accumulated and stored in the player game history data storage unit. Then, when the player operates the jog dial 57 and the chance button 56 described above to display his / her game history data, the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed as an indicator. 54 is displayed.

  In addition, also in the game history data management unit 391, the sales mode processing unit tabulates the game history data based on the game data transmitted from the P platform 2, and the current player gaming history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 The gaming history data accumulated by the business mode processing unit from the stage when A is stored as an ID is accumulated and stored in the current player gaming history data storage unit. Then, when the player performs an operation to display his / her game history data by touching the display 312 which is a touch panel, the operation detection signal is inputted to the game history data management unit 391 and the game history data management unit 391 Controls the display 312 to display the gaming history a stored in the current player gaming history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392.

  As described above, the game history data throughout the day in the P units and the game history data collected for each player in the P units are displayed and switched on both the P unit side and the CU side. One game history data and the other game history data are switched and displayed.

  When the player who is playing a game with the P unit 2 presses the return button 322 to return the inserted member card, the CU 3 sends a card return request to the P unit 2. Further, in response to the card return request command, the P-base 2 sends back a response of the card return response to the CU. Thereafter, the membership card is ejected from CU3. Then, the gaming history data management unit 391 erases the C-ID, the type, and the gaming history data stored in the current player gaming history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. As a result, even if an operation for displaying the gaming history a stored in the current player gaming history data storage unit is performed by operating the display 312, the gaming history a is not displayed on the display 312.

  On the other hand, the gaming history data management unit 291 that has received the card return request transmits a card return notification to the display effect control unit 292. Receiving that, the indicator effect control unit 292 stores the A as the C-ID stored in the current player gaming history data storage unit and the gaming history data a in the backup data storage unit, and the current player game The C-ID of the history data storage unit, the type, and the game history data are erased. As a result, even if an operation to display the game history data a on the display 54 is performed, the game history data a is not displayed on the display 54.

  The return button 322 is normally operated when ending the game by the P unit 2, but the player temporarily interrupts the game and completes the small use, and returns to the P unit 2 where the game is being played again, and the game is performed. May resume. In such a case, the player usually discharges the card after carrying out the game interruption operation described later, brings the card, and the player completes the small use, and returns to the same P-unit 2 again and transfers the card to CU3. Although the player inserts the card, the player may press the return button 322 to remove the card and leave the P platform 2 without performing the game interruption operation.

  In such a case, if the same player who has left the seat without playing a game in the P platform 2 returns to the P platform 2 and inserts the member card into the CU 3 again, the player leaves the seat. It is desirable to take over the game history data of the previous player and add, update and accumulate the game history data after game restart to the game history data. In order to realize that, the C-ID, the type, and the game history data are backed up and stored in the backup data storage unit provided in the display effect control unit 292 described above. Then, when the player who has returned to P platform 2 inserts the membership card into CU3, the card information of the membership card is read, and the insertion card information including the C-ID of the membership card and the type is from CU3 to P Sent to 2

  In the P platform 2, the gaming history data management unit 291 receives the C-ID and the type included in the inserted card information, and transmits the received C-ID and the type to the effect controller for display unit 292. The display effect control unit 292 collates the transmitted C-ID, the type, the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit, and the type, and determines whether or not they match. If the two match, it is determined that the same player as the player who left the seat has resumed the game again, and A as the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit and a as the game history data are currently played It is returned to the player game history data storage unit and stored in the current player game history data storage unit. Then, the storage data of the backup data storage unit is deleted. A game history data generated thereafter by the player playing a game with P platform 2 in a state where the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is stored in the current player game history data storage unit and taken over. Are added to and updated and stored with respect to the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the comparison results of the C-ID contained in the inserted card information transmitted from the CU3 and the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit and the type do not match. As for A, A as a C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit and a as game history data are erased.

  As a modification, the following control may be performed after communication between the game history data management unit 291 and the effect control unit for display unit 292 is bi-directional communication.

  As a result of comparing the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit by the effect controller for display unit 292 with the type, the C-ID transmitted from the CU 3 and the type, the determination result as to whether or not both match is displayed It is transmitted to the game history data management unit 391 of CU 3 via the dexterous effect control unit 292 and the game history data management unit 291. In the game history data management unit 391, in the case of the determination result to the effect that the transmitted C-ID and the determination result of the type match, the C-ID determined to match is the current game of the data storage unit 392 Are stored in the player game history data storage unit. Further, in the case of the determination result that the C-ID and the type determination result match, the game history data a is also included in the C-ID and the type determination result.

  The game history data management unit 391 that has received the game history data a stores the game history data a in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. After that, if the player plays a game with the P platform 2, the game data is transmitted to the game history data management unit 391, and is aggregated by the business mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391 and the aggregated game history data Are added to and updated and stored in the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit. In this state, if the player performs an operation to touch the display 312 to display his game history data, the game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed as described above. Displayed by the display 312.

  The backup data storage unit of the effect control unit for display 292 may control to delete the stored backup data when a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between a commercial mode for providing a game to the player and a non-commercial mode for enabling a trial or maintenance by a staff member of the game arcade. As the non-operating mode, three modes are provided: maintenance mode, test mode, and trial hitting mode.

  When the staff at the game arcade designates a mode by remote control operation, the information is received by the CU, and the mode is switched. For example, when one of the non-business modes is designated, the game history data management unit 391 transmits a mode change request to P units. The game history data management unit 291 of P units having received this changes the mode and sends a mode change response to the CU. In response to this, the non-business mode processing unit of the game history data management unit of the CU functions. Further, the non-business mode notification is transmitted to the display effect control unit 292 by the operation of the non-business mode processing unit on the P side.

  In the display effect control unit 292 that has received it, game history data based on game data generated thereafter is stored in the non-business mode game history data storage unit. This non-operating mode game history data storage unit is constituted by a storage area different from the above-mentioned P base gaming history data storage unit, the current player gaming history data storage unit, and the backup data storage unit. The game history data in the non-business mode is stored in the mode game history data storage unit. However, the memory of the non-business mode game history data storage unit is erased when the mode is changed next time. Then, the game history data stored in the non-business mode game history data storage unit is displayed by the display 54.

  Note that the memory of the non-business mode game history data storage unit may be held even if the mode is changed. In this case, a plurality of non-operating mode gaming history data storage units are provided for each type of non-operating mode. Further, in this case, the game history in the non-business mode game history according to the operation by the attendant (the operation of the chance button 56 and the jog dial 57 while watching the display 54, the operation of the touch panel of the display 312, or the remote control). The data stored in the data storage unit may be read out for each non-business mode and displayed on the display 54 or the display 312 on the CU side.

  Also in CU3, the game history data based on the game data transmitted from P unit 2 is aggregated by the function of the non-operating mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391, and the aggregated game history data is not operated. Displayed by the display unit 312 as game history data in the mode.

  The display 312 also displays an operation button icon such as a retabulation button, and the nailer who has seen the game history data in the non-business mode displayed in a tabulated manner adjusts the nail based thereon, and then performs the non-business mode again. There are cases where it is desired to add up the game history data according to and display it to check the result of nail adjustment. In such a case, the icon of the retabulation button is touch-operated. Then, the operation detection signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the game history data management unit 391 transmits a recount notification to the game history data management unit 291 of the P-base 2. Having received it, the game history data management unit 291 transmits a recounting instruction to the display effect control unit 292.

  The indicator effect control unit 292 that has received it temporarily erases the game history data stored in the non-business mode game history data storage unit, and then re-enters the game data based on the game data generated thereafter. Control to be stored in the mode game history data storage unit is performed. Then, the game data of the non-business mode game history data storage unit, which has been tabulated again, is displayed by the display 54. On the other hand, also on the CU 3 side, the non-business mode processing unit plays the game based on the game data transmitted from the P-unit 2 after the detection signal of the touch operation of the recount button icon is input to the game history data management unit 391. The non-business mode gaming history data which has been accumulated and re-aggregated history data is displayed by the display 312.

  Thereafter, when the mode is switched by remote control operation, the effect controller for display 292 erases the game history data stored in the non-business mode game history data storage.

  When the game ball runs out in the non-business mode, the game ball addition command is sent from the CU side to the P-unit to perform the addition of the game ball to enable the game. In addition, when there are no game balls in the non-business mode, the game machine side may perform addition of game balls automatically without sending a game ball addition command from the CU side to the P base to enable a game. Furthermore, instead of automatically adding the game balls on the side of the gaming machine, control may be performed so that the game can be continued even if the game balls become zero.

  Similarly, in the case of the slot machine 2S described later, when the number of points is lost in the non-business mode, the CU side sends a holding point addition command to the S-unit to perform addition of the number of holding points, thus enabling a game.

  A RAM clear switch 293 is provided in the P-unit 2. The RAM clear switch 293 is operated to perform a switch operation to output a signal of RAM clear to the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 17 described above to clear stored data of the RAM. When the RAM clear output signal is input to the gaming history data management unit 291, the RAM clear signal is input to the display effect control unit 292, and the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 is While being erased, the oldest stored data among the stored data for 10 days of the P game history data storage unit is erased, and the remaining 9 days of stored data is shifted to the storage area of the older day one by one. It is memorized. As a result, the newest storage area (storage area on the current day) becomes an empty area.

  Today's game history data is stored in this vacant area (storage area on the day). In addition, according to the output of the RAM clear signal, the game history data (game history data before shifting to the old day) of the latest day of the P game history data storage unit is the indicator effect control unit 292, the game history The data may be transmitted to the hall management computer 1 via the data management unit 291 and the game history data management unit 391, and the hall management computer 1 may control such data to be backed up.

  Also, the game history data management unit 291 that has received the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 293 transmits a clear notification to the CU 3, and the game history data management unit 391 that has received the clear notification Control is performed to delete the game history data stored in the game history data storage unit. As a result, the display of the current P game history data by the display unit 312 is erased (cleared).

  It should be noted that, while holding the card inserted in the CU3, even if the RAM clear signal is output from the RAM clear switch 293, the game history data clear process is not performed.

  Next, the non-operating mode will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the maintenance mode. The maintenance mode is a mode for setting various parameters on the sales of the gaming machine.

  Switching to the maintenance mode is performed by selecting "maintenance" with the remote control of the card unit.

  By switching to the maintenance mode, for example, display setting of the number of big hit balls and threshold setting of base abnormality can be performed as parameter setting.

  In the display setting of the number of big hit balls, the number of big hit balls (TY) for the past 10 times, and the number of total big balls until the so-called consecutive chan ends in P units are provided. In the maintenance mode, it is possible to set how these display modes are to be made.

  Regarding the threshold setting of the base abnormality, in the present embodiment, only the upper limit value of the threshold is set, and the lower limit is not defined. Therefore, the base abnormality is determined by the upper limit value of the set threshold. The threshold is, for example, 70 at the low base time (when the fluctuation time shortening function is not activated) and 150 at the high base time (when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated). In the present embodiment, it is possible to display the base measurement results for the current day and the past 10 days on the display of P units or CUs.

  Note that various setting operations in the maintenance mode are input, for example, by the touch panel of the display unit 312 on the CU side, and input information is transmitted from the CU to the P units. Alternatively, various settings in the maintenance mode may be performed by operating the remote control used for mode switching. Instead of or in addition to these setting operation methods, a touch panel may be provided on the display 54 on the P base side, and this may be performed by the touch operation on the touch panel. In this case, since the one-way communication from the LSI 799 provided with the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate for display 53 is adopted, the touch operation signal of the display 54 can not be input to the payout control unit 17. The display 54 needs to be controlled on the CU side, not on the display effect control board 53. Specifically, a touch operation signal on the touch panel of the display 54 is input to, for example, the display control unit 797 of the CU 3 and is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the P-unit 2 via the main control unit 323.

  In addition, in the maintenance mode, it is possible to perform a test game in which all functions of the gaming machine are operated. That is, as in the business mode, the ball is fired, the variable display device is variably started according to the start winning, and the variable winning ball device is opened or closed according to the occurrence of the big hit. However, even in that case, the number of balls such as the number of fired balls is not managed in the maintenance mode. Specifically, the P unit sequentially transmits current ball related information data such as the number of gaming balls to the CU as described with reference to FIG. 6 in the business mode, but such control is performed in the maintenance mode Do not Therefore, management of data such as the number of game balls is not performed on the CU side.

  In addition, even in the maintenance mode, when a game is played by a staff at a game arcade or the like, the P unit stores gaming history data such as the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations indicating the gaming status, but the maintenance mode is another mode At the switching stage, clear the memory of it. However, at the time of mode change, since the variables that affect the payout rate such as the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function are not saved, the gaming state immediately before the mode switching is maintained as it is even after the mode switching. As a result, for example, when the maintenance mode is ended in a definite change state and switched to the business mode, the gaming state of the P units is in the positive change state.

  It is not possible to shift to the maintenance mode from any state, and transition conditions that can be shifted are defined. As shown in FIG. 8, the transition condition is that the number of gaming balls is 0 and the card balance is 0 yen (including the case where no card is inserted) and that the symbol is not changing in the variable display device. It is all the conditions of not being a big hit.

  As a result, for example, although the player is playing a game, the mode is switched by erroneously operating the remote control or by inputting the same signal as the remote control signal for switching the mode by chance and the player is damaged. Can be prevented as much as possible.

  The termination condition of the maintenance mode is that all the launched game balls are ejected from the board. This condition is satisfied, for example, when the P unit calculates "the number of fired balls-(the number of far balls + the number of joined balls)" and the result becomes zero. To end the maintenance mode, select "sales" with the remote control of the card unit. Thereby, the maintenance mode is ended and switched to the business mode.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a test mode. The test mode is a mode for confirming the operation of each mechanism of the gaming machine. The test mode is switched by powering on both the pseudo card unit and the P units after connecting a card unit dedicated to test called "pseudo card unit" to the P units. The pseudo card unit has, for example, the same function as the card unit used at the business time, and further has a function of transmitting a mode change request command instructing switching to the test mode to P when power is turned on.

  As described above, since switching to the test mode is conditional on the connection of a pseudo card unit which is not used during business, a normal card unit used in business is connected to P units, and the player can play a game. In the provided state, erroneous switching to the test mode can be prevented.

  In the test mode, a launch test for checking the operation of the launch mechanism alone in the game ball, a ball loan with a pseudo card unit, a circulation test to operate the game ball circulation mechanism when the handle is operated, various kinds of indicators 54 Partial tests are possible, such as a display test that displays a test screen. Details of the launch and circulation tests are shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the test mode, it is also possible to perform an overall test for operating the game machine (test game) as in the case of providing a game in the hall.

  In the entire test, as in the case of the business mode, the ball is fired, the variable display device is variably started according to the start winning, and the variable winning ball device is opened or closed according to the occurrence of the big hit. However, even in this case, the number of balls such as the number of fired balls is not managed in the test mode. Specifically, the P unit sequentially transmits current ball related information data such as the number of game balls to the CU as described with reference to FIG. 6 in the business mode, but in the test mode, such control is performed Do not Therefore, management of data such as the number of game balls is not performed on the side of the pseudo card unit connected to P units.

  In addition, even in the test mode, the P unit stores gaming history data such as the number of big hits showing the gaming status and the number of symbol rotations when a game is played by an attendant at the game arcade, but the test mode is another mode At the switching stage, clear the memory of it. However, at the time of mode change, since the variables that affect the payout rate such as the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function are not saved, the gaming state immediately before the mode switching is maintained as it is even after the mode switching. As a result, for example, when the test mode is ended in a definite change state and switched to the business mode, the gaming state of the P units is in the positive change state.

  The transition condition to the test mode and the termination condition are the same as the maintenance mode shown in FIG. To end the test mode, select "test end" on the card unit remote control. After that, the pseudo card unit and the P unit are powered off.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a test hitting mode. The trial mode is a mode for performing operation confirmation when installing a gaming machine in a hall, confirmation of the number of balls such as safe / out, and base confirmation at the time of gauge adjustment.

  The switching to the test mode is performed by selecting "test" on the remote control of the card unit. The conditions for transition to the test hitting mode and the ending conditions are the same as in the case of the maintenance mode.

  By switching to the trial hitting mode, it is possible to make a trial hitting with all functions of P units operated. However, even in that case, the ball number management such as the number of fired balls is not performed in the trial hitting mode. Specifically, the P unit sequentially transmits current ball related information data such as the number of game balls to the CU as described with reference to FIG. 6 in the business mode, but in the trial mode, such control is performed Do not Therefore, management of data such as the number of game balls is not performed on the CU side.

  In addition, even in the trial run mode, when a game is performed by a staff member of the game arcade, the P unit stores gaming history data such as the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations indicating the game status, but the trial run mode is another mode At the switching stage, clear the memory of it. However, at the time of mode change, since the variables that affect the payout rate such as the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function are not saved, the gaming state immediately before the mode switching is maintained as it is even after the mode switching. As a result, for example, when the trial mode is ended in the definite change state and the mode is switched to the business mode, the gaming state of P units is in the definite change state.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, when floating balls are present in each mode, until all the floating ball results are determined (all of the shot game balls are discharged from the board Mode can not be changed (the end condition is not satisfied). Therefore, the mode is switched while the result of the game in a certain mode is unconfirmed, and it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the mode (for example, the business mode) of the switched destination is affected by the floating ball.

  It should be noted that instead of waiting for the mode transition to wait for the determination of the floating ball, if there is a floating ball when there is a mode transition operation, the waiting time for processing the floating ball is counted and a predetermined period has elapsed It is also conceivable to switch the mode on condition of the event. However, by not adopting such processing, it is possible to ensure the fairness among players by giving the player a change in ball holding which is not caused by the player's operation.

  It should be noted that the payout control unit 17 determines the presence or absence of floating balls by referring to the value of the game ball count counter shown in FIG.

  In addition, since the transition condition is satisfied on the condition that the number of gaming balls is 0, there is a disadvantage that the operating mode is switched to the non-operating mode by mistake when the number of gaming balls is present and the player is playing a game. Can be prevented. Furthermore, the P unit does not transmit information such as the number of game balls to the CU during the non-business mode in which the CU side does not have to manage the number of game balls on purpose. Therefore, the management burden such as the number of game balls of the CU in the non-business mode can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, at the time of mode change, variables affecting the payout rate such as the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function are not saved. However, instead of this, these variables may be saved at the time of mode change, and when the mode is switched back, it may be configured to return to the previous game state in that mode.

  Modification Example: The gaming state may be temporarily retracted at the time of switching from the operation mode, and may be returned to the original state when switched back.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining transition conditions to each mode. First, as shown in the explanatory diagram, at the time of normal power-on (during cold start), the system starts up in the business mode. Thereafter, transition from the business mode to each of the modes 2 to 3 is made in accordance with each operation of the trial hitting mode transition operation, the maintenance mode transition operation, and the test mode transition operation. In addition, mode 1 means sales mode, mode 2 means test hitting mode, mode 3 means maintenance mode and mode 4 means test mode.

  Furthermore, in accordance with the transition operation for switching back to the sales mode, the operation mode is shifted to the sales mode from each of the trial hitting mode, the maintenance mode, and the test mode. In addition, even in the event of a power failure or communication disconnection (circuit disconnection) between the CU and the P units, the setting of the mode at that time is maintained in each case. For this reason, at the time of the warm start after the power failure recovers, it starts up in each maintained mode.

  In addition, the operation to shift to the modes 2 to 4 from any of the three modes 2 to 4 of the trial hitting mode, the maintenance mode, and the test mode is invalidated. That is, the modes which can be switched from the test hitting mode, the maintenance mode and the test mode are limited to the business mode.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality as a result of mutual authentication is detected.

  Referring to FIG. 12, when an abnormality occurs in main control unit 323, CU communication control unit 80, P-unit communication control unit 81, payout control unit 17, or main control board 16, indicated by an arrow in FIG. Notification is made. The abnormality referred to here is to replace the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80, the P unit communication control unit 81, the payout control unit 17, or the main control board 16 with another improperly manufactured one or noise etc. This includes the case of malfunction or failure, or an off-line state due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800 illustrated in FIG. 12 is a key management server that stores the SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key in association with each SID of the main control unit. The key management server 803 is a key management server that can communicate with the main control board 16.

  First, when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3, as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 described above, the main control unit 323 has an abnormality. Detect This mutual authentication includes device authentication using a session key (see FIG. 15), in addition to serial ID authentication and device authentication described later. When the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the CU communication control unit 80, the main control unit 323 notifies the host server 801 to that effect, and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 797 of the card unit 3. In addition to causing the display control unit 797 to perform control to display the occurrence of an abnormality on the display unit 312, the abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinks to perform abnormality notification. Further, the main control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit (not shown) to the hall management computer 1.

  Further, the occurrence of an abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is also detected by the P-unit communication control unit 81. When the P-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of an abnormality, the fact is notified to the payout control unit 17, and the payout control unit 17 further notifies the main control board 16 to that effect. In response to the abnormality occurrence signal, the main control board 16 outputs a signal to light or blink the abnormality notification lamp provided on the membrane plate or the like, and a signal to the effect that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1 Send

  When an abnormality occurs by the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3, the CU communication control unit 80 detects the occurrence of an abnormality by the mutual authentication described above, and a signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that is detected by the P communication control unit. Notify 81 In response to that, the P communication control unit 81 notifies the payout control unit 17 that an abnormality has occurred. In response to this, the payout control unit 17 notifies the main control board 16 that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 16 performs control to operate the abnormality notification lamp and sends a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the P communication control unit 81, the main control unit 323 notifies that effect to the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 notifies that to the upper server 801.

  As described above, when the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the main control unit 323 and notifies the P unit communication control unit 81 to that effect, the CU communication control unit 80 detects that there is an abnormality in the P unit communication control unit 81. Is notified to the main control unit 323, and notification destinations of occurrence of abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 are different from each other. The reason is that even if the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred is notified that the abnormality has occurred, control for notifying an abnormality is not performed at all, and no countermeasure against the abnormality is taken. Moreover, although the CU communication control unit 80 has a communication control function, it does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, it is not possible to control the abnormality notification by itself, and therefore, it is always notified that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The P communication control unit 81 notified of the occurrence of the abnormality from the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the payout control unit 17 to that effect, and the payout control unit 17 notifies the main control board 16 that the abnormality has occurred. To notify. In response to the notification, the main control board 16 performs the same control for reporting an abnormality as described above.

  If an abnormality occurs in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the CU communication control unit 80 detects that an abnormality has occurred, and the main control unit 323 is notified that an abnormality has occurred, and the main control unit 323 reports the abnormality described above. It performs control and notifies the upper server 801 that an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the P-unit communication control unit 81 and no abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 17, the payout control unit 17 detects that the abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality is mainly generated. The control board 16 is notified. In response to the notification, the main control board 16 performs control for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 17, the main control board 16 detects the abnormality and performs control for notifying the abnormality occurrence described above. When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 17 and no abnormality occurs in the P communication control unit 81, the P communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of the abnormality, and CU communication indicates that the abnormality has occurred. The control unit 80 is notified. In response to the notification, CU communication control unit 80 notifies main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. Upon receiving the notification, the main control unit 323 performs the control for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality as described above, and notifies the upper server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  When an abnormality occurs in both of the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17, the main control board 16 detects the occurrence of the abnormality and the CU communication control unit 80 also detects that an abnormality has occurred.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control board 16, the payout control unit 17 detects the abnormality and notifies the P-unit communication control unit 81 that the abnormality has occurred. In response to this, the P communication control unit 81 notifies the CU communication control unit 80 that the abnormality has occurred, and upon receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 that the abnormality has occurred. . In response to that, the main control unit 323 performs control of the above-mentioned abnormality occurrence notification, and notifies the upper server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80, the LSI 799 detects it and notifies it to the main control board 16, while it detects it when the abnormality occurs in the main control board 16. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. As with the above-described CU communication control unit 80, even when the LSI 799 detects that an abnormality has occurred, control for notifying an abnormality is not performed even if a notification is given to the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the control unit or control board on the opposite side to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred is notified. Note that the CU communication control unit 80 and the LSI 799 are not connected with abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification indicator, and do not have a function to perform abnormality notification control even if an abnormality is detected. .

  Although the pachinko machine 2 is shown as an example of the gaming machine in the control of FIG. 12 described above, a slot machine 2S described later may be used as an example of the gaming machine.

  Although not shown, an outline of commands and responses performed between the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 will be described.

  Data in the transmission direction from CU to P is a command, and data in the transmission direction from P to CU is a response.

  The main control unit transmits a recovery request command to the CU communication control unit. This recovery request command is for requesting transmission of recovery information to P units.

  A response of a recovery response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information held by P units to the CU.

  A communication start request is sent from the CU to the P units. This communication start request is for requesting the P units to clear the recovery information and back up the connection ID (communication start time).

  A communication start response is sent from the P units to the CU. This communication start response is to notify the CU that the recovery information has been cleared and the connection ID (communication start time) has been backed up.

  An operation instruction is sent from the CU to the P unit. This operation instruction instructs the P units to perform a game operation, and also requests transmission of gaming machine information such as game balls.

  An operation response is sent from the P units to the CU. This operation response is to notify the CU of the execution result of the game operation instruction and to notify the game machine information such as the game ball and the like.

  A communication disconnection request is sent from the CU to the P units. The communication disconnection request is for requesting the P units to disconnect the communication connection.

  A communication disconnection response is sent from the P units to the CU. The communication disconnection response is to notify the CU that the communication disconnection request command has been received.

  A continuity test request is sent from the CU to the P units. This communication test request is to notify the communication data to P units.

  A communication test response is sent from the P unit to the CU. This continuity test response is to respond the continuity data to the CU.

  An outline of commands and responses performed between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit will be described. Although not shown, the transmission direction is from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit, and the data from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit is the response.

  A BB serial ID authentication request 1 requesting authentication of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The BB serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The BB serial ID is the SID of the main control unit 323 described above. This command is not transmitted up to P, but is exceptional.

  The BB serial ID authentication response 1 notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A second BB serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A second BB serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  Next, an IC serial ID authentication request 1 requesting authentication of the IC serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The IC serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The IC serial ID is the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 described above.

  An IC serial ID authentication response 1 for notifying authentication information of the IC serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A second IC serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A second IC serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (device authentication request 1) for requesting device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The device authentication is for authenticating whether the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A response (device authentication response 1) for notifying a device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the content of this response will be described later. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception.

  A command (device authentication request 2) for requesting a second device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (device authentication response 2) for notifying a second device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The device authentication requests 1 and 2 and the device authentication responses 1 and 2 will be described based on FIG. 19 described later.

  A counter information notification for notifying counter information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  The CU communication control unit transmits, to the main control unit, a counter information notification response for notifying a counter information notification result.

  The counter information notification and the counter information notification response will be described based on FIG. 29 described later.

  A writer management information request for requesting writer management information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A writer management information response for notifying writer management information is sent from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The writer management information request and the writer management information response will be described based on FIG. 15 described later. The data included in the writer management information response is a command code, a writer ID (ID of the ROM writer), a version of an authentication key, or the like.

  The main control unit requests the CU communication control unit to update the authentication key, but the authentication key update request is transmitted.

  Data included in the authentication key update request include a command code, command size, shipping maker code, writer ID (ROM writer ID), version of authentication key, authentication key, MAC key that is a key for H-MAC, MAC include.

  The CU communication control unit transmits, to the main control unit, an authentication key update response for notifying an authentication key update result.

  A command (time notification) for notifying the current time is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  The CU communication control unit transmits, to the main control unit, a response (time response) indicating that the command of time notification has been received.

  A command (P unit communication control unit authentication request) for requesting authentication with the P unit communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the P-unit communication control unit. The main control unit makes a request for the authentication result of the P-unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit, which is the result of the mutual authentication. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  The CU communication control unit transmits a response (P unit communication control unit authentication response) for notifying the authentication result with the P unit communication control unit to the main control unit. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception. The CU communication control unit 80 sends the authentication result to the main control unit 323 after acquiring information such as the chip ID of the main control board 16 and the LSI 799.

  A device information request for requesting device information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A device information response for notifying device information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (communication state request) for requesting a communication (transmission) state to the CU communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This communication (transmission) state is a command for requesting whether the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is normal. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A response (communication state response) for notifying a communication (transmission) state is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This is a response that the CU communication control unit determines whether the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is appropriate, and sends the determination result back to the main control unit. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception.

  A command (P unit communication control unit reauthentication request) for requesting re-authentication with the P unit communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the P-unit communication control unit. The main control unit makes a request for the authentication result of the P-unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit, which is the result of the mutual authentication. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  The CU communication control unit transmits a response (P unit communication control unit reauthentication response) for notifying a response to the P unit communication control unit re-authentication request message to the main control unit. The CU communication control unit executes the authentication between the P-unit communication control units again, and the main control unit acquires the authentication result by receiving the P-unit communication control unit re-authentication response. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception.

  A BB serial ID authentication request A for requesting authentication of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The BB serial ID authentication request A will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response A for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A BB serial ID authentication request B for requesting authentication of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This command is not transmitted up to P, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response B for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The BB serial ID authentication requests A and B, the BB serial ID authentication responses A and B, the device authentication requests A and B, and the device authentication responses A and B will be described later based on FIG.

  A command (device authentication request A) for requesting device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The device authentication is for authenticating whether the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A response (device authentication response A) for notifying a device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the content of this response will be described later. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception.

  A command (device authentication request B) for requesting device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The device authentication is for authenticating whether the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A response (device authentication response B) for notifying a device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the content of this response will be described later. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception.

  An authentication key setting request for requesting an authentication key update is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The authentication key setting request is a response for notifying the main control unit of authentication key setting information, and authentication stored in authentication key information (EEPROM not shown) written from a dedicated IC writer (ROM writer) Response from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Information included in the authentication key setting request includes command code, command size, shipping maker code, writer ID (ID of ROM writer), version of authentication key, authentication key, MAC key as key for H-MAC, for encryption Padding character (random number), MAC. These code information is transmitted by using the block encryption mode of ECB except for the command code, using BB serial ID as an encryption key and encrypting.

  An authentication key setting response for notifying an authentication key update result is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The authentication key setting response is a command for notifying the CU communication control unit of the authentication key information setting result. The information included in the authentication key setting response includes a command code, a command size, an update result, an encryption padding character (random number), and a MAC. Other than the command code, the ECB is encrypted and transmitted using the BB serial ID as the encryption key using the block encryption mode of ECB.

  Next, among the commands / responses, the contents of the recovery response, the communication start request, the operation instruction, and the operation response will be described in detail.

  A response of recovery response is sent from the P unit to the CU. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information (also referred to as recovery data) held in P units to the CU. The "recovery information" is the data stored in the backup storage for the P unit to transmit as a recovery response when the CU transmits a recovery request command to the P unit as the recovery process is executed. It is. The recovery information transmitted from the P unit to the CU includes the connection time, the final sequence number, the previous ball related information, and the current ball related information.

  The column of “encryption” is a column indicating whether or not the data to be transmitted is encrypted, and the “x” mark indicates that the data is not encrypted and the “o” mark indicates that the data is encrypted. A key used for this encryption uses a session key (also called a message key), which will be described later.

  The connection time is the connection time backed up on P units (data of the connection time received from the CU at the start of communication). The final sequence number is the sequence number backed up by P units. C-ID is C-ID which was backed up by P units. The last ball related information is the ball related information notified last time. Specifically, the game ball acquisition number information notified last time, back ball addition information notified last time, game ball launch number information notified last time, symbol decision number 1 notified last time, symbol decision frequency 2 notified last time, notified last time The number of starting openings 1 number, the number 2 of starting openings notified last time, the number 1 of large winning openings notified last time, the number 2 of large winning openings notified last time, the number 1 to 4 times of winning openings notified last time. Thus, although the symbol determination frequency 1 and the symbol determination frequency 2 are divided by Bit, they may be divided by bytes and transmitted.

  The “playing ball acquisition number information” is information on the number of added balls added to the playing balls by winning. The “back ball addition information” is addition information in which a foul ball detected by a foul ball detection switch (not shown) is added to a game ball. The "playing ball launch number information" is information on the number of pachinko balls shot by the launch unit (not shown). "Out ball passage information" is information indicating that an out ball has been detected by being detected by an out ball detection switch (not shown).

  In the present embodiment, the "playing ball acquisition number information" and the "back ball addition information" are collectively referred to as "the number of added balls". In addition, "the game ball firing number information" is expressed as "subtract ball number".

  “The number of times of symbol determination 1” is the number of times of symbol determination performed by the variable display device 1. The “symbol determination frequency 2” is the number of times the symbol is determined by the variable display device 2.

  The “starting opening number of times 1” is the number of wins of pachinko balls to the starting opening 1. The “starting opening number of times 2” refers to the number of wins of pachinko balls to the starting opening 2.

  The “one big winning opening” is the opening number (round number) of the big winning opening 1. The “big winning opening 2 times” is the opening number (round number) of the big winning hole 2.

  The "number of winning openings 1 to 4" is the number of winnings of pachinko balls for each winning opening of the winning openings 1 to 4.

  Furthermore, as information on the recovery response transmitted from the P unit to the CU, there is current ball related information as the latest ball related information. The current ball related information is, specifically, the game ball total number information (also referred to as the number of game balls) currently held in P, the game ball acquired number information currently held in P, currently P Back ball addition information held, gaming ball firing number information currently held in P units, symbol decision number 1 currently held in P units, symbol decision number 2 currently held in P units, present One start opening held by P units, 2 start openings currently held by P units, 1 number of large winning openings currently held by P units, Large winning opening currently held by P units Two times, it is a winning opening 1 to 4 times currently held in P units.

  Information other than the ball-related information at the previous time is data to be backed up in P units, and is set to ALL 0 at the time of factory shipment and when the backup data is indeterminate.

  The meaning of the number of balls and the content of the final points will be described in detail later, but will be briefly described below.

  The game ball total number information is the number of game balls held by P units. In addition, the CU checks whether the number of gaming balls in P units matches the number of gaming balls after correction in CU, and in the case of incoincidence, the CU transmits a command of communication disconnection request to the P units. While the communication is disconnected, the game of P units is stopped (see FIG. 43, etc.). Then, the CU executes recovery processing, and transmits a communication start request to P units (see FIG. 23), so that the game ball correction request is made to P units according to the data correction request included in the command of the communication start request. A process of transmitting and correcting P game balls to the number of game balls after correction on the CU side is performed.

  The symbol determination frequency 1 and the symbol determination frequency 2 refer to the symbol determination information for the winning of pachinko balls to the starting opening 1 and the starting opening 2, respectively. Use

  The number of times of starting opening 1 and the number of starting openings 2 are the number of winning of pachinko balls to starting openings 1 and 2 of P units, and the CU uses this data to check the operating status of the game console.

  The number of large winning a prize opening and the number of large winning a prize opening 2 times are the number (number) of winning of pachinko balls to P large winning opening 1 and large winning opening 2, CU is the operation of the game stand (P) Use this data to check the status.

  The number of winning openings 1 to 4 is the number of winnings (numbers) of pachinko balls to regular winning openings 1 to 4 of P, and CU uses this data to check the operating status of the game console Do.

  The command of the communication start request transmitted from the CU to the P units requests the P units to correct the game ball and the sequence number and back up the new communication ID (communication start time).

  Specific data of the communication start request include connection time, data correction request, sequence number, and game ball data. The connection time is a time when communication between the CU and the P units is started, which is held by the CU and transmitted from the CU to the P units. And this connection time is used as a connection ID of communication.

  In the data correction request, the CU requests the P units to correct the data, and is configured by 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7. Bit 0 is a bit for specifying the presence or absence of a clear request. When the bit is "0", no clear request is specified, and when "1", the clear request is specified. When there is a clear request, a request to clear the backup data held by the P-unit such as "game ball", "sequence number", "number of added balls", "number of subtracted balls" etc. to 0 is made to the P-unit.

  Bit 1 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a request for correction of the sequence number. In the case of “0”, no request for correction of the sequence number is specified, and in the case of “1”, the presence of request for correction for the sequence number is specified.

  Bit 2 is a bit for specifying the presence or absence of the game ball correction request. When "0", the game ball correction request is present, and when it is "1", no game ball correction request is specified.

  Note that when the Bit specifying the presence or absence of a request is “0”, it is expressed as “no request”, and when it is “1”, it is expressed as “necessary”. For example, when Bit 0 of the data correction request is “1”, it is expressed as “clear request present”, and when it is “0”, it is expressed as “clear request no”. In addition, as shown in parenthesis in the data correction request column, "Clear request" is "Recovery clear", "Sequence number correction request" is "SQN correction", "Game ball correction request" is "Game ball correction" It is expressed as ".

  The sequence number (also referred to as SQN) is the sequence number stored in the CU. The game ball is the number of game balls stored in the CU.

  At the time of transmitting this communication start request command, the CU backs up the connection time and backs up the information such as the "main chip ID" and the "dispense chip ID".

  When P receives this communication start request, it performs the following processing. In the case of the clear request ON, the backup data held on the P-unit side such as “game ball”, “sequence number”, “number of added balls”, “number of reduced balls” etc.

  When the sequence number correction request is ON, the sequence number held by the P unit is overwritten on the notified sequence number.

  In the case of the game ball correction request ON, the game ball held in P is overwritten on the notified game ball.

  Backup connection time. In addition, each process performed by said P base is performed in an order from the top.

  The command of the operation instruction transmitted from the CU to the P units is the "addition of game balls", "subtraction of game balls", "game permission / prohibition", and "clearing the game balls and sequence number" operation to the P units And request transmission of various types of game table information. The CU uses this command to periodically check the status of P units.

  As the operation request, 8-bit data of Bit 0 to Bit 7 are transmitted from the CU to the P units. For Bit 0, when "1", the game ball count addition request is instructed, and when "0", the game ball count addition request no is instructed. For Bit 1, when “1”, the game ball subtraction request is instructed, and when “0”, the game ball subtraction request is instructed. With regard to Bit 2, when “1” is set, a game permission request is instructed, and when “0”, a game permission request is instructed.

  For Bit 3, when “1” is set, a game prohibition request is instructed, and when “0”, no game prohibition request is instructed. For Bit 4, when “1” is set, a request for clearing the number of game balls and the sequence number is given, and when “0”, no request for clearing the number of game balls and the sequence number is given.

  Bit 5 is used for a glass door open request to open a glass door (not shown) that covers the front of the game area 27 so as to be opened and closed, and Bit 6 is used for a cell (front frame) open request. Bit 7 is a spare.

  It should be noted that "game ball number addition request" is simply referred to as "addition", "game ball number subtraction request" is simply referred to as "subtraction", and "game prohibition request" is also simply referred to as "prohibition request". And the clear request of the sequence number is simply referred to as the "clear request", and the "glass door open request" is also referred to as the "glass open request".

  When a plurality of bits among Bit0 to Bit7 are "1", P units are sequentially executed from Bit0.

  The state of the CU corresponding to each bit of the operation request is that the card is being held when Bit 0 is “1”, the card insertion process is in progress when Bit 1 is “1”, and Bit 2 is “1” Sometimes, addition display is in progress, subtraction display is in progress when Bit 3 is “1”, clear display is in progress when Bit 4 is “1”, and non-business mode is in progress when Bit 5 is “1”.

  The CU state is configured by 6 bits of Bit0 to Bit5, but may be configured by 16 bits of Bit0 to Bit15, and the following information may be transmitted by each bit.

Bit0: 1 = Card insertion in process Bit1: 1 = Cashing in process Bit2: 1 = General card (visitor card) in storage Bit3: 1 = Member card in storage Bit7 to 4: Spare Bit8: 1 = Prepaid loan being displayed Bit9 : 1 = Replay loan is being displayed. Bit 10: 1 = Ball division is being displayed (ball sharing is being displayed)
Bit11: 1 = Wagon service displayed Bit12: 1 = Clear displayed Bit13: 1 = Break time Bit15 to 14: Reserved In addition, data on the number of requested addition balls is valid only when Bit 0 of the operation request is "1". Sent from CU to P units. The data of the number of requested addition balls is a value to be added to the number of game balls.

  The data of the subtraction request ball number that is valid only when the operation request Bit 1 is “1” is transmitted from the CU to the P unit. The data of the subtraction required ball number indicates a value to be subtracted from the gaming ball number.

  Also, data of card balance indicating the balance of the card inserted in the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P unit.

  It should be noted that the holding of this card may be data in which both can be distinguished depending on whether the card inserted in the CU is a membership card or a visitor card. For example, "holding card" is configured by 2 bits, 1 bit is held while holding a membership card, and 2 bits are held "1" while holding a visitor card. Furthermore, in the case of a visitor card, basically, the card is always held in the CU, and in the case of a visitor card, the card is held only when the visitor card has a remaining amount. It may be controlled to transmit C-ID as (with Bit set to 1). Also, the C-ID may be stored only in the membership card without storing the C-ID in the visitor card.

  In addition, an error code currently displayed on the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P units. Note that "ALL00h" is transmitted as data of a CU error code in which an error has not occurred.

  The response of the operation response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU. The response of the operation response is to notify the CU of the execution result of the instruction operation and gaming machine information such as the number of game balls.

  As an execution result, data is transmitted from the P unit to the CU as 7-bit data of Bit 0 to Bit 6. For Bit 0, when "1", the execution result of the game ball count addition rejection is shown, and when it is "0," the execution result of not rejecting the addition of the game ball count is shown. For Bit 1, the execution result of the game ball number subtraction refusal is shown when “1”, and the execution result of not rejecting the subtraction of the game ball number is shown when “0”. For Bit 2, the execution result of gaming permission denial is indicated when “1”, and the execution result indicating that the gaming permission is not rejected is indicated when “0”.

  With regard to Bit 3, when “1”, the execution result of the game prohibition refusal is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result of the effect that the game prohibition is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 4, "1" indicates that the number of game balls and the execution result of sequence number clear rejection are shown, and if "0", the result that the number of game balls and sequence number clear have not been rejected is shown.

  For Bit 5, when “1” is shown, the execution result that the opening of the glass door is refused is shown, and when “0”, the execution result that the opening of the glass door is not rejected is shown.

  For Bit 6, "1" indicates that the execution result of refusing the release of the cell is displayed, and "0" indicates that the execution result of not rejecting the cell release.

  In addition, "game ball number addition refusal" is simply referred to as "addition refusal", "game ball number subtraction refusal" is simply referred to as "subtraction refusal", "game permission refusal" is simply referred to as "permission refusal", "Prohibition rejection" is simply referred to as "prohibition rejection", "playing ball number and sequence number clear rejection" is also simply referred to as "clear rejection", and "glass door open rejection" is also simply referred to as "glass open rejection".

  The “playing ball total number information” is the current number of playing balls (the number of playing balls as a result of calculation of addition and subtraction). The “playing ball obtained number information” is the number of obtained game balls, and when there is a plurality of winnings at the time of transmission, it is the number information added up. The CU 3 adds the data of the game ball obtained number information to the currently held number of game balls, but does not add the number of game balls when the main data is received without holding the card.

  "Back ball addition information" refers to the number of back balls (fall balls) when fired by the firing unit (not shown), and when there are multiple back balls at the time of transmission, this is the information of the number added is there. The CU 3 adds data of back ball addition information to the currently held number of gaming balls, but does not add the number of gaming balls when the main data is received without holding the card. The “playing ball number information” refers to the number of balls fired by the firing unit (not shown), and is the information of the combined number when there is a plurality of fired balls at the time of transmission. The CU 3 subtracts the data of the number-of-played-balls-playing number information from the currently held number of gaming balls, but does not subtract the number of gaming balls when the main data is received without holding the card. In addition, CU3 does not subtract the number of game balls when the number of game balls held by itself is zero. The “out ball passing information” is the number of out balls detected by the out ball detection switch, and is the number obtained by adding the number of out balls at the time of transmission. The “symbol determination number 1” is symbol determination information for the winning of the starting opening 1, and “1” is added when symbol variation is stopped. The “symbol determination number 2” is symbol determination information for the winning of the starting opening 2, and “1” is added when symbol variation is stopped.

  The CU performs a game ball correction process using “game ball gain number information”, “back ball addition information”, and “game ball launch number information”. Specifically, the game ball number + the game ball obtained number information + the back ball addition information−the game ball fired number information is calculated, and the calculation result is corrected to a new game ball number (game ball total number). Then, it is checked whether the game ball total number information transmitted from P units and the number of game balls after correction (game ball total number information) match or not, and if they do not match, recovery processing is performed. A command for communication start request is transmitted to P units, and the data correction request data (Bit 2 is “1” data) included in the command and the data for the number of game balls stored in the CU are for P units. A process of correcting the number of game balls (game ball total number information) to the number of game balls after correction on the CU side (game ball total number information) is performed.

  Each bit of Bit 0 to Bit 3 is prepared as error state 2 of the game table, but this is provided as a spare, and for dealing with manufacturer-specific error information which is not used for specifying the actual error state. It is a thing.

The contents of each bit of gaming machine state 1 will be described in detail later, but will be briefly described below.
The game permission state / game prohibition state in Bit 0 of the game state 1 indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited by the CU, and the P units which have received an instruction by the command from the CU are instructed Transition to the When a communication error occurs, the P unit itself shifts to the game prohibited state.

  While waiting / playing in Bit 1, it is data indicating whether the fan (player) is playing (is firing a ball) and the fan (player) is not firing a ball while waiting The game is in progress with the fan (player) firing a ball. The game completion of Bit 3 indicates whether or not the balls have stopped firing at P, and then all the pachinko balls thrown into the game area 27 have been collected and the destinations of all the fired balls have been determined. It is. The state in which all balls are undecided is game incompletion (Bit3 = 0), and the state in which all balls are undecided is game completion (Bit3 = 1). In addition, if it is not possible to confirm 15 seconds or more after stopping the firing of the ball, the game is timed out and the game is completed.

  If you can not confirm completion of the game for more than 15 seconds, you will time out and complete the game, and if the ball clogged up in the game area is eliminated and the ball wins, etc. A display for prompting reinsertion may be displayed by the display 312 or the display 54, and control may be performed so as not to receive another card until the previous card is reinserted. Then, after the previous card is reinserted, manual correction (manual correction) of the number of game balls by a game clerk or the like is performed.

  The gaming machine reset in Bit 4 indicates an initial reset signal of the gaming machine (P units), and sets “1” for 30 seconds after activation of the P units. With game machine history information in Bit5, it is data indicating whether or not the game machine history information such as the number of starts and the number of big hits is held at P, and when it is "0", no game machine history information is available. In the case of "1", the presence of gaming machine history information is indicated. When the game machine history information is cleared by RAM clear, the P unit turns off this data. Also, after clearing the RAM, this data is turned ON at the timing of adding data such as "number of start" and "number of big hit". It should be noted that, in order to match the gaming machine history data with P units, the CU 3 clears the gaming machine history data held by the CU 3 upon detection of this data OFF.

The contents of each bit of the game state 2 will be detailed later, but will be briefly described below.
The big hit 1 of Bit 0 is set to “1” in the big hit middle and the small hit. The big hit 2 of Bit 1 is set to “1” in the big hit medium, small hit medium and high base. The big hit 3 of Bit 2 is set to "1" at the big hit middle (only the high hit big hit).

  The big hit 4 of Bit 3 is set to '1' in the big hit (big hit only on high base) and high base. The high base of Bit 4 is set to "1" in the high base.

  The gaming machine error state 1 is constituted by 8 bits of Bit 0 to Bit 7 and the contents of each bit will be described later in detail, but will be briefly described below.

  Bit 0 is a frame main body (front frame), that is, a bit indicating whether the cell is open or not, and is set to “1” when the cell is open. Bit 1 is a bit indicating whether or not the glass plate, ie, the glass door, is open, and “1” is set when the glass plate (glass door) is open. In the bit 2, “1” is set at the time of a magnetic sensor error when the magnetic sensor detects the occurrence of the fraud that brings the magnet closer to the game area or the like. After “1” is set, power is turned on / off by P units to restore Bit 2 to “0”.

  Bit 3 is set to “1” when an incorrect winning of a pachinko ball is detected. Then, power is restored by turning on / off the P units, and Bit 4 becomes “0”.

  The gaming machine error state 2 indicates manufacturer-specific error information, and 4 bits of Bit0 to Bit3 make the gaming machine error 1 occur, the gaming machine error 2 occurring, the gaming machine error 3 occurring, the gaming machine error 4) It is indicated that an outbreak is occurring.

  The response (communication state response) transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit is indicated by a hexadecimal string, and 0x00 indicates that the communication state is OK (appropriate). In the case other than this, that is, in the case of 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x04, 0x10, it is indicated that it is abnormal. CRC-NG means that the result of parity check is NG, that is, it is abnormal. Moreover, MAC-NG is NG of Message Authentication Code. Decryption NG means that the data transmitted after being encrypted and transmitted is abnormal as it is not correct data. The data length NG means that the length of the received data is not a normal length. The disconnection detection means that it is an abnormality that has detected the occurrence of a disconnection between the P unit and the CU.

  The response of the device information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit is a command code, a command size, an acquisition result, a main control chip ID (also referred to as a main chip ID), a chip maker code, a game machine maker code, a game machine The product code, the format code, the payout control chip ID, the maker code, the format code, and the MAC.

  A response of the device information response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit of the CU. The response of the device information response is to transmit information such as the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID to the main control unit of the CU. The command code identifies the code of the command. The code size specifies the data size of the command. Depending on the acquisition result, any one of OK (with collected information), NG (with no collected information), or not collected is specified. The main control chip ID is a chip ID recorded on P main control boards 16, and the payout control chip ID is a P payout chip ID stored in the payout control unit 17. It is.

  Next, processing executed by the CPU in the main control unit 323 of the CU and processing executed by the CPU mounted on the payout control unit 17 will be described based on FIGS. 13 to 66.

  Next, FIG. 13 is a diagram showing processing of a connection sequence at the time of power activation. The process of the connection sequence of FIG. 13 is a process executed at the time of resuming communication after the communication between the CU and the P unit is normally completed. Specifically, it is executed at the time of resuming communication after the power of the CU is turned off, in a standby state in which no card is inserted. A typical example is the case where the business day of the game arcade is ended and the power is turned off, and the power is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, when the power is turned on, the ball hitting and firing motor 18 is stopped on the P unit to stop the game and then the communication is started. In the CU, first, processing of an authentication sequence is performed. The specific control content of the process of the authentication sequence is shown in the flowchart of the subroutine program shown in FIGS. By the processing of this authentication sequence, a command of device information request is transmitted from the CU to P units. In response to that, the P unit returns a response of the device information response. The response of the device information response includes the main chip ID and the payout chip ID.

  The CU, which has received the device information response, stores the information included in the device information response, and makes an authentication request to P devices that have received a response (P devices specified by the received main chip ID and payout chip ID) Send the data of to P units.

The P that has received the authentication request sends an authentication response back to the CU.
Next, specific control contents of the process of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 13 will be described based on FIG. 14 to FIG.

  (A) and (b) of FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. The authentication sequence shown in FIG. 13 is of two types: an authentication sequence when the power of the CU is activated and an authentication sequence when the power of the P (game machine) is activated. The authentication sequence when the power of the CU is activated is shown in FIG. 14 (a). Referring to FIG. 14A, the main control unit 323 starts communication after completing the authentication with the upper server 801. The CU communication control unit 80 performs authentication with the P-unit communication control unit 81. After that, communication is started. Then, the mutual authentication sequence is first executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, and then the chip ID authentication sequence is performed.

  The authentication sequence when the power of P units (game machines) is activated is shown in FIG. 14 (b). Referring to FIG. 14B, after communication disconnection with P unit is detected in main control unit 323 and CU communication control unit 80, CU communication control unit 80 recovers communication with P unit. Perform authentication with the platform. Thereafter, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. After that, communication with P units becomes possible.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the mutual authentication sequence shown in FIG. 14 (a). The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing the authentication with the upper server 801. Then, a BB serial ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Authentication of the SID of the main control unit stored in the BB serial ID, that is, the EEPROM (not shown) is performed by the BB serial ID authentication sequence. Next, the main control unit 323 executes the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence only when the serial ID of the CU communication control unit is acquired from the upper server 801. The CU communication control unit serial ID is authenticated by the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence.

  Next, a command of a writer management information request is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The writer management information is information on the ROM writer used when writing the authentication information to the EEPROM (not shown). For example, it is data such as the ID of the ROM writer, the maker code of the ROM writer, and the version of the key stored in the ROM writer.

  The main control unit 323 collates the writer management information included in the writer management information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 with the writer management information stored in the main control unit 323, Check if it is not. Even if the authentication keys of the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 coincide with each other as a result of the collation check based on the writer management information, a certain degree of security is ensured and the security is improved.

  Next, a device authentication sequence with the authentication key is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Next, a command of counter information notification for requesting transmission of counter information from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80 is transmitted. In response to this, the CU communication control unit transmits a response to the counter information notification response to the main control unit 323 in order to notify the initial vector of the CTR mode. When using the ECB mode, which is a simple block encryption mode of use, if the same plaintext is encrypted with a certain key, some parts of the plaintext to be encrypted become another because the same ciphertext is obtained. There is a disadvantage that it can be judged by comparison of ciphertexts whether or not it is the same as the part, and the CU 323 is notified of the initial vector of the CTR mode in order to eliminate it. The mode setting of encryption is performed by notification of this counter information. Since the mode setting of this encryption is reset at each daily power on in the game arcade, security is improved. The ciphertext of the communication after the setting of the counter information is further scrambled. For example, if this scrambling process is not performed, the same encrypted data will be exchanged every day even if it is encrypted, and the encryption is likely to be broken. Such an inconvenience can be eliminated by scrambling.

  Next, an authentication key update sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 only when the main control unit 323 acquires update information from the upper server 801. By this authentication key update sequence, the authentication key can be changed to a new one.

  Next, the main control unit 323 transmits the current time to the CU communication control unit 80. CU communication control unit 80 receives the time information, generates a session key (message key) from the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown) and the received time information, and performs main control as a time response. Send to section 323. The session key (message key) may be generated by any method. For example, the received time information and the authentication key are combined according to a predetermined algorithm (for example, exclusive OR). The generated or received time information may be encrypted with the authentication key and the encryption result may be used as a session key (message key). The session key is cleared when the power is turned off, and is generated again when the next power is turned on.

  Next, an authentication sequence similar to the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. 19 is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 using a session key. Then, if the authentication result is appropriate, thereafter, encrypted communication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is performed by encrypting and decrypting using the session key.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the chip ID authentication sequence shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b). The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing the authentication with the CU communication control unit 80. Then, a command of payout control authentication result request is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The command of the payout control authentication result request requests the authentication result of the CU communication control unit 80 authenticating the P unit communication control unit 81 provided in the LSI 799 of the P unit 2. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits, to the main control unit 323, a response of a payout control authentication result response for notifying the authentication result of the payout control chip (LSI) with the P communication control unit 81.

  Next, the device information request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The command for requesting the device information requests the main chip ID, the chip maker code, the gaming machine maker code, the gaming machine product code, and the payout chip ID. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits the main chip ID, the chip maker code, the gaming machine maker code, the gaming machine product code, and the payout chip ID to the main control unit 323 as a device information response. The main control unit 323 that has received it inquires the host server 801 to collate the device information (chip ID and the like), and stops the subsequent communication when it is NG (inappropriate). If it is not NG, then it becomes possible to transmit business telegrams to P units. Then, between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, transmission and reception of a recovery request, a recovery response, an operation instruction, and a command response of the operation response are executed. The host server 801 registers the main chip ID, chip maker code, game machine maker code, and game machine product code of each P unit 2 shipped from the game arcade, and the main chip ID and chip maker transmitted from CU3 Check whether the code, gaming machine maker code, gaming machine product code and payout chip ID are already registered, and if it is not registered, return the judgment result of NG (inappropriate) to CU3. If it is registered, the appropriate judgment result is sent back to CU3. In the case of the NG (inappropriate) determination result, there is a possibility that the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 17 may be tampered with, and the upper server 801 issues a warning notification that an abnormality has occurred.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 15. Authentication in the challenge response method is performed. Challenge-response authentication generally refers to an authentication method that prevents eavesdropping on an ID or the like during communication by performing special processing on a character string or the like. For example, the authenticating side performs authentication. A random numeric string (called a "challenge code") is sent to the party that wants to receive it, and the party that received the challenge code combines the ID etc. and the received challenge code according to a predetermined algorithm, and a response code Generate and reply. Whether the response code has been received, the response code is similarly generated from the transmitted challenge code and the ID stored in advance, and the received response code is compared with the generated response code to match Perform authentication to determine whether or not.

  In the present embodiment, first, a command of BB serial ID request 1 is transmitted from main control unit 323 to CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 having received it transmits a response requesting a challenge code as a BB serial ID authentication response 1. The main control unit 323 that has received it generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and CU communication using the challenge code as a BB serial ID authentication request Transmit to control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 having received it generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and sets the response code as the BB serial ID authentication response 2 It transmits to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 having received it checks the response code to determine whether or not it is appropriate. It controls so that subsequent communication is not performed at the time of improperness (NG).

  The algorithm for generating the challenge code and generating the response code may be any algorithm, an example of which will be described below. As the challenge code generation, a random number (binary number) of the same data length is generated for the code data (binary number) of the BB serial ID, and an exclusive OR (exclusive OR) of the BB serial ID and the random number is generated. It calculates and transmits the calculation result to the CU communication control unit 80 as a challenge code. On the other hand, as the generation of the response code in the CU communication control unit 80, an exclusive OR of BB serial ID (binary number) is calculated for the received challenge code. If the BB serial ID on the main control unit 323 and the BB serial ID on the CU communication control unit 80 match, it means that the exclusive OR of the same BB serial ID has been calculated twice for the random number, The result is the original random number. Then, the original random number is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as a response code. The main control unit 323 determines whether or not the generated random number matches the random number sent as the response code, and determines that it is appropriate if it matches, but it is determined to be incorrect (NG) if it does not match. judge.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. First, the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 having received it generates a challenge code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the ROM, and the challenge code A is converted to the CU communication control unit serial. It is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as an ID authentication response 1. The main control unit 323 that has received it generates a response code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and transmits the response code A to the CU communication. It transmits to the CU communication control unit 80 as a control unit serial ID authentication request 2. The communication control unit 80 that has received it checks the response code A and determines whether or not it is appropriate. Then, a CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 2 including the determination result (check result) and the request for the challenge code B is transmitted to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 that has received it controls so that the subsequent communication is not performed when the check result is improper (NG).

  The algorithm of the generation of the challenge code and the generation of the response code shown in FIG. 18 may be any algorithm, but for example, the algorithm using the exclusive OR described in FIG. 17 can be used. .

  The challenge response type authentication algorithm is not limited to the above, and may be as follows. For example, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a random number R1, and encrypts the random number R1 using the SID (called SIDM) of the CU communication control unit stored in the CU communication control unit 80 as a key to generate a challenge code A. If it shows by a formula, it will become challenge code A = ESIDM (R1). This is sent to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 generates a response code A by decoding with SIDM stored. In the equation, response code A = DSIDM (challenge code A) = DSIDM (ESIDM (R1)) = R1. This is sent back to the communication control unit 80, and the communication control unit 80 collates whether the random number R1 generated earlier and the response code A (= R1) sent back match or not, and the condition is met. To be successful.

  Further, the main control unit 323 generates a random number R2 and encrypts the random number R2 using the SID (referred to as SIDT) of the main control unit stored in the main control unit 323 as a key to generate a challenge code B. If it shows by a formula, it will become challenge code B = ESIDT (R2). The communication control unit 80 transmits this to the communication control unit 80 and decodes it with the SIDT stored therein to generate a response code B. In the equation, response code B = DSIDT (challenge code B) = DSIDT (ESIDT (R2)) = R2. This is sent back to the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 checks whether the random number R2 generated earlier and the response code B (= R2) sent back match or not, and matches the condition To be successful.

  FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing a subroutine program of the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. The device authentication sequence is an encryption / decryption authentication sequence using an encryption key (authentication key), and uses ECB mode as a block encryption mode. First, the main control unit 323 transmits the device authentication request 1 to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 that has received it generates a random number A and encrypts the random number A using an authentication key stored in an EEPROM (not shown). Also create a MAC. This MAC is the Message Authentication Code. For example, let MAC be a value obtained by computing the generated random number A using a predetermined hash function. That is, the message digest of the generated random number A is MAC. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the encrypted random number A and the MAC as the device authentication response 1 to the main control unit 323.

  The main control unit 323 that has received it decrypts the received encrypted random number A with the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown) to generate the original plaintext random number A, and the predetermined random number A is generated. Calculate MAC using hash function. Then, it is checked whether the calculated MAC and the MAC transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 match. If the two match, it is determined that it is appropriate. If the two do not match, it is determined that it is inappropriate (NG).

  Next, the main control unit 323 generates a random number B and encrypts the random number B using an authentication key stored in an EEPROM (not shown). Further, a random number B is calculated using a predetermined hash function to create a MAC. Then, the encrypted random number B and the MAC are transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 as the device authentication request 2 as well as the authentication result based on the device authentication response 1. The CU communication control unit 80 that has received it decrypts the received encrypted random number B using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown) and converts it into the original plaintext random number B. Then, the random number B is calculated using a predetermined hash function to calculate MAC. It is checked whether the calculated MAC and the received MAC match or not, and if they match, it is determined that they are appropriate, and if they are not, they are determined to be incorrect (NG). Then, the determination result is transmitted as the device authentication response 2 to the main control unit 323. If the determination result is improper (NG), control is performed so that the subsequent communication is not performed.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. The main control unit 323 transmits an authentication key update request to the CU communication control unit 80 when there is an authentication key update request from the upper server 801. The update request from the upper server 801 also includes data of a new authentication key. The main control unit 323 updates the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown) with the new authentication key transmitted from the upper server 801, and the authentication key update request transmitted from the upper server 801. Transmit to CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 having received it performs processing of updating the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown) to the new authentication key transmitted, and the main control is performed as the authentication key update response. Send to section 323.

  The main control unit that has received it executes a device authentication sequence with the communication control unit 80 using the newly updated authentication key. This device authentication sequence is the same authentication sequence as the control shown in FIG. Then, when the authentication result is appropriate, communication is performed using the authentication key thereafter.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the storage setting of the authentication key in the EEPROM (not shown). The CU communication control unit 80 transmits the authentication key to the main control unit 323, and the EEPROM of the main control unit 323 (not shown). Store the authentication key in).

  Referring to FIG. 21, this authentication key setting sequence is an authentication key writing sequence when manufacturing a card unit (CU). First, the main control unit 323 waits for transmission of the authentication key information from the CU communication control unit 80 on the condition that the authentication key with the CU communication control unit 80 is not written. The CU communication control unit 80 starts communication in response to a request from a dedicated IC writer (ROM writer). Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits an authentication request A of the SID of the main control unit stored in the BB serial ID, that is, the EEPROM (not shown) to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 that has received it transmits a BB serial ID authentication response A for requesting the challenge code to the CU communication control unit 80 to the CU communication control unit 80. The communication control unit 80 that has received it generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and sets the challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication request B. It transmits to the control part 323.

  The main control unit 323 that has received it generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and the response code is used as the CU serial ID authentication response B as a CU. It transmits to the communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 that has received it determines whether the response code is correct, and transmits authentication key information to be described later only when the response code is correct (OK). The same challenge response authentication shown in FIG. 21 as the challenge response authentication shown in FIG. 17 or 18 (for example, exclusive OR) can be used.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 determines that the authentication result is appropriate, the authentication key information written from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer), that is, the information on the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown) Are sent to the main control unit 323 as an authentication key setting request. Having received it, the main control unit 323 causes the transmitted authentication key to be stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and transmits an authentication key setting response indicating that it has been stored to the CU communication control unit 80.

  As a result, a common authentication key (common key) is stored between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 performs device authentication thereafter using the common authentication key. This device authentication is the same as the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. When it is determined that the result of the device authentication is appropriate, the subsequent communication is not performed, and a state of waiting for reset is made.

  Next, returning to FIG. 13, the CU that has received the authentication response next transmits a recovery request to P units. In the P unit that has received it, the recovery data backed up in the P unit (specifically, the payout control unit 17) is returned to the CU as a response. The recovery data includes connection time, last SQN (sequence number), last ball related information, and current ball related information. The term "recovery data" in the following flowcharts refers to the various data mentioned above. In the present embodiment, the “final SQN” included in the recovery data is, as described above, the SQN transmitted last by P units.

  The CU that has received this recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process to recover the integrity of each other's data between CU and P, and it is not only executed at the time of power supply start, but also trouble occurred and recovered as described later Sometimes it is also done.

  The CU counts up this SQN (sequence number) each time it transmits an "operation instruction". However, it does not count up when resending the operation instruction. The CU backs up the SQN and its request content upon transmission of the “operation request”. The P unit stores the SQN received by the “operation instruction” and sends it back to the CU by the “operation response”. When the P unit receives the operation instruction of the same SQN as the SQN received last time, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU re-sends the operation instruction as the re-transmission statement.

  After the recovery process is complete, the CU updates the main chip ID, chip maker code, gaming machine maker code, gaming machine product code, payout chip ID, and connection time to the values received from P, and also sets SQN to "0". The command of SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, SQN = 0, and game ball = 0 is transmitted to P as a command of communication start request (recovery clear ON). In the P unit, the “sequence number” and the “game ball” backed up in the P unit are matched with the information of the CU in response to that (SQN = 0, game ball = 0). It also backs up the notified "connection time". Then, the P unit returns a communication start response to the CU. After this, between the CU and the P, transmission and reception of the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are performed.

  As described above, the CU increments the sequence number (SQN) by one each time this operation instruction is transmitted. First, in the first operation instruction, an operation instruction command of no game permission request and SQN = 0 is transmitted to the P-unit. In the P unit, the data of SQN = 1, pre-addition ball number = 0, pre-subtraction ball number = 0, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 0, pre-start opening (2) number of times = 0 is backed up Do. In addition, the P unit clears the value of each counter of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1), and the number of starting openings (2), which are current ball related information. And as for the P unit, as the operation response, SQN = 1, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, the number of starting openings (2) = 0, And, the response of game prohibition (game stop state) is transmitted to CU.

  The CU that has received the operation response backs up SQN = 1 based on the operation response, and calculates the current number of gaming balls 0 + the number of received additional balls 0-the number of received subtraction balls 0. While backing up 0, it backs up addition ball number accumulation = 0, subtraction ball number accumulation = 0, starting opening (1) frequency accumulation 0 =, and starting opening (2) frequency accumulation 0 = 0.

  Next, at the end of the activation process on the CU side, the CU transmits an operation instruction of game permission request, SQN = n to P units, and the P units that receive them have game permission rejection OFF as an operation response. , SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, number of starting openings (1) = 0, number of starting openings (2) = 0, and response to gaming permission is returned to CU Do.

  When an appropriate authentication result is obtained as a result of the authentication sequence using the session key in FIG. 15, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 22 is executed. FIG. 22 (a) shows the case where the business message sequence is normal, and FIG. 22 (b) shows the case where the business message sequence is abnormal.

  First, referring to FIG. 22A, after the above-described authentication sequence is completed and communication becomes possible using the session key, an operation instruction is issued from main control unit 323 to CU communication control unit 80. After the command of (1) is transmitted, a confirmation request (communication state request) of the communication state of the operation instruction message is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. CU communication control unit 80 notifies main control unit 323 of the reception status of the operation instruction message (MAC abnormality, CRC abnormality, decoding abnormality, data length abnormality, disconnection detection) as a communication state response (not shown).

  The main control unit 323 confirms the communication state based on the received communication state response, and determines that it is normal if it is normal.

  On the other hand, CU communication control unit 80 transmits a command of the operation instruction to P units (specifically, P unit communication control unit 81) based on the reception of the command of the above-mentioned operation instruction. In the unit P that has received it, the operation response is sent back to the CU communication control unit 80, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives it and transmits the response of the operation response to the main control unit 323.

  On the other hand, FIG. 22B shows the case where the business message sequence is abnormal. The main difference from FIG. 22 (a) is that the main control unit 323 that has received the communication status response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 checks the communication status based on the communication status response, and determines that it is abnormal. It is a point to do. This is determined to be abnormal if the response of the transmitted communication status response is numeric data other than 0x00. If the main control unit 323 determines that there is an abnormality, the main control unit 323 executes retry of confirmation of the communication state. Specifically, after transmitting the command of the operation instruction to the CU communication control unit 80 again, the communication state request is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, and based on the communication state response sent back from the CU communication control unit 80. It is determined whether an abnormality in the communication state has occurred. If the main control unit 323 determines that the communication status is abnormal as a result of execution of the retry, the notification of the communication status abnormality is controlled. As the abnormality notification control of the communication state, for example, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 797 and the display 312 gives notification of the abnormality of the communication state, or turns on or blinks an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Alternatively, it is conceivable to transmit a signal to the effect that an abnormality in the communication state has occurred to the hall management computer 1. Although the number of times of execution of this retry is shown once in FIG. 22 (b), it may be executed twice or more.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the process of the connection sequence when the CU and P are reconnected will be described. Here, "at the time of reconnection" is at the time of resuming communication after the communication between the CU and the P unit abnormally ends. This “abnormal end” is described later, when the power is turned on while holding the card in FIG. 36, and when the CU itself disconnects the communication when the P unit in FIG. 43 refuses addition, the CU side in FIGS. When the power is cut off. As will be described later, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, it is a. Resumption of the connection sequence in a state other than standby, b. A connection sequence after sending its own communication disconnect request and disconnecting communication (See FIG. 43) or c. It is judged whether the SQN backed up by the CU and the SQN sent from P are inconsistent or not, and it is judged as any of a to c. When it is determined, it is determined that the normal communication is not terminated (abnormal termination), and the connection sequence at the time of reconnection of FIG. 23, not FIG. 13, is executed.

  The connection sequence at the time of reconnection is similar to the connection sequence at the time of power activation described in FIG. 13, and here, mainly the differences will be described.

  First, the time to start communication after the game machine P is prohibited is immediately after the device information request command from the CU is received. This is because the P unit can recognize that the P unit has received the device information request from the CU and is reconnected for the first time.

  Next, since the connection sequence in FIG. 13 is at power on, the CU transmits a communication start request command of recovery clear ON to P units, and it is received by P units to clear the recovery data. At the same time, the sequence number (SQN) is set to 1 in accordance with SQN = 0 sent in the first operation instruction, and all previous ball related information and current ball related information etc. are cleared to "0".

  However, in the case of the connection sequence of FIG. 23, there are cases where the recovery information backed up inside the P unit and the information stored on the CU side do not match because it is the time of reconnection. Therefore, after starting the recovery processing, the CU corrects the game ball, etc., in accordance with the contents of the P-unit-side recovery data (previous ball related information, current ball related information, etc.) included in the recovery response. Execute the process Specifically, based on the game ball acquisition number information, the back ball addition information, and the game ball launch number information included in the recovery data sent from P units, the number of game balls + the number of game ball acquisition number + back Ball addition information-A game ball number-of-plays information is calculated, the stored game ball number is corrected to the calculated new number of game balls, and the corrected number of game balls and recovery data from P are calculated. The game ball total number information sent as is compared with, and it is judged whether it corresponds or not. In the case of non-coincidence, a command in which the game ball correction ON, that is, the bit 2 of the data correction request is set to "1" is transmitted to the P unit as the communication start request. Also, the final SQN included in the recovery data sent from P units and the final SQN stored in the CU are compared to determine whether they match, and if they do not match, a communication start request is issued. SQN correction ON, that is, a command in which Bit 1 of the data correction request is set to “1” is transmitted to P units. Also, the correct number of gaming balls to be corrected = 300 and SQN = 3 are included in the communication start request and transmitted to the P-unit.

  The P unit receives the communication start request command, and performs correction processing to match the “sequence number” and the “game ball” backed up by the P unit with the information of the CU. Specifically, SQN = 3 and gaming ball = 300 are corrected, and processing for backing up the notified “connection time” is performed.

  Then, the CU backs up the main chip ID, chip maker code, gaming machine maker code, gaming machine product code, payout chip ID sent from P when the recovery processing is completed, and also the time of reconnection. Back up the connection time. Then, as for the sequence number, if the final SQN transmitted from P units is not abnormal, the sequence number (SQN) is continued.

  On the other hand, after starting the recovery processing in the CU, if it is determined that the P units that are the communication partners do not match, or if it is determined that the SQN is abnormal, the recovery response sent from the P units The current number of game balls included in is converted into a ball at one end. The number of balls is the number of game balls recorded on a game recording medium (card or the like) owned by a player. Then, after balls are recorded on the recording medium, the replay button 319 is operated to use the balls of the recording medium, and the balls are converted into game balls, and then re-playing becomes possible. At that time, as in the connection sequence at power on shown in FIG. 13, as the communication start request transmitted from the CU to the P unit, recovery clear ON is transmitted, and the P unit receives it and recovers data clear. Further, in the CU, the sequence number is set to “0”, SQN = 1 is transmitted to the P unit in the first operation instruction, and in the P unit, the SQN = 1 is backed up. In addition, in P unit, the number of pre-additional ball = 0, pre-subtraction ball number = 0, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 0, pre-start opening (2) number of times = 0 is backed up Clear each counter value of number, start opening (1) times, start opening (2) times to 0.

  The processing of the CU and the P when the card is inserted will be described with reference to FIG. In the card unit 3, when the card is inserted, information such as the card balance and the card ID recorded in the inserted card is read by the card reader / writer. Then, processing is performed to inquire the higher-level server about card information such as the card balance and the C-ID. Further, as an operation instruction, a command of ON during card insertion processing indicating that card insertion processing is in progress and a command of OFF during addition display (card insertion) are transmitted to the P-unit.

  Eventually, when the inquiry processing of the card information is completed, the CU brings the display 312 on the CU side into the display state of the addition display. Thereby, when the number of game balls is specified for the inserted card, the display of the number of game balls is added and displayed from 0 to the specified number of game balls. Further, the CU stores the C-ID obtained by the inquiry processing and the type (and further, the balance) in the command of the card insertion request and transmits it to P while storing the type (and the balance). The payout control unit 17 holds and stores the received C-ID and type, and transmits the information as a “card insertion notification” to the effect control board 53 for a display (see FIG. 89). Furthermore, the P transmits a response of the card insertion response to the CU, and transmits to the CU that the C-ID and type data have been received.

  Subsequently, the CU backs up the number of game balls specified by the inserted card and the SQN, and as the operation instruction, data in which the card insertion processing in progress is turned OFF and the addition display (card insertion) is turned ON, And the number of added requests = 5000 to P units. The P unit updates and stores the number of gaming balls based on the operation instruction, and transmits the number of gaming balls and the card balance as gaming ball number related information of “notification of gaming machine information” to the effect control board 53 for display (FIG. 89) reference).

  After that, when the addition display is completed on the CU side, the CU transmits data of card insertion processing OFF, addition display (card insertion) OFF, number of request for addition = 0 to P as operation instruction, and addition display Report the end to P units.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an insertion process performed by the card unit when the card is inserted into the card unit. The steps shown by broken lines in the present embodiment indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the arrows of the two-dot chain line indicate the flow of transmitted information. In FIG. 25, the CU executes the steps S1 to S7. In addition, P units execute S8 to S10 and S12 to S15. More specifically, the display effect control board 53 provided in the P-unit executes the deletion process of S8 to S10, S12, S13, and S15, and the transmission process of S14 and S15 is a display effect control unit The effect control substrate 53 for a display provided with 292 is sent to the payout control unit 17 and the payout control unit 17 is sent to the CU.

  First, the CU determines in step (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1 whether or not interruption is in progress. Whether or not this interruption is in progress is determined based on whether or not the interruption operation shown in FIG. 32 described later has been performed and the game interruption sequence has been executed. If interruption is in progress, it is determined in S2 whether the C-ID and type of the inserted card match the C-ID and type of the interrupted operation card, and if they do not match, it is determined in S5. Eject the inserted card and shift to standby mode. In FIG. 25, the illustration of the "type" is omitted.

  On the other hand, when the C-ID of the inserted card and the type match the C-ID and the type of the interrupted card, the player who has performed the interrupted operation returns to the gaming machine again to start the game. In order to be determined, the control proceeds to step S4, the suspended state is released, and in step S6, processing for resuming the game is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1 that the card is not being interrupted, a process of storing the C-ID and the type of the inserted card and transmitting it to the P unit is performed in S3. In the P unit, the C-ID and the type are received, and the received C-ID and the type are compared with the C-ID and the type stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit shown in FIG. 7) S8). Then, it is determined in S9 whether or not the comparison results match, and if not, it is determined that a player different from the player who left the seat has started playing, and the subroutine program of this insertion process is ended. .

  Thus, the player identification information storage unit (current player gaming history data storage unit) for storing the player identification information (C-ID) and the same determination unit (S8, S9) for performing the same determination process are the gaming machines. Is provided on the display control means (display effect control board 53 provided with the display effect control portion 292), the communication means side (payment control portion 17 side) does not have the same determination processing function. In addition, it is possible to use a common communication means between the gaming machine having the display control means and the gaming machine not having the display control means, and it becomes possible to mass-produce a small variety of communication means.

  The processes of S15 and S7 may be performed as control contents of the modification. After the game history data stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit), the C-ID, and the type are transmitted to the CU by S15, they are deleted. The CU receives it and transmits the received data to the upper server 801. The host server 801 backs up and stores the received game history data, C-ID, and type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S9 that they match, the process proceeds to S12, and the gaming history data of the backup area (backup data storage) is returned to the current area (player gaming history data storage unit shown in FIG. 7). Start adding and updating the game history data anew.

  In addition, you may process S10, S13, S14 as control content of a modification. If YES in S9, the control proceeds to S10, and it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the previous card was discharged, and a predetermined time has elapsed according to S10 which has not elapsed. If it is determined that it is, processing of deleting the gaming history data, C-ID and type of the backup area (backup data storage unit) is performed in S13. Also, after S12, in S15, a notification that the players are the same is transmitted to the CU. As the control content of the modification, control may be performed so that all of the processes of S10, S13, and S14 and the processes of S15 and S7 are performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a process of consuming the prepaid balance recorded in the inserted recording medium (card) will be described. In the process of FIG. 26, the prepaid balance is "1000", and the gaming ball at the present time is "50". First, a command of no addition, addition display OFF, SQN = n, number of requested addition balls = 0, and required number of subtraction requested balls = 0 is transmitted from the CU to the P unit as an operation instruction. In the P unit that received it, SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 50, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, the number of starting openings (2) as operation response Responses of 0, game available, special award OFF, and definite variation OFF are sent back.

  On the other hand, in the CU, the lending of 500 yen, ie, 125 balls is performed by one lending operation (ball lending operation). When the lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed in the CU, SQN = n + 2, the number of gaming balls = 50 (the number of gaming balls before updating) +125 (the number of requested addition balls) = 175 and the balance = 500 are backed up. In this way, the balance consumption is decided by the CU alone when the lending operation is performed. Next, CU is being displayed for addition. During this addition display, it is displayed on the display 312 that it is in the process of deducting 125 balls from the balance and adding to the game balls.

  Then, the CU transmits a command of presence of addition, ON during addition display, SQN = n + 2, number of requested addition balls = 125, and number of required subtraction balls = 0 to the P-unit as an operation instruction. In P units that have received it, the payout control unit 17 transmits the indicator control command including the ON during addition display and the number of requested addition balls 125 included in the command of the operation instruction to the effect control substrate 53 for display . In response to that, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen in which the number of gaming balls 125 is being added.

  Next, the P unit backs up SQN = n + 2, the number of pre-addition balls = 0, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 0, the number of front start openings (1) = 0, and the number of front start openings (2) = 0. After creating the response, clear each counter value of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1) and the number of starting openings (2) to 0 Update the number of game balls to a value of 175 plus 125.

  Then, as an operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 3, number of game balls = 175, balance = 500, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, number of starting openings (1) number of times = 0, starting opening (2) Responses of the number of times = 0, game available, prize off, and definite off are returned.

  In the CU that received it, SQN = n + 3, gaming ball number = 175 (pre-update gaming ball number) + 0 (addition required ball number)-0 (subtracted ball number) = 175 to calculate and backup Cumulative total = 0, Subtractive ball number cumulative = 0, starting opening (1) totaling = 0, and starting opening (2) totaling = 0 backup.

  As described above, unlike the determination of the balance consumption, the determination of the number of game balls is made to wait for the response of the operation response from the P's.

  In addition, in the P unit, when the command of the operation instruction including the addition presence and the number of requested addition balls is received, the addition is the same without distinguishing the consumption of balls (replay of balls) and the consumption of the prepaid balance. Execute the subsequent processing in the sequence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the process at the time of the replay which consumes a ball will be described. In FIG. 27, the storage ball specified by the inserted recording medium (member's card etc.) is “1000”, and the initial game ball is in the “0” state. The process of replaying in FIG. 27 is similar to the process of consuming the balance shown in FIG. On the CU side, SQN = n + 2 when the replay button 319 is pressed in a state where a game recording medium (member's card etc.) owned by the player is inserted and there is a ball identified by the card. , The number of game balls = 0 (number of game balls before update) + 125 (number of required addition balls) = 125, and the balls = 875 are backed up. Reservoir ball = 875 becomes 875 at 1000-125, because the initial ball storage ball = 1000 to 125 (number of required addition balls) is withdrawn. This is because while the balance in the case of FIG. 26 is data of money unit, since the balls of FIG. 27 are data of ball number, it is sufficient to simply subtract 1000-125.

  Then, the CU transmits a command including “with addition”, “in addition display ON”, “SQN = n + 2”, “number of requested addition balls” = 125, “stored balls” = 875, and “required number of subtraction balls” = 0 to P as operation instructions. In P units that have received it, the payout control unit 17 transmits the indicator control command including the ON during addition display and the number of requested addition balls 125 included in the command of the operation instruction to the effect control substrate 53 for display . In response to that, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen in which the number of gaming balls 125 is being added.

  The other processes are similar to the process of FIG. As described above, the consumption of balls is determined on the CU side alone when the re-play button 319 is pressed without waiting for the response of the operation response from the P-unit, and the number of balls (also the number of balls) The same) waits for the response of the operation response from P units to determine.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the process of subtracting the number of gaming balls (wagon service etc.) according to the instruction of the CU side will be described. In the game arcade, a wagon service of consuming game balls owned by a player and providing drinks and the like to the player is performed. When the player receives such a wagon service, the player touches the display 312 and makes a wagon order, whereby the order content ordered by the player is infrared rays from the IR light receiving unit 320 of the card unit 3 It is input as a signal to the remote control possessed by the store clerk at the game arcade.

  The salesclerk of the game arcade performs the wagon service according to the order contents input to the remote control. FIG. 28 shows a case in which a wagon order that consumes the number of used game balls “300” is generated while the player-owned game balls are “1000”. When a wagon order occurs, the CU performs processing to back up “300”, which is the number of used balls of the game ball accompanying the wagon order occurrence, as SQN = n + 2, the required number of added balls = 0, and the required number of subtraction balls. At this stage, the CU does not actually subtract 300 from the game balls, but merely backs up "300" as the required number of balls for subtraction. Then, from the CU to the P unit, the commands of presence of subtraction, ON during subtraction, SQN = n + 2, number of requested addition balls = 0, and required number of subtraction request balls = 300 are transmitted as operation instructions. Then, the CU causes the display 312 to display a display (during display) indicating that subtraction is in progress (not shown).

  Upon receiving the command, the P unit determines whether the value of the game ball counter stored in itself is equal to or greater than the number required for subtraction. This determination is performed by the payout control unit 17. In FIG. 28, it is assumed that the value of the game ball counter is greater than or equal to the number required for subtraction. In the P unit, the payout control section 17 receives a command of operation instruction including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, thereby controlling display including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300. The command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for display. In response to that, the effect control substrate for display 53 displays (under subtraction display) on the display 54 that 300 balls are being subtracted as a game ball.

  Next, the P unit backs up SQN = n + 3, number of pre-addition balls = 0, number of pre-subtraction balls = 0, number of previous start openings (1) = 0 and number of previous start openings (2) = 0 and addition The value of each counter of the number of balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1) and the number of starting openings (2) is cleared to 0. Then, the number of gaming balls is updated to “700” obtained by subtracting the number of balls deducting 300 from the current number of gaming balls 1000 according to the number of deduction required balls = 300.

  Then, from P unit to CU, as operation response, subtraction refusal OFF, SQN = n + 3, current number of game balls = 700, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, starting opening (1) number of times = 0, starting opening (2) The number of times = 0, the game is possible, the special award OFF, and the definite variation OFF response are sent back.

  Then, in the CU, SQN = n + 3, gaming ball number = 1000 (pre-update gaming ball number) −300 (subtraction required ball number) +0 (additional ball number) −0 (subtraction ball number) = 700, and gaming ball Correct the number to "700" and back up. As described above, the subtraction of the number of game balls is decided only after waiting for the response of the operation response from P units.

  In addition, the CU backs up the total addition ball number = 0, the subtraction total ball number = 0, the starting opening (1) totaling = 0, and the starting opening (2) totaling = 0.

  On the other hand, when the P unit determines that the value of the game ball counter stored in itself is less than the subtraction request number, the P unit does not execute the subtraction of the game ball number according to the subtraction request number. . Also, in this case, the P-unit sends back an operation response of subtraction refusal ON as an operation response to the CU. Thereby, the CU is notified that the subtraction of the game ball based on the subtraction request has not been performed because the P unit has refused the subtraction request.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 28, the subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU is determined only after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P-unit. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 27, the storage (ball-bearing) consumption based on the instruction of the CU is decided when the CU receives the ball-consumption consumption.

  As described above, the reason why the settling time is made different between “subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of CU” and “consumption of balls (balls having balls) based on the instruction of CU” is as follows.

  At the stage when CU received subtraction processing of the number of game balls such as wagon order etc, although there was allowance in the number of game balls, although the subtraction instruction was sent, the game ball is used for the game when P unit received the subtraction instruction As a result, the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction instruction may not be left.

  In such a case, if the subtraction is determined based on the number of gaming balls stored in the CU when the CU accepts the subtraction processing, the number of gaming balls actually remains on the gaming machine side. Nevertheless, the subtraction will be determined and a contradiction will occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the "subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of CU" is determined after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P-unit.

  On the other hand, "consumed ball (consumed ball) consumption based on the instruction of CU" is an instruction to add the number of game balls, so when the instruction reaches P, P stores Even if the number of game balls fluctuates, there is no problem in adding the game balls corresponding to the addition instruction. For this reason, from the viewpoint of speeding up the processing, the “conserved ball (ball-bearing) consumption based on the instruction of the CU” is determined when the CU receives the ball (congested ball) consumption.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the process when a big hit occurs during the game will be described. In FIG. 29, the initial number of game balls is 1010, and while an operation instruction and an operation response are being transmitted / received between P units and CUs in a game, a definite variation big hit occurs, and the big hit It is shown that the probability change occurrence probability has improved and the probability change started after the end of the control.

  First, in the CU, SQN = n is backed up, and a command of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to P units. In the P unit that received it, SQN = n + 1, pre-additional ball number = 3, pre-subtraction ball number = 13, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 1, and pre-start opening (2) number of times = 1 The game ball number is calculated as 1010 + 3 (additional ball number) -13 (subtractive ball number) = 1000, and the number of game balls is updated to 1000. Furthermore, after creating the response, each counter value of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1) and the number of starting openings (2) is cleared to 0.

  And, P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 1000, the number of addition balls = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 13, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, the number of starting openings (2) = 1, Send responses to the CU that the game is possible, the special award OFF, and the definite variation OFF. Thus, the P unit transmits not only the number of subtracted balls and the number of added balls but also the number of game balls to the CU. As a result, the CU can determine whether the number of gaming balls stored in the P unit matches the number of gaming balls managed in the CU.

  In the P unit in the present embodiment, as described above, since 100 pachinko balls are shot into the game area 27 in one minute, one pachinko ball is hit in the game area in 0.6 seconds. It will Then, since the command / response is transmitted at an interval of 200 ms, the subtraction ball number from the transmission of the previous response to the transmission of the current response is 0 or 1. Therefore, the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P unit to the CU is also 0 or 1. However, if the number of subtraction balls is set to such a small value, the number of gaming balls does not change so much, resulting in a processing flow that is difficult to understand. Therefore, in the drawing of the processing flow in the present embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the number of subtraction balls and the change in the number of addition balls as needed are largely described.

  In the CU that receives the response of the operation response, calculate the number of game balls = 10 10 + 3-13 = 1000 and back up that 1000 as the number of game balls, and add the total number of added balls = 3, the total number of subtracted balls = 13, start opening Back up (1) Cumulative = 1 and Start opening (2) Cumulative = 1

  While repeatedly executing transmission and reception of the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response, a probability change big hit occurs in the P unit, and the ball related information is the number of game balls = 1100, the number of additional balls = 120, The number of subtracted balls = 20, the number of start openings (1) = 2, and the number of start openings (2) = 2. And a definite change starts after the big hit ends in P units. In the CU, SQN = n + 2 is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, SQN = n + 2, and are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P unit, back up SQN = n + 3 and back up the number of pre-addition balls = 120, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 20, the number of front start openings (1) = 2 and the number of front start openings (2) = 2 At the same time, the number of gaming balls = 1000 + 120−20 = 1100 is calculated, and the number of gaming balls is updated to 1100. Furthermore, after creating a response, each counter value of the number of addition balls, the number of subtraction balls, the number of starting openings (1) and the number of starting openings (2) is cleared to 0.

  And as for the P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 1100, the number of added balls = 120, the number of subtracted balls = 20, the number of starting openings (1) = 2, the number of starting openings (2) = 2, Send the response of the game available, the special award ON, and the special award ON to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates SQN = n + 3 and the number of gaming balls = 1000 + 120-20 = 1100, corrects the number of gaming balls to its 1100 and backs up, and adds the number of added balls = 120, total number of subtracted balls Back up = 20, start port (1) cumulative = 2 and start port (2) cumulative = 2 Also, the CU detects that the "special award" has started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a process in the case where it is detected that a game ball has run out while playing a game on P units will be described. Assuming that the initial game ball number is 20, the CU backs up SQN = n, and transmits commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n to the P units as operation instructions. In the P unit, SQN = n + 1, number of pre-addition balls = 3, number of pre-subtraction balls = 18, number of front start openings (1) = 1, and number of front start openings (2) = 1. Then, after creating the response, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1) and the number of starting openings (2) are cleared to 0.

  And, P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 5, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 18, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, the number of starting openings (2) = 1, Send responses to the CU that the game is possible, the special award OFF, and the definite variation OFF. In the CU, SQN = n + 1, game ball number = 20 + 3-18 = 5 is calculated, and then the game ball number is corrected and backed up, and addition ball number cumulative total = 3, subtraction ball number total accumulation = 18, starting opening ( 1) Back up the cumulative total = 0 and the starting opening (2) cumulative total = 0. After that, in the P unit, the number of subtraction balls = 5, so the number of gaming balls = 5-5 = 0 is calculated and the number of gaming balls = 0, so the number of addition balls = 0, the number of starting openings (1) = 0 , The number of start openings (2) changes to 0. At the stage when the number of game balls becomes 0, in the P-unit, no ball is detected, and the payout control unit 17 automatically stops the driving of the ball firing motor 18 and can not drive the ball into the game area Control to the prohibited state. It should be noted that the variable display is continued if the variable display device is already displaying the variable display only at the stage where the batting launch is stopped. Further, when the start stop (1) or the start opening (2) has a start memory at the stage of performing the firing stop control, the variable display control of the variable display device based on the memory is continued.

  In the CU, SQN = n + 2 is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 2 are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P unit, back up SQN = n + 3 and back up the number of pre-addition balls = 0, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 5, the number of front start openings (1) = 0, and the number of front start openings (2) = 0, After creating the response, each counter value of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1) and the number of starting openings (2) is cleared to 0.

  And as for the P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 0, the number of addition balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 5, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, the number of starting openings (2) = 0 Send responses to the CU that the game is possible, the special award OFF, and the definite variation OFF.

  The CU receives it, calculates the number of gaming balls = 5 + 0-5 = 0, corrects the number of gaming balls to 0 and backs up, and adds up the number of added balls = 0, the total number of subtracted balls = 5, start opening (1) Correct the total number to 1 and the starting opening (2) Total number to 0.

  As described above, the main control of the number of game balls is performed by CU, but only when performing game prohibition control (fire stop control) accompanying the fact that the number of game balls has become 0 in P, It is determined that the number of game balls has become 0, and game prohibition control (fire stop control) is performed. Thereafter, as an operation response, final ball related information is transmitted to the CU, and the final game ball number “0” is determined on the CU side. The reason for controlling in this way is that it is necessary to carry out the hitting and firing stop control at the moment when the number of gaming balls becomes zero on the P-unit side.

  For example, on the CU side which mainly manages the number of game balls, the reception of the response of the operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls when the number of game balls sent from P side becomes 0 becomes Wait, the final game ball number is calculated on the CU side and it becomes 0, thereby transmitting the command of the operation instruction with the prohibition request for prohibiting the game to the P side, and receiving it In the case where the ball launch stop control is performed on the P platform side for the first time, there is a possibility that the pachinko ball is fired and fired during response and command transmission and reception, and a new subtraction ball number may be generated during that time. On the side, despite the fact that the number of game balls has already become “0”, there arises a disadvantage that a new number of subtraction balls is generated and eventually the number of game balls becomes negative. In order to prevent such an inconvenience, control is performed based on the number of game balls on the P-unit side only when hitting ball firing stop control is performed when the number of game balls becomes zero.

  As described above, since the game control represented by the hit firing stop control is performed based on the number of game balls stored in the P unit itself, this is performed based on the number of game balls managed and stored in the CU. Compared to the case where such game control is performed, game control in accordance with the fluctuation of the number of game balls can be performed in real time.

  Here, although an example is shown in which the payout control unit 17 performs the hitting and firing stop control, the main control board 16 may be configured to perform the hitting and firing stop control.

  In this case, for example, the payout control unit 17 transmits, to the main control board 16, a signal indicating that the number of gaming balls is zero when the number of gaming balls is determined to be zero. In response to this signal, the main control board 16 prohibits driving of the hitting and firing motor 18.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the process when there is a card return operation will be described. In the state where the number of gaming balls is initially 500, the operation instruction from CU to P, and in response to the operation response from P to CU in response, CU is pressed when return button 322 is pressed, CU is As a next operation instruction, a command of prohibition request existence for inhibiting the game, clear request nothing, clear display OFF, SQN = n + 2 is transmitted to the P-unit.

  In response to this instruction, the P unit stops the driving of the hitting and firing motor 18 in accordance with the instruction of the prohibition request included in the command, and controls the hitting and firing state (game inhibition state). In addition, the P unit returns, as an operation response, a response including prohibition rejection OFF, gaming prohibition, and game completion OFF. The CU receives this, and specifies that the game is in a game prohibited state and that the game is not completed (waiting to process floating balls) in P units.

  After that, the P unit is provided with a weight of 15 seconds in consideration of the time until the already fired balls flow down in the game area 27 and flow to all out balls, that is, the floating ball processing waiting time. Polling is continued between the P unit and the CU during the 15-second wait time. During this time, the CU repeats the transmission of the operation instruction ON during card return processing. When the floating balls become 0 before 15 seconds have passed, the P unit sends back to the CU an operation response including ON of game completion.

  In addition, the P unit has a playing ball number counter for storing the floating ball number, and if this value becomes 0 in 15 seconds, the operation response including the game completion ON at that time is sent to the CU Send back. Therefore, for example, when floating balls are not already present at the time the return button is operated (playing ball number counter = 0), the P unit responds to the operation request command of prohibition request, and the game Prohibit, return the operation response of the game completion ON. In this case, substantially no wait time is set.

  On the other hand, when the floating ball times out without becoming 0 before the wait time of 15 seconds elapses, at that time, an operation response of game completion ON is returned. In this case, the value of the game ball counter is forcibly initialized to zero.

  The CU that has received the action response of the game completion ON determines that the game result is determined. Then, it sends an operation instruction including clear request ON, clear display ON, and card return processing ON to P units, and backs up data with SQN and clear request ON, and displays the display clear display. Make it

  The P unit receives this operation instruction, shifts and stores the currently stored gaming history data, C-ID and type to the backup area, and clears the storage of the number of gaming balls. Further, an operation response including clear rejection OFF, SQN = 0, and the number of gaming balls = 0 is transmitted to the CU. The CU receives this, and backs up SQN = 0, gaming ball = 0, and the currently determined ball = 500.

  Subsequently, the CU transmits a card return request to P units. In response to this, when the card is inserted, the P unit sends back to the CU a card return response including C-ID and type data stored in the backup control by the payout control unit 17. In response to this, the CU determines whether the stored C-ID and type match the C-ID and type included in the card return response, and is inserted after completion of the clear display on condition of the match. Record the ball = 500 on the current card and eject the card. On the other hand, if they do not match, error processing is performed. The error processing performs, for example, the following processing.

a Do not eject the card, or do not let the card record the number of balls played.
b Alarm sound is generated, an error is displayed by the display 312, and an error is notified to the upper server 801 or the like.

  c Eject the card, but notify the host server 801 etc. that the number of gaming balls to the card in the abnormal state is recorded.

  Any one process or a combination of two or more processes of the above ac is executed as an error process.

  After the error processing, the CU transmits an operation instruction of clear display OFF and card return processing OFF to P units. The P unit waits for this, and clears the C-ID and type data that the payout control unit 17 has backed up.

  In this example, the CU determines the number of game balls at the end of the game in response to the input of the “signal requesting the end of the game” based on the operation of the return button 322. However, the “signal requesting the end of the game” is not limited to the signal based on the operation of the return button 322.

  For example, the CU is provided with a fingerprint authentication unit that authenticates the player's fingerprint. At the start of the gaming machine, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is mandatory, and that the fingerprint information specified by the gaming card inserted in the CU by the player at the start of the game matches the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit. Allow the game as a condition. Furthermore, at the end of the game, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is essential, and the game is ended on condition that the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit matches the fingerprint information detected at the start of the game. In this case, the “signal requesting the end of the game” is fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit.

  In addition, when a game end request signal is input to the CU from a server or the like that manages the entire gaming machine installation island, the game may be ended regardless of whether or not the return button 322 is operated. In this case, the “game end request” is configured by the game end request signal input from the server.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 31, although the ball = 500 is recorded in the inserted card and discharged, the card points of the card are not stored in the card directly but in the upper level server. The points may be stored in association with. In that case, the number of game balls stored by the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server, and the points stored in association with the card number received by the upper server Is searched, and the point is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. After that, the CU ejects the card. As described above, both recording the points of the card directly on the card and storing the points in correspondence with the card number in the upper-level server are collectively referred to as “correlating” the points to the card. Do.

  Also, in FIG. 31, a weight of 15 seconds is always provided for the floating ball processing waiting time on the P base side, and the P base does not return an operation response of game completion ON to the CU until that time passes. You may

  As described above, as described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 31, the C-ID and the type are notified from the CU to the P unit only by the card insertion request command at the time of card insertion, and It is notified from the P unit to the CU only by the response. As described above, since the C-ID and the type are transmitted only at the start and end of the game, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of unnecessarily transmitting and receiving commands and responses. Note that, here, specifically, when playing a game using a membership card, "when starting a game" inserts a membership card into CU3 and transmits a card insertion request command to P platform 2. When playing a game using a visitor card, the player inserts money into CU3 at the start of the game, loads the value into the visitor card, and transmits a card insertion request command to P2 It is time to Further, "at the end of the game" is when a response of a card return response is transmitted from the P platform 2 to CU3 in accordance with the operation of the return button 322 for both the membership card and the visitor card.

  In addition, the C-ID and the type are notified from the CU to the P unit only by the card insertion request command at the time of card insertion, and notified from the P unit to the CU only by the response of the card return response at the time of card return. Alternatively, after the card is inserted, the C-ID and the type may be sent to the operation instruction and the operation response without fail.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when interrupting the game. This process is similar to the process of the card unit and the pachinko machine when returning the card of FIG. 31, and the difference is that an interruption operation is performed instead of pressing the return button. This interruption operation is an operation for temporarily interrupting the game in order for the player to finish the small use, and the player calls a store clerk in the game arcade to have the store clerk perform remote control operation for the game interruption. Then, the IR light receiving unit 320 receives the infrared signal output from the remote control, converts it into an electronic signal, and inputs it to the main control unit 323. Further, in the case of this game interruption processing, even if the CU detects the game completion, the clear request is not transmitted to the P-unit. As a result, in the P unit, data (C-ID, the number of game balls, etc.) regarding the interrupted player is stored and held. When the CU ejects a card, the CU ejects the point 0 card and returns it to the player. Thereafter, while the game is suspended, the other players are prohibited from playing games (see FIG. 25).

  The process when the lock of the glass door is released and opened will be described with reference to FIG. First, as the first operation instruction, a command including an instruction of no glass open request without a glass door open request is transmitted from the CU to the P unit. Upon receiving it, the P unit returns a normal response including the number of gaming balls = 500 to the CU as an operation response. At this stage, for example, when a problem such as pachinko balls thrown into the game area 27 in P units is caught on the game board surface, and the player calls a staff in the game arcade, the staff in the game arcade holds The remote controller is operated to transmit an infrared signal to the IR light receiving unit 320 to unlock and open the glass door. The IR light receiving unit 320 that has received it inputs the glass door open instruction signal included in the received infrared signal to the main control unit 323. Upon receiving the instruction to open the glass door, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a prohibition request existence for stopping the game, no glass opening request, and a command of SQN = n + 2 to P units. In other words, in order to perform the shot-off control on the P-unit before actually opening the glass door, an operation instruction with prohibition request and no glass-opening request is sent to the P-unit.

  In response to this, the P-unit stops driving of the hitting and firing motor 18 and controls the hitting and firing state. Next, the P unit sends back to the CU a response including the prohibition refusal OFF indicating that the gaming prohibition is not rejected and the gaming prohibition data indicating that the gaming prohibition state has been made as the operation response.

  On the other hand, in the CU, after transmitting the command of the operation instruction including the above-mentioned prohibition request to the P car, the time until all the balls fired to the game area 27 in the P car flow to the out ball and are collected In consideration of the ball processing waiting time, a weight of 10 seconds is provided, and during this time, the CU transmits a command including an instruction of game prohibition, that is, having a prohibition request, to the P unit to continue polling.

  Then, when a wait time of 10 seconds has elapsed, a command including an instruction to open the glass door for releasing and unlocking the glass door, SQN = n + N is transmitted to the P-unit as an operation instruction.

  In P that received it, while exciting the glass door open solenoid 10, unlocking the glass door and opening the glass door, turn on the bit in the glass door development life, and thereafter, until the glass door is closed Keep ON (until the detection signal from the glass door closing detector 12 is input). Then, the P unit sends back to the CU a response including a response such as glass open rejection OFF, SQN = n + N + 1, game prohibition, and glass development in progress as an operation response.

  The CU determines that the glass door has been opened if it is not rejected for the command of the glass open request, that is, if a response including a response of glass open rejection ON is not returned. After that, a command including no glass open request is transmitted to the P-unit as an operation instruction.

  FIG. 34 shows a modification of the glass door opening process shown in FIG. The difference compared with the process of FIG. 33 is that when the instruction input for opening the glass door is detected in the CU, not only the prohibition request for instructing the prohibition of the game is present, but the lock of the glass door is released and opened. It is a point that a command of glass open request having a request is transmitted to the P platform. In response to this command, the P unit stops driving of the hitting and firing motor 18 to control to stop being fired, and the time until all the balls fired to the game area 27 flow to the out balls to be collected, ie, In consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, a weight of 10 seconds is provided. During the wait time of 10 seconds, the CU and the P unit continue to transmit and receive operation instructions / operation responses. Then, when the weight time of 10 seconds has elapsed, the glass door open solenoid 10 is energized to release the lock of the glass door and open the glass door. Then, the bit under development of the glass door is turned on, and thereafter it is kept on until the glass door is closed (until a detection signal from the glass door closing detector 12 is input).

  And as for the operation response, the P unit has a glass open refusal OFF that does not refuse the opening of the glass door, a game prohibition indicating that the ball is in the ball shooting suspension state, and the lock is released and the glass door is open. Send a response to the CU that includes data on glass development and so on.

  The CU determines that the glass door has been opened by receiving the operation response of the glass open rejection OFF.

  As described above, the modified example shown in FIG. 34 is characterized in that the weight processing of 10 seconds in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time is executed not on the CU side but on the P side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the process of releasing and releasing the lock of the cell (front frame) 6 will be described. In the opening process of the cell (front frame) 6, the same process as the opening process of the glass door 6 shown in FIG. 33 is performed. Here, the differences will be mainly described.

  When a staff member of the game arcade operates the remote control to release the lock of the front frame (cell) 6 to open it, the remote control outputs infrared rays including a cell open command signal to the IR light receiving unit 320. Be done. In response to this, the IR light receiving unit 320 outputs a cell open command signal to the main control unit 323. As a result, in CU, it is determined that an instruction input to open a cell for opening a cell is detected. Then, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command including data on prohibition request existence for prohibiting a game and cell open request nothing to P units. In the P-unit, in response to that, the driving of the hitting and firing motor 18 is stopped to control the hitting and firing state.

  In the CU, a weight of 10 seconds is provided in consideration of the floating ball processing wait time, and when the wait time of 10 seconds is over, cell open request data is issued which is an instruction to unlock the cell and release it. Send the included command to P units. In the P car that receives it, the front frame opening solenoid 11 (see FIG. 5) is excited to release the lock of the front frame 6 and the front frame 6 is opened. Then, the bit under development of the cell is turned on, and thereafter it is kept on until the detection signal from the front frame closing detector 13 (see FIG. 5) is input until the cell is closed.

  And, P unit, as the operation response, the cell open refusal OFF which does not refuse the open request of the cell, the game prohibition which shows that it is in the ball hitting suspension state, the cell development live etc which shows that the cell is being opened etc Send response including data to CU.

  If the CU does not reject the cell open request, that is, if a response including the cell open rejection OFF is returned, the CU determines that the cell is opened.

  In the process of opening the cell shown in FIG. 35, as in the modification shown in FIG. 34, the P platform has the function of providing a weight of 10 seconds in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time. When a command to open a cell is detected, the CU sends a command including a command to prohibit and a command to open a cell to the P unit, and the P unit receives that command and performs batting ball launch prohibition control. After that, the action instruction / action response is continued with wait periods CU and P for 10 seconds, and when the wait time for 10 seconds elapses, the front frame open solenoid is controlled to excite and lock the front frame 6 It may be released and released, and then a cell open rejection OFF, and a response including data under development of a cell may be transmitted to the CU.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35, according to the present embodiment, the closed state of the glass door or cell, which is a specific example of the front member of P units, is released without affecting the game progress. It becomes possible.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the process when the power is turned on while the CU is holding the card and an abnormality in which P units are not connected at that time occurs will be described. Since the communication between the CU and the P unit occurred while the card was inserted and playing a game on the P unit, at the stage where the power supply of the CU was restarted, the command of the recovery request is P units from the CU Sent to. However, because there are P unconnected failures, the response from P is not sent back to CU. Then, the CU resends the recovery request command to P units. If no response is returned from the unit P despite that, the second recovery request is resent to the unit P. If no response is returned from the P unit in response to the second retransmission, the CU determines that the communication is abnormal at this stage, and displays an indication that an error has occurred due to the non-connection from the display 312. Control for turning on or blinking the alarm lamp while performing control to Note that instead of the recovery request, a device information request command may be transmitted.

  In this state, when the game store clerk remotely operates the CU to output an infrared signal for forcibly discharging the inserted card to the IR light receiving unit 320, the forced discharge signal is sent to the main control unit 323. It is input. In response to this, the CU adds the "number of game balls" backed up in the CU to the "bearing balls" of the inserted card, and clears the "number of game balls" "connection time" of the CU to 0. Then, an instruction to eject the inserted card is output to the card reader / writer. The card reader / writer that has received it ejects the card being taken. The points of the card may not be recorded directly on the card, but the upper server may store the points in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored by the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server, and the points stored in association with the card number received by the upper server Is searched, and the point is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. After that, the CU ejects the card.

  Thereafter, the CU transmits a recovery request command to P units to perform restart processing of the connection sequence (see FIG. 23). The CU determines that the connection sequence resumes with the card inserted (in a state other than standby), and executes the connection sequence for reconnection shown in FIG. 23 instead of the connection sequence for power on shown in FIG. Do. The number of addition balls (for example, j) or the number of subtraction balls from the occurrence of P unconnected failures to the restart of the connection sequence (see FIG. 23) and the transmission of the first operation response by P. The process when the number (for example, r) is generated is performed in the restart process of FIG. Referring to FIG. 23, the CU receives the recovery response from P units, thereby calculating the number of gaming balls = 0 + j (number of added balls) + r (the number of subtracted balls), and the number of gaming balls as the calculation result. Back up = j + r. Then, as described in FIG. 23, the communication start request including the SQN correction ON, the game ball correction ON, and the SQN value and the game ball value is transmitted to the P units, and the P SQN and the number of game balls And make corrections.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, processing when the operation instruction (no request operation) from the CU has not reached P units will be described.

  As described in FIG. 29 and the like, the P unit receives the command of the operation instruction from the CU, and thereby the data of the current addition subtraction ball number and the current starting opening number currently stored in the ball related information storage area. Back up the pre-addition subtract ball number and pre-start opening number in the front ball related information storage area, and clear the data of the current addition subtraction ball number and current start opening number currently stored in the ball related information storage area to 0 In the case of FIG. 37, the operation instruction from the CU has not reached P units. Therefore, the backup clear process described above is not performed on the P unit. As a result, whenever the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, and the start winning combination occur, the data is accumulated and stored as the current ball related information in the current ball related information storage area.

  First, in the state of the current number of gaming balls = 520, the CU transmits a request without request and an SQN = n command to the P-unit as an operation instruction. However, because the command does not reach P, the response from P is not sent back to CU. As a result, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to P again. If this re-transmission does not reach P, the CU retransmits a second time for the same operation instruction, because a response from P is not sent back to the CU. When this retransmission is repeated, the value of SQN is maintained at n and no incremental update of "1" is performed.

  When the command reaches P in the second re-transmission, P is, as described above, the data of the number of added / subtracted balls and the number of starting openings as the ball related information until the arrival of the operation instruction. It is cumulatively stored as Then, using the accumulated number of added balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of gaming balls at the current time = 520 + 6-36 = 490 is calculated, and as an operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = The response of the operation response of 490, the number of addition balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, and the number of starting openings (2) = 1 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates a game ball number = 520 + 6 (additional ball number) −36 (subtractive ball number) = 490, and performs processing of correcting and storing the game ball number in the 490.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, processing in the case where the operation response (response to no request operation) from P units has not reached the CU will be described. In the case shown in FIG. 38, the backup clear process described above is executed because the command from the CU is input to the P unit, but the value of the SQN of the command transmitted to the P unit from the next CU Since (= n) is the same as the previous SQN value (= n), the P-unit judges that the response of the operation response transmitted to the CU is retransmission due to the fact that the response to the CU has not reached CU, and The current addition subtraction ball number as the current ball related information and the current start opening number are accumulated and added to the data without clearing the data of the pre-addition subtraction ball number and the number of front start openings which are the ball related information.

  Specifically, with the current number of gaming balls = 520, the CU first transmits a request of no request as an operation instruction and a command of SQN = n to P units. In the P unit that received it, the above-mentioned backup clear processing is performed to calculate the current number of gaming balls = 520-13 + 3 = 510, back up the number of gaming balls = 510, back up SQN = n + 1, The data of the current addition subtraction ball number and the current starting opening number are backed up and stored in the pre-addition subtraction ball number and the front starting opening number, and a command of operation response is created and the current addition subtraction ball number and current starting as current ball related information Clear the data of the number of mouths to 0. Further, the current number of game balls 510 is included in the data of the response of the operation response. And as for the P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 510, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, and the number of starting openings (2) = 0 Send the response of to CU.

  However, since the response does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction as the previous one, that is, no request, a command of SQN = n to P units.

  On P units that received it, the response of the operation response sent does not reach the CU, because the SQN received this time is the value (= n) that precedes the SQ N (= n + 1) being backed up. It is judged that it is a retransmission due to the current addition, and the current addition subtraction ball number as current ball related information for these data without clearing the previous addition subtraction ball number as the ball related information and the data of the number of front starting openings Accumulate and backup data of the current number of starting openings. As a result, the number of pre-addition balls = 3 + 3 = 6, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 13 + 8 = 21, the number of front starting openings (1) = 1 + 0 = 1, and the number of front starting openings (2) = 0 + 1 = 1. After creating the response of the operation response consisting of these data, the data of the current addition / subtraction ball number and the current number of starting openings are cleared to zero. Then, as an operation response, the P unit has SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 505, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 21, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, and the number of starting openings = 1. Send response to CU. However, since this response does not reach the CU, the CU transmits a command of the same operation instruction (no request, SQN = n) to P units again.

  In P that has received it, the response of the operation response has reached CU, judging that the value of SQN received this time is the value (= n) immediately before the SQ N (= n + 1) being backed up It detects that there is no retransmission. As a result, in the P unit, the cumulative addition storage for the previous ball related information is performed as described above, and the response of the operation response is created and sent back to the CU. Specifically, the response of SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 485, the number of added balls = 12, the number of subtraction balls = 47, the number of starting openings (1) = 2, the number of starting openings (2) = 2 as an operation response Send to CU.

  Since the response of this operation response has reached CU, the CU calculates the number of gaming balls = 520 + 12−47 = 485, and performs processing of correcting and storing the data of the gaming balls in 485.

  As described above, when the operation response transmitted earlier does not reach the CU, the P unit retransmits the unreached operation response and then transmits the next operation response instead of transmitting the next operation response. The information after adding up is sent as the next operation response. As a result, in the gaming apparatus, information on the number of gaming balls and the number of starting opening winnings can be collected reliably and efficiently. In the example of FIG. 38, although the case where the operation response from P units has not been reached once has been described, if the operation response has not been reached twice, the operation response transmitted for the third time is The sum of the information of the operation response transmitted for the second time is included.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, processing in the case where the operation instruction (addition request) from the CU has not reached P will be described. It is assumed that the number of gaming balls at the current time is 520, the number of required additions when there is a withdrawal operation from the stored balls replay or the prepaid balance is 125, and the CU first requests addition, SQN = n, and A command including data on the number of requested addition balls = 125 is transmitted to P units. However, because the command does not reach P, the response from P is not sent back to CU. As a result, as described above, the CU retransmits the same operation command. Since the re-transmission command has not reached P, the corresponding response from P is not sent to the CU. Thus, as described above, the CU retransmits the second time for the command with the same operation instruction. The second retransmission command reaches P units. In the non-arriving period of the command of the operation instruction from the CU, addition and subtraction data and the starting opening number are added to the current addition subtraction number of balls and the current starting opening number as current ball related information Accumulate count data and store it.

  Then, the P unit calculates the current number of gaming balls = 520 + 125 (number of requested addition balls) +6 (the number of currently added balls) -36 (the number of currently subtracted balls) = 615, and sets the current number of gaming balls data to 615, Create response of operation response. Specifically, the P unit, as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 615, number of balls added = 6, number of balls subtracted = 36, number of starting openings (1) = 1, and starting Send a response of mouth (2) times = 1 to the CU.

  In response to that, the CU calculates the number of gaming balls = 520 + 125 + 6-36 = 615, corrects the number of gaming ball data, and stores it in 615.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, processing in the case where the operation response (response to the addition request) from the P units has not been reached will be described. In the case where the initial game ball number is 520, an operation to play the game is performed from the stored ball replay or the prepaid balance as withdrawal, and the case where the 125 ball number addition request is generated will be described. First, the CU transmits a command of addition request existence, SQN = n, and the number of addition request balls = 125 to P as an operation instruction. The P unit that has received it has the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, the number of starting openings (2) = 0, and SQN = n + 1 as current ball related information. Is backed up to the ball related information storage area last time, and the number of gaming balls = 520 + 125 + 3-13 = 635 is calculated and the number of gaming balls = 635 is stored.

  Then, after creating a response of the operation response, the P unit clears the stored data of the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 635, number of balls added A response of 3 = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 13, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, and the number of starting openings (2) = 0 is transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command as the previous one to the P units. At the time of re-transmission, SQN of the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to P units without updating SQN by adding "1".

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) preceding to the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. Although it is detected that transmission is performed, although the requested number of added balls = 125 is included in the received command, addition updating of the game balls based on the command is not performed. That is, the addition update according to the addition request is not executed twice.

  In addition, in the P-unit, since the command retransmission detection is performed, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area as in the process of FIG. The stored data, ie, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, and the number of starting openings (2) = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the game ball number = 635 + 3-8 = 630 is calculated, and the game ball number is corrected to 630 and stored.

  After that, the P creates a response of the operation response. Specifically, as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 630, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 21, number of starting openings (1) = 1, and starting opening (2) Send 1 to the CU as a response.

  Since this response has not reached the CU, the CU retransmits the second time for the command of the same operation instruction.

  In the P unit, retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and while the addition request ball number 125 is received, addition update is not performed, and double execution of addition update according to the addition request is not performed. Then, in the same manner as described above, after performing cumulative storage in the ball related information storage area last time, calculation of the number of gaming balls, generation of response, and clearing 0 of the current ball related information storage area, addition refusal OFF, SQN as operation response. A response of n = 1, the number of game balls = 610, the number of addition balls = 12, the number of subtraction balls = 47, the number of starting openings (1) = 2, and the number of starting openings (2) = 2 is transmitted to the CU. Since this response has reached CU, the CU calculates the number of gaming balls = 520 + 125 + 12−47 = 610, corrects the number of gaming balls to 610, and stores it.

  As described above, in the P unit, even when the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the value one previous to the SQN (= n + 1) that the SQN received this time backs up In the case of = n, it is determined that it is re-transmission, and it is not determined that it is an additional addition request, and addition update of the game ball is not performed, and double execution of addition update according to the addition request is performed. Absent.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, processing when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from the CU has not reached P will be described. A case will be described where the initial game ball number = 520, and a wagon order or the like generates a 300 ball subtraction request. First, the CU transmits a command of subtraction request existence, SQN = n, and subtraction request ball number = 300 to P as an operation instruction. However, since the command did not reach P, a response from P is not sent back to CU. Therefore, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to P again. The response from the P unit is not sent back to the CU because the re-send command also did not reach the P unit. Therefore, the CU retransmits the second time for the command with the same operation instruction. This second retransmission command reaches P units.

  In the P unit, while the command of the operation instruction from the CU has not arrived, as in the processing of FIG. Do. Then, at the stage when the command of the second operation instruction is input to the P unit, the game ball = 520-300 + 6-36 = 190 is calculated, and the game ball = 190 is stored. Then, as the operation response, subtraction refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 190, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting openings (1) = 1, and number of starting openings (2) = 1 Send the response of to CU.

  In response to that, the CU calculates game ball = 520-300 + 6-36 = 190, corrects the game ball in the 190, and stores it.

  As described above, when performing subtraction from a game ball, the CU first transmits an operation instruction command including data of the subtraction request presence and the subtraction request ball number to the P unit, and a response as an operation response to it is Wait for the response to the CU, and subtract the subtraction requirement from the game ball. Although the main management function to manage the current game balls by adding / subtracting game balls is on the CU side, with respect to the game balls changing every moment with progress of the game in P unit, the CU side It is possible to calculate the current game ball by performing addition and subtraction of the game ball only after the operation response including the reply is sent back, and the period for waiting for the operation response from the P unit, the game in CU compared to the P unit. The calculation time of the ball is late. Therefore, the current game ball data on the CU side is data having a time delay with respect to the P unit, and even if the current game balls on the CU side have the same number of balls required for subtraction, the P unit side In fact, there may be no remaining game balls for the number of required subtraction balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, upon subtraction of the game balls, the CU waits for the response of the operation response from the P's and performs subtraction of the game balls for the subtraction request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the process in the case where the operation response from P (the response to the subtraction request) does not reach CU will be described. Assuming that the initial game ball number = 520 and the subtraction required ball number = 300, the CU first transmits a command with subtraction required, SQN = n, and subtraction required ball number = 300 to the P units as operation instructions. The P unit that has received it has the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, the number of starting openings (2) = 0, and SQN = n + 1 as current ball related information. Is backed up in the previous ball related information storage area, and the number of gaming balls = 520-300 + 3-13 = 210 is calculated and the number of gaming balls = 210 is stored.

  Then, after creating a response of the operation response, the P unit clears the stored data of the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 210, number of balls added A response of 3 = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 13, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, and the number of starting openings (2) = 0 is transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command as the previous one to the P units. At the time of re-transmission, SQN of the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to P units without updating SQN by adding "1".

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) preceding to the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. It detects that it is transmission, and although the subtraction request ball number = 300 is included in the received command, subtraction update of the game ball based on the command is not performed. That is, the subtraction update according to the subtraction request is not performed twice.

  In addition, in the P-unit, since the command retransmission detection is performed, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area as in the process of FIG. The stored data, ie, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, and the number of starting openings (2) = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the number of gaming balls = 210 + 3-8 = 205 is calculated, and the number of gaming balls is corrected to 205 and stored.

  After that, the P creates a response of the operation response. Specifically, as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 205, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 21, number of starting openings (1) = 1, and starting opening (2) Send 1 to the CU as a response.

  Since this response has not reached the CU, the CU retransmits the second time for the command of the same operation instruction.

  In the P unit, the retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and while the subtraction request ball number 300 is received, the subtraction update is not performed, and the subtraction update is not performed double according to the subtraction request. Then, in the same manner as described above, after performing cumulative storage in the ball related information storage area last time, calculation of the number of gaming balls, generation of response, and clearing 0 of the current ball related information storage area, addition refusal OFF, SQN as operation response. = N + 1, game ball number = 205 + 6-26 = 185, ball number to be added = 12, subtract ball number = 47, start opening (1) times = 2 and start opening (2) times = 2 responses are sent to CU . Since this response has reached the CU, the CU calculates the number of gaming balls = 520-300 + 12-47 = 185, corrects the number of gaming balls to 185, and stores it.

  As described above, in the P unit, even when the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the value one previous to the SQN (= n + 1) that the SQN received this time backs up If it is = n, it is judged that it is re-transmission, and it is not judged that it is an additional subtraction request, and subtraction update of the game ball is not performed, and double execution of subtraction update according to the subtraction request is performed. I do not do it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, processing in the case where P responds to the addition request of the CU in response to the addition rejection response will be described. With the initial game ball number = 520, the balance of the game recording medium (card) inserted in the CU = 1000 yen, a command of no request, SQN = n is transmitted to P as an operation instruction from the CU. . The P unit calculates the game ball = 520 + 3-23 = 500 and includes the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of balls subtracted, the number of starting openings (1), the number of starting openings (2), and data of SQN = n + 1 Send an operation response to the CU. The CU calculates the gaming ball based on the operation response and corrects it to gaming ball = 500.

  Next, the lending button 321 is pressed, and the CU transmits a command including an addition request, SQN = n + 2, a balance = 500, and an addition request ball number = 125 to the P units as an operation instruction. In the P unit, for any reason, the response of the operation response including the addition refusal ON that rejects the addition is sent back to the CU.

  Since the CU receives the operation response including the addition refusal OFF, the game ball can not be added at P, and it is determined that the game ball difference has occurred between P and CU, and the communication connection is disconnected. In order to do this, send a command for communication disconnection request to P units. Upon receiving it, the P unit returns a response to the communication disconnection response to the CU, disconnects the communication connection, and transmits a release control signal for stopping the release from the release control unit 17 to the release control board 31, The launch control board 31 having received the command stops the drive of the launch motor 18 to stop the game.

  The P unit further has, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, the number of pre-additional balls = 6, the number of pre-subtractions = 36, the number of pre-starting holes (1) = 2 and the pre-starting opening (2). Number of times = 2, current ball number as current ball number = 460, current added ball number = 3, current subtraction ball number = 13, current start opening (1) times = 1, current start opening (2) times = 1 Store the data of

  Next, after the chip ID authentication is performed between the CU and the P, transmission and reception of a recovery request command and a recovery response response are performed. In the response of this recovery response, the aforementioned recovery data stored on the P base side is transmitted to the CU side.

  The CU calculates and backs up the number of gaming balls = 595 + 3-13 = 583 according to the recovery data (the number of currently added balls = 3, the number of currently subtracted balls = 13). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the processing at the time of reconnection (connection sequence) shown in FIG. 23, and the CU transmits a command including game ball correction ON and game ball = 583 to the Ps in the communication start request. In response to this, the P unit corrects the game ball to 583. The CU determines that the connection sequence restarts after transmitting a communication disconnection request and disconnecting the communication, and executes the connection sequence at reconnection of FIG. 23, not the connection sequence at power on of FIG. Do.

  Also in the process of FIG. 43, the consumption of the balance is determined on the CU side without waiting for the response of the operation response from P, so the response including the addition refusal ON as the operation response from P is Even if it has been sent back, the balance consumption has already been settled on the CU side in the earlier stage.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a process in the case where P responds to a subtraction rejection request in response to a CU subtraction request will be described. Since the number of added balls is 3 and the number of subtracted balls is 13 at the stage when the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are transmitted / received between the CU and P one reciprocation as the initial game ball number = 520. The game ball is 520 + 3-13 = 510.

  If an order for wagon service or the like occurs at this stage and a subtraction request for 500 balls is generated, the CU issues a command for subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, and the number of balls required for subtraction = 500 as operation instructions. Send to the table. At the stage of receiving this command, the number of added balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36 in the P unit, and the number of gaming balls at the current time = 510 + 6-36 = 480. As a result, since the current number of gaming balls (480) is smaller than the number of subtraction required balls (500), it is not possible to meet 500 of the subtraction request. Therefore, the P unit, as an operation response, indicates subtraction refusal indicating rejection of subtraction request ON, SQN = n + 3, number of gaming balls = 480, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting openings (1) Send a response of 2 and the number of start openings (2) = 2 to the CU.

  In response to that, the CU calculates the game ball = 510 + 6-36 = 480 and corrects the game ball to 480. Then, subtraction refusal is detected, and processing of subtraction cancellation is performed. In the process of this subtraction cancellation, for example, a message such as “Insufficient game ball can not be subtracted” is displayed by the display unit 312.

Thereafter, polling of normal operation instructions and operation responses is performed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, processing in the case where the P unit sends back a clear rejection response in response to the CU clear instruction request will be described. In FIG. 45, the sequence from the part where the CU sends the clear request is described. For example, as shown in FIG. 45, when an operation response of game completion ON is transmitted from the P unit to the CU after the return button 322 is pressed and operated as in the process of FIG. , Clear request present, during clear display, and send command of operation instruction of SQN = n + N + 3 to P units. P that received it is clear rejection ON indicating that it can not be cleared for some reason, SQN = n + N + 4, number of game balls = 480, number of balls added = 6, number of balls subtracted = 36, number of starting openings (1) The response of the operation response of = 1 and the number of start openings (2) = 2 is transmitted to the CU. At this stage, the game ball is 480. Then, the CU detects clear rejection, transmits a command of no request and SQN = n + N + 4 as an operation instruction to the P-unit, and performs clear cancellation processing. The processing of this clear cancellation is processing such as displaying a message such as “Return operation has been canceled but can not be canceled” on the display unit 312 or the like. Thereafter, normal polling of operation instruction and operation response is performed between CU and P units.

  Referring to FIG. 46, processing in the case where the P unit returns a response of permission denial in response to the game permission request of CU will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520, and in a trouble state in which some gaming prohibition factor has occurred, the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P in a state where the gaming of P is prohibited. It is assumed that the game prohibition factor is eliminated at the stage of “game prohibition factor cancellation” in FIG.

  At that time, the CU transmits a game permission request and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the Ps as an operation instruction. However, the P unit sends back to the CU an operation response command including an impossibility to hit the ball for some reason, that is, a game rejection ON that rejects the game permission request.

  In response to this, the CU repeatedly transmits a command including the game permission request as an operation instruction to the P unit until the game is permitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, processing in the case where the P unit sends back a response of prohibition rejection in response to the game prohibition request of CU will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520, transmission and reception of a normal operation instruction command and a normal operation response between the CU and the P unit are performed. It is assumed that a game prohibition factor such as operation of the return button 322 has occurred. At this stage, the CU transmits, to the Ps, a command of game prohibition request existence and SQN = n + 2 as an operation instruction. In the P unit, the response of the operation response including the prohibition refusal ON which rejects the game prohibition request for some reason is sent back to the CU. In response to this, the CU detects a game prohibition rejection, and transmits a command including a game prohibition request to the P as an operation instruction until the game prohibition is made.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, processing in the case where the P-unit sends back a response to the glass open rejection in response to the glass open request of the CU will be described. When the input of the instruction to open the glass door is detected as the initial number of game balls = 520, although not shown in FIG. 48, the CU first has a prohibition request as an operation instruction as in the process of FIG. Send a command without glass open request to P unit. In response to this, the P unit performs control to stop the driving of the ball striking launch motor 18, and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a weight of 10 seconds in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and the CU continues polling to the P-unit with an operation instruction (no game) for 10 seconds. Then, when the wait of 10 seconds is completed, the CU transmits a command of glass open request and an operation command of SQN = n + 2 to P units. In response to that, the P unit transmits to the CU an operation response response including a glass open rejection ON that refuses to unlock and open the glass door for some reason.

  In response to this, the CU detects a glass open rejection, transmits a command including no request as an operation instruction to the P-unit, and executes a normal open cancel after processing the glass open cancellation. The process of this glass open cancellation is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as "The glass door can not be opened" by the display unit 312 or the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, processing in the case where the P-unit sends back a response of cell open rejection in response to the cell open request of CU will be described. When an input of an instruction to open a cell is detected as the initial game ball number = 520, although not shown in FIG. 49, the CU first performs prohibition request and cell as an operation instruction as in the process of FIG. Send the open request no command to P. In response to this, the P unit performs control to stop the driving of the ball striking launch motor 18, and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a weight of 10 seconds in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and the CU continues polling to the P-unit with an operation instruction (no game) for 10 seconds. Then, when the wait of 10 seconds is completed, the CU transmits a command of cell open request presence and an operation instruction of SQN = n + 2 to P units. In response to that, the P unit transmits to the CU an operation response response including a cell open rejection ON that refuses to unlock and release the cell for some reason.

  In response to this, the CU detects a cell open rejection, transmits a command including no request as an operation instruction to the P-unit, and executes a process of cell open cancellation and thereafter performs normal polling. The process of cell open cancellation is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “the cell can not be released” by the display unit 312 or the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side after reaching the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data will be described. In the state of SQN = n with the initial number of game balls = 520, the command of the operation instruction is transmitted to the P unit, and the P unit as an operation response: SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 500, the number of added balls = 3, subtraction The response including the addition / subtraction data of the number of balls = 23 is transmitted to the CU. After the response reaches CU, SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 500, and if a power failure occurs in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to P units thereafter. In the P unit, when the command can not be received for 4 seconds or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped and the play is stopped. Accumulated storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of starting openings after P unit transmits the response of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and the game ball = 500 + 6-36 = 470 is calculated accordingly The game ball = 470 is stored.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, as in the process of FIG. 23, execution of the mutual authentication sequence and chip ID authentication sequence and transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed by the CU and P Do.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the number of pre-additional balls = 3, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 23, the number of front start holes (1) = 1, the number of front start holes (2) = 1, current ball number as current ball number = 470, current addition ball number = 6, current subtraction ball = 36, current start opening (1) number of times = 2, current start opening (2) number of times of 2 storage , Send to CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, it is determined that the communication partners are the same and both SQNs match, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 470, the total number of addition balls = 6, the total number of subtraction balls = 36, start Correct the mouth (1) total = 2 and the start mouth (2) total = 2

  Next, recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation instruction will be described with reference to FIG. As the initial game ball number = 520, the P unit which received the command of the operation instruction, as the operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 500, the number of additional balls = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 23, the starting opening (1 ) After sending a response to the CU with the number of times = 1 and the number of starting openings (2) = 1 and the CU accordingly correcting it to SQN = n + 2 and gaming ball = 500, the CU has no request as an operation instruction, Send the command of SQN = n + 2, and to P. If the command does not reach P and the power is cut off immediately after that, the P judges that the command has not been received for 4 seconds or more after sending the last response. Then, the state is shifted to the unconnected state, and the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped to put the play stop state.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, as in the process of FIG. 23, execution of the mutual authentication sequence and chip ID authentication sequence and transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed by the CU and P Do.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the number of pre-additional balls = 3, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 23, the number of front start holes (1) = 1, the number of front start holes (2) = 1, current game ball number as current ball number = 500 + 6-36 = 470, current addition ball number = 6, current subtraction ball = 36, current starting opening (1) number of times = 2, current starting opening (2) number of times = 2 is stored and sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is not being transmitted, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by one more than the SQN on the P side, so based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Perform processing to correct the backup value. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 470, the total number of addition balls = 6, the total number of subtraction balls = 36, start Correct the mouth (1) total = 2 and the start mouth (2) total = 2

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data will be described. After the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are exchanged between CU and P as the initial game ball number = 520, the command of the operation instruction of no request, SQN = n + 2 is transmitted to the P unit After that, P sets the action response as SQN = n + 3, number of gaming balls = 470, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting openings (1) = 2 times, starting openings (2) number 2 The response was sent to CU. However, when the response does not reach the CU, and the power is cut off at the CU before the CU executes the operation response process according to the response, the P unit receives 4 seconds after the last response transmission. If the command is not transmitted, the disconnection detection is detected, and the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped and the play is stopped.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, as in the process of FIG. 23, execution of the mutual authentication sequence and chip ID authentication sequence and transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed by the CU and P Do.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, the number of pre-additional balls = 6, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 36, the number of front start openings (1) = 2, the number of front start openings (2) as the previous number of balls 2, Current game ball number as current ball number = 470-3 = 467, Current addition ball number = 0, Current subtraction ball = 3, Current start opening (1) number = 0, Current start opening (2) number = Store 0 and send it to CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the communication partner is the same and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (number of gaming balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls) + 0 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls)-3 (the current number of subtraction balls) = 467 Total number of additional balls = 6 (current number of additional balls) + 0 (current number of additional balls), total number of subtractive balls = 36 (current number of subtractive balls) + 3 (current subtractive ball number), starting opening (1) total = 2 (previous) Correct the start opening (1) number) + 0 (current start opening (1) number), start opening (2) total = 2 (pre-start opening (2) number) + 0 (current start opening (2) number).

  FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the control contents in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. (A) shows a case where a CU is replaced with a new CU and disagrees, and (b) shows a case where a P is replaced with a new P and disagrees.

  For example, if a CU fails and a power failure occurs, it is often performed in a game arcade to replace the failed CU with a new CU. In the game arcade, a plurality of CUs are aged in a unit stocker. The aging is a standby state connected to the upper server. FIG. 53 (a) shows a state in which the CU being aged in the unit stocker is replaced with the failed CU, connected to P units, and restarted. In this case, in response to a recovery request from the CU, a recovery response including recovery data such as the number of gaming balls and C-ID is returned from P, but at that time, the CU is It is judged that P units are different, and recovery data of P units is not used for correction of the game ball. However, the CU stores its recovery data. After that, when the card used at the time of power off is inserted into the CU, the C-ID recorded on the inserted card is read and sent as the C-ID of the inserted card and a recovery response. It is determined whether the C-ID matches or not, and if it matches, the following correction processing is performed based on the stored recovery data.

  When the determination result of the C-ID does not match, the current game ball count included in the recovery response is transmitted to the upper server 801. At this time, the C-ID included in the recovery data may also be transmitted to the upper server 801. The upper-level server 801 that has received it back-stores the current number of game balls received in association with the C-ID. As a case where the determination result of this C-ID becomes unmatched, the player is playing a game while replacing it with a new CU which is broken and aged while the player is playing a game. This is a case where the player gives up and continues to insert a card to start a game after the replacement work is over. In such a case, it is necessary to compensate for some loss for the player who has given up continuing the game during the replacement operation. The player who gives up such continuation of the game causes the upper server 801 to read the C-ID of the member card owned by the player and associates the number of current game balls backed up with the member card as a ball bearing. Discharge and make it possible to exchange prizes. Also, once the player giving up continuing the game has left the game arcade, the upper server 801 is allowed for several days to be able to compensate for the loss even if the player who has left the room visits the game arcade again. The current game ball number is backed up, and the player who has returned to the store causes the higher-level server 801 to read the C-ID of the member card owned by the self and the current game ball number backed up is taken as the ball. It may be made to correspond to and be discharged so that a prize exchange etc. can be performed.

  However, if the card is damaged due to a failure or power cut of the CU, "match the C-ID of the inserted card with the C-ID sent as a recovery response" Can not do the process itself. In such a case, a store clerk intervenes and performs manual correction.

  In the case of manual correction, the display of the display 54 on the P side is used. In the present embodiment, when power failure of CU is detected in P units, the non-transmission data that could not be transmitted to CU due to CU power interruption or the like from payout control unit 17 of P units to effect control substrate 53 for display unit. A command requesting to be displayed is sent repeatedly. The display effect control board 53 displays the unsent data based on the request. Here, the unsent data is a series of ball related information (see FIG. 6) including the number of starting opening winnings, including the number of gaming balls. Therefore, even if the card discharged from the CU is damaged at the time of the power interruption and the recorded information can not be read, the data on the CU side can be obtained by using the display on the display 54 on the P side. It can be corrected to the correct value. In this way, the player does not suffer any loss.

  As a condition for automatically correcting the backup value, in addition to the C-ID coincidence determination, it may be a condition that a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has not elapsed. That is, since the work of replacing the failed CU with a new CU is completed in about 10 minutes, after a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) for which the replacement work can be performed sufficiently has elapsed, the card Even if it is inserted and it is determined that the C-IDs match, control may be performed so that automatic correction of backup data is not performed.

  If the failed CU is a minor failure and communication is possible, the CU is returned to the unit stocker, and the unit stocker transmits the number of game balls and the C-ID together with the stocker ID to the upper server 801, and , And a new CU connected to the P unit transmits data such as the number of game balls corrected based on the recovery data from the P unit to the upper server 801, and in the upper server 801, data such as the number of game balls of both Control may be performed to check whether they match or not. If they do not coincide with each other, abnormality determination is performed to perform predetermined abnormality processing such as abnormality notification.

  Furthermore, instead of the CU performing data correction based on the recovery data transmitted from P units, the CU may download the recovery data from the upper server 801 and perform the data correction. Specifically, the CU periodically transmits data such as the number of game balls and C-ID to the upper server 801, stores it back up in the upper server 801, is replaced by a new CU, and is connected to P units. When the C-ID contained in the post-recovery recovery response matches the C-ID recorded on the card inserted in the CU, the C-ID is transmitted to the upper server 801 and the C -Recovery data such as the number of game balls stored in backup corresponding to the ID may be downloaded and stored in the CU.

  FIG. 53 (b) shows the case where the P units are replaced with new ones and connected after power-off. In that case, first, activation processing is performed, and device information request, device information response, authentication request, authentication response, recovery request, and recovery response are transmitted and received. Then, the CU determines that the P's of the connection partners are different based on the device information response, and does not use the P's recovery data for the correction of the game ball. The recovery data of the original P units, which had been installed before being replaced with the new P units, are manually corrected manually at the POS with the help of a game arcade clerk.

  FIG. 54 shows control in the case where the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 54, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 53 described above is performed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  FIG. 55 shows control in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 55, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 53 described above is performed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side at the stage before reaching the addition request will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520 and the prepaid balance is 1000 yen, the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and P units, and the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls generated therebetween When the game ball reaches 500, the lending button 321 is pressed. Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of requested addition balls = 125, calculates the balance = 1000 yen-500 yen = 500 yen, updates the balance to 500 yen, and determines the consumption of the balance at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command including an addition request, SQN = n + 2, a balance = 500, and an addition request ball number = 125 to the P units as an operation instruction. If this command does not reach P, the P detects the disconnection and drives the bat firing motor 18 at a stage where transmission of the last response and no reception of the command continues for 4 seconds. Stop and stop play.

  On the other hand, in the CU, when there is no response from P units due to the unreached command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted, and when no response is returned after performing the second retransmission, communication error It detects (communication disconnection) and starts reconnection sequence 5 seconds after that.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the CU and P perform the mutual authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and transmit and receive the recovery request and the recovery response, as in the process of FIG.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the number of pre-additional balls = 3, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 23, the number of front start holes (1) = 1, the number of front start holes (2) = 1, current ball number as current ball number = 470, current addition ball number = 6, current subtraction ball = 36, current start opening (1) number of times = 2, current start opening (2) number of times of 2 storage , Send to CU as a recovery response.

  Since the CU has the same communication counterpart and is one more advanced than the SQN on the P side than the SQN on the P side, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response. . Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (number of game balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 595, the total number of addition balls = 6, the total number of subtraction balls = 36, start Correct the mouth (1) total = 2 and the start mouth (2) total = 2

  Next, recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side at a stage before reaching the operation response to the addition request will be described with reference to FIG. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520 and the prepaid balance = 1,000 yen, the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are transmitted / received between the CU and P units, and the game balls = based on the number of additional subtraction balls generated therebetween After becoming 500, the lending button 321 is pressed. Then, in the CU, SQN = n + 2, addition required ball number = 125, balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen is calculated, balance is made 500 yen, and consumption of the balance is fixed at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command of addition request existence, SQN = n + 2, balance = 500, and addition request ball number = 125 to P as an operation instruction. As for the P unit that received it, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 595, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of starting openings (1) = 2 and the number of starting openings (2) as operation response Send a response of 2 to the CU. If this response does not reach the CU and a power failure occurs before the operation response processing according to the response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU will not be transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the P unit, when the command can not be received for 4 seconds or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped and the play is stopped. Accumulated storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of starting openings after P unit transmits the response of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, the game ball = 595-3 = 592 is calculated And the game ball = 592 is stored.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, as in the process of FIG. 23, execution of the mutual authentication sequence and chip ID authentication sequence and transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed by the CU and P Do.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, the number of pre-additional balls = 6, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 36, the number of front start openings (1) = 2, the number of front start openings (2) as the previous number of balls 2, the current game ball number as the current ball number = 592, the current addition ball number 0, the current subtraction ball = 3, the current starting opening (1) number of times = 0, the current starting opening (2) number of times 0 , Send to CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, it is determined that the communication partner is the same and the operation instruction is being transmitted, and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted by the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (number of game balls in CU) + 6 (number of pre-additional balls) + 0 (number of current addition balls)-36 (pre-number of subtractive balls)-3 (current subtraction number of balls) = 592 Total number of added balls = 6 (pre-added number of balls) + 0 (currently-added number of balls), Subtracted number of balls = 36 (pre-reduced number of balls) + 3 (currently reduced number of balls), starting opening (1) Total = 2 (previous) Correct the start opening (1) number) + 0 (current start opening (1) number), start opening (2) total = 2 (pre-start opening (2) number) + 0 (current start opening (2) number).

  FIG. 58 shows control in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 58, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 53 described above is performed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing control in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 59, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 53 described above is performed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, recovery processing when power failure occurs on the CU side at the stage before reaching the subtraction request will be described. As the number of initial game balls = 520, transmission and reception of a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are performed between the CU and the P unit, and at the stage when the number of game balls = 500 according to the number of addition and subtraction balls in the meantime When a request for subtraction of 300 balls is generated due to a request for wagon service, etc., the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of required subtraction balls = 300, and as an operation instruction, there is a request for subtraction, SQN = n + 2, and a reduction request ball Send a command of number = 300 to P units.

  If this command does not reach P, the P detects the disconnection and drives the bat firing motor 18 at a stage where transmission of the last response and no reception of the command continues for 4 seconds. Stop and stop play.

  On the other hand, in the CU, when there is no response from P units due to the unreached command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted, and when no response is returned after performing the second retransmission, communication error It detects (communication disconnection) and starts reconnection sequence 5 seconds after that.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, the CU and P units execute the chip ID authentication sequence and transmit and receive the recovery request and the recovery response.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the number of pre-additional balls = 3, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 23, the number of front start holes (1) = 1, the number of front start holes (2) = 1, current ball number as current ball number = 470, current addition ball number = 6, current subtraction ball = 36, current start opening (1) number of times = 2, current start opening (2) number of times of 2 storage , Send to CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1, so it is determined that the subtraction request is not executed on P, and the backup value is based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response. Perform processing to correct Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 470, the total number of addition balls = 6, the total number of subtraction balls = 36, start Correct the mouth (1) total = 2 and the start mouth (2) total = 2

  As described above, the CU determines that the subtraction request is not executed on the P base based on the value of SQN, so that the correction request of 300 balls is generated in the correction of the backup value accompanying the recovery processing. Although being raised, subtraction of the required number of balls 300 is not performed from the number of game balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, recovery processing when power failure occurs on the CU side in the stage before reaching the operation response to the subtraction request will be described. The initial game ball number is set to 520, and a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P unit, and the number of game balls is set to 500 according to the number of added subtraction balls generated during that time. When a request for wagon service for 300 balls is generated at the stage, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, and there is a demand for subtraction, SQN = n + 2, and the number of balls required for subtraction as operation instructions. Send a command of = 300 to P units.

  In response to this, the P unit receives SQN = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 170, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of starting openings (1) = 2 and the number of starting openings = 2. Send response to CU. If the response does not reach the CU, and a power failure occurs before the processing of the operation response according to the response is executed in the CU, the command from the CU will not be transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the P unit, when the command can not be received for 4 seconds or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped and the play is stopped. Accumulated storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of starting openings after P unit transmits the response of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and the game ball = 170-3 = 167 is calculated accordingly The game ball = 167 and SQN = n + 3 are stored.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the CU and P perform the execution of the mutual authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response as in FIG.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, the number of pre-additional balls = 6, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 36, the number of front start openings (1) = 2, the number of front start openings (2) as the previous number of balls 2, the current game ball number as the current ball number = 167, the current addition ball number 0, the current subtraction ball = 3, the current starting opening (1) number of times = 0, the current starting opening (2) number of times 0 , Send to CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, it is determined that the P unit has received the subtraction instruction because the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction transmission is in progress, and the P SQN is advanced by 1, and the recovery transmitted by the recovery response Perform processing to correct backup values based on data. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (number of gaming balls of CU) + 6 (number of pre-additional balls) + 0 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of pre-subtraction balls)-3 (current subtractive ball number) = 467 Total number of added balls = 6 (pre-added number of balls) + 0 (currently-added number of balls), Subtracted number of balls = 36 (pre-reduced number of balls) + 3 (currently reduced number of balls), starting opening (1) Total = 2 (previous) Correct the start opening (1) number) + 0 (current start opening (1) number), start opening (2) total = 2 (pre-start opening (2) number) + 0 (current start opening (2) number).

  The CU sends a device information request at power-on to restart the connection sequence, but determines that the SQN backed up by the CU and the SQN sent from P do not match, as shown in FIG. Instead of the connection sequence at the time of power activation, the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 23 is executed. As a result, the CU forcibly adds the game balls for the subtraction cancellation to the P base with the operation instruction after recovery, and corrects the SQN as well as the game ball correction ON, the game ball = 467, the SQN correction ON, and the SQN = A communication start request including n + 2 is transmitted to P units (see FIG. 23). In response to that, the P unit corrects and stores the game ball = 467 and SQN = n + 3.

  As described above, even if it is determined that the P unit receives the subtraction instruction, the reason for performing the subtraction cancellation processing is that the P unit that received the subtraction instruction always performs the subtraction process according to the subtraction instruction There is also a possibility that refusal of subtraction was performed on the P side. When the subtraction is rejected on the side of P, if the subtraction is determined on the side of CU, there is a disadvantage that the number of remaining game balls becomes a negative value. For this reason, subtraction cancellation is performed. As a result, at the time of such a CU side power failure occurrence, although the P unit side should have refused the subtraction instruction because there are not enough remaining points, the subtraction is performed and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the number of remaining game balls on the machine side becomes a negative value.

  FIG. 62 shows control in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 62, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 53 described above is performed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  FIG. 63 shows control in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 63, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 53 described above is performed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, recovery processing when power failure occurs on the CU side at a stage before reaching the clear request will be described. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of gaming balls = 500. In FIG. 64, as in the process of FIG. 31, the CU transmits to the P units a command including data of prohibition request existence and clear request non-existence for prohibiting the game to the P units as the operation instruction. In response to that, the unit P sends a response including data of prohibition refusal OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. Then, as in the process of FIG. 31, a weight of 15 seconds is provided in the P unit, and polling is continued between the P unit and the CU during the wait of 15 seconds.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + N + 3 and transmits a command including SQN = n + N + 3 to the P unit as an operation instruction with clear request present and clear display, but the command does not reach the P unit. The platform detects disconnection and stops the driving of the bat firing motor 18 and puts the game into a play stop state when four seconds after the last response has been sent and the command continues to be received for four seconds.

  On the other hand, in the CU, when there is no response from P units due to the unreached command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted, and when no response is returned after performing the second retransmission, communication error It detects (communication disconnection) and starts reconnection sequence 5 seconds after that.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the CU and P perform the execution of the mutual authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response, as in FIG.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + N + 2, the number of pre-additional balls = 0, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 0, the number of pre-starting balls (1) = 0, the number of pre-starting holes (2) = 0, current game ball number as current ball number = 500, current addition ball number 0, current subtraction ball 0, current start opening (1) number of times = 0, current start opening (2) number of times 0 , Send to CU as a recovery response.

  The CU determines that the clear request has not arrived because the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response. Do the processing. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (the current number of game balls) + 0 (the number of current addition balls)-0 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 500, the total number of addition balls = 0, the total number of subtraction balls = 0, the starting opening (1) Correct the total number to 0, and the starting opening (2) Total number to 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, recovery processing in the case where a power failure occurs on the CU side before the arrival of the operation response to the clear request will be described. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of gaming balls = 500. In FIG. 65, as in the process of FIG. 31, the CU transmits to the P units a command including data of the prohibition request existence and the clearing request absence for prohibiting the game as the operation instruction. In response to that, the unit P sends a response including data of prohibition refusal OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. Then, as in the process of FIG. 31, a weight of 15 seconds is provided in the P unit, and polling is continued between the P unit and the CU during the wait of 15 seconds.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + N + 3 and transmits a command including clear request present, clear display ON, and SQN = n + N + 3 to the P units as operation instructions.

  Then, in response to this operation instruction, the P unit clears the game ball to 0 according to the clear request and sets the game ball to 0, and clears the SQN to 0 and sets SQN to 0, and then the SQN as an operation response. A response of = 0, the number of game balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, and the number of starting openings (2) = 0 is transmitted to the CU. If the response does not reach the CU, and a power failure occurs in the CU before performing the operation response process according to the response, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the P unit, when the command can not be received for 4 seconds or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and a transition to the unconnected state is made.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the connection sequence is resumed in the same manner as the processing of FIG. 23, and transmission / reception of device information request, device information response, authentication request, authentication response, recovery request, recovery response CU and P perform.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = 0, the number of pre-additional balls = 0, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 0, the number of pre-additional balls = 0, the number of pre-starting holes (1) = 0, the number of pre-starting holes (2) = 0, current game ball number as current ball number = 0, current addition ball number = 0, current subtraction ball = 0, current start opening (1) number of times = 0, current start opening (2) number of times 0 , Send to CU as a recovery response.

  The CU determines that the P unit is cleared because the S unit S on the P unit side is 0, and performs processing to correct the backup value based on the recovery data transmitted by the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (the backup value of CU) + 0 (the number of current addition balls)-0 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 500, the total number of addition balls = 0 (the current number of addition balls) Total = 0 (current subtraction ball number), start opening (1) total = 0 (current start opening (1) number of times), start opening (2) total = 0 (current start opening (number of times 2)).

  The CU determines that the P unit is cleared because the S unit S on the P unit side is 0, and performs processing to correct the backup value based on the recovery data transmitted by the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (the backup value of CU) + 0 (the number of current addition balls)-0 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 500, the total number of addition balls = 0 (the current number of addition balls) Total = 0 (current subtraction ball number), start opening (1) total = 0 (current start opening (1) number of times), start opening (2) total = 0 (current start opening (number of times 2)).

  FIG. 66 shows control in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 66, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 53 described above is performed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing transition of display screens on the CU side and the P-base side corresponding to the control operation at the time of insertion of the card shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 67, when the card is not inserted, a command of an operation instruction without an operation request is sent from the CU to P during standby, and a response of game ball = 0 is received as an operation response while waiting. P is sent back to CU. During transmission and reception of such commands and responses, as shown in [Normal screen (card not inserted)] at the upper left of FIG. 67, “None” in the “Card type” title column on the display 312 of the CU, “0 shot” is displayed in the “playing ball” title column. In addition, as shown in [Normal screen (card not inserted)] on the upper right of FIG. 67, “0 ball” in the title column of “game ball” and in the title column of card balance on the display 54 of P units. "0 yen" is displayed. In addition, on the display 312 and the display 43, various data indicating the gaming state of P units at the current time is displayed. For example, in FIG. 67, the number of times of start, the number of big hits, the number of definite variations, and the number of highest consecutive channels are displayed, and the number of starts between special prizes (effective start winnings between one big hit and next big hit) The frequency is displayed as a bar graph. Furthermore, on the CU side display unit 312, an amount display portion for setting a credit amount, an amount display portion for the card balance, a display portion for the number of replayed balls, a display portion for the number of balls and a display portion for the rate of rental balls Is provided.

  Furthermore, the display unit 312 on the CU side is configured by the touch panel as described above, and display items of "base information", "setting change", and "order menu" are displayed at the upper left of each display screen. When the user selects a touch operation, the display screen is switched to the touch-operated display screen. In FIG. 67, a screen in a state in which "host information" is selected is displayed.

  In addition, the display unit 312 on the CU side is provided at the lower part of each display screen with a selection operation display unit for "return", "rental", "replay", and "call", and the player can select any of these display units. It is possible to input a command to the CU by selecting one and performing a touch operation. For example, if "Return" is touched, the inserted card is returned, and if "Loan" is touched, gaming balls from the prepaid balance recorded in the inserted card are lent. Further, if "replay" is touched, replay using balls or balls of the inserted card (membership card) can be performed. When "call" is touched, a notification for calling a game center clerk is made.

  When the card is inserted, the CU transmits a command of no operation request to the P-unit as an operation instruction during the card insertion process. In response to this, the unit P detects that the card insertion process has been started on the CU side. After sending and receiving the command of the operation instruction, it is in the state of inquiring to the upper server (for example, the hall management computer 1). In the state in which this inquiry is in progress, the display 312 on the CU side displays "inquiring" as shown in the second "card balance inquiring screen" from the top, and also displays on the P side In the display unit 54, the server displays an arrow from the server to the IC in the lower left corner of the screen as shown in the second normal screen (during inquiry of card balance), and the server is inquired of the card inserted. The picture is displayed. Note that "IC" in the display screen indicates a card (IC card).

  In P units that have received the above-mentioned operation instruction, while waiting as an operation response, a response of game ball = 0 is sent back to the CU.

  In the CU, if the inserted card is collated by inquiring the server and the balls (= 5000) and the balance (= 7000) of the inserted card are determined, the card is being held as an operation instruction. , Add required ball number = 5000, card balance = send a command to P units. After the transmission of this command, the CU is being displayed in addition. On the P unit that has received this command, the CU detects that the card balance and the balls have been settled, and thereafter, the addition display is in progress.

  During the addition display, "5,000 balls" is displayed in the ball display column as shown on the third "Up in ball lending" screen from the top on the display 312 of the CU, and the game machine is headed. An arrow is displayed, and it is displayed to the player that it is in the middle of transmitting 5,000 balls to the gaming machine. On the other hand, in the P-unit, as shown on the third [Normal screen (during a rental)] from the top by the display 54, an arrow is displayed from the IC toward the game ball display unit and the card balance display unit. The display (during addition display) which is being added with the ball rental is thereby made. Then, "5000 balls" are displayed on the game ball display unit, and "7000 yen" is displayed on the card balance display unit.

  Next, a response including gaming ball = 5000 is transmitted as an operation response from the P unit to the CU. In the CU, when 2-3 seconds have elapsed since the movement display of the ball indicating the addition display is started, the addition display is ended and “member” indicating the card type inserted in the display 312, the game It switches to the state which displays "5000 shots" as a ball. On the other hand, in the P unit, the addition display is ended after a few seconds since the movement display of the ball during the addition display is started, and the movement display of the ball by the display 54 is ended.

  In this way, while the display of the start of the operation process such as during inquiry or addition display is started at the same time with CU and P units, the end of the display of those operation processes is ended from CU to P unit The command or the like is not transmitted, and the P-unit side can be terminated at its own timing, and the CU-side end timing is not constrained. As a result, it is possible to make a unique display unique to the P stand.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the in-game ball counter. The in-game ball number counter is a counter included in the P payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 counts the number of floating balls (the difference between the number of game balls fired and the number of game balls discharged from the board) by the playing ball counter, and whether the value is 0 or not The presence or absence of the floating ball is determined by determining.

  The in-game ball number counter is incremented by 1 when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a detects a shot. The in-game ball counter is decremented by detecting that a far ball is detected by the far ball detection switch 33 and that a merged ball is detected by the launch ball detection switch 903. Thus, the floating balls at the current point are counted.

  Furthermore, the game number-of-games counter receives a game prohibition from the CU when the number of game balls is 0 (the launch is stopped) and the state of the number of running balls continues other than 0 for 15 seconds (stops the launch) ) Is cleared if the playing ball counter does not reach 0 even after 15 seconds.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 68 and FIG. 31, the operation of the CU related to the playing ball counter will be described. When the return button is turned on, the CU stands by for 15 seconds after transmitting the game prohibition until the transmission of the game completion ON is received from the P unit side. Then, when the game completion ON is transmitted from the P unit side in 15 seconds, it is determined that the game is completed without the floating balls. On the other hand, when the game completion ON is transmitted from the side P after 15 seconds, the CU determines that the number-of-games ball counter is forcibly cleared in the state where the floating balls are present.

  In the case where the floating balls win after clearing the on-play ball number counter after 15 seconds with the floating balls being present, the payout balls to be awarded by the occurrence of the winnings are CU, The payout control unit 17 stores the unsent data as

  69 and 70 are flowcharts related to floating ball processing. In particular, FIG. 69 shows the process on the P side, and FIG. 70 shows the process on the CU side.

  First, processing on the P-unit side will be described with reference to FIG. For example, when the game prohibition request is received from the CU in response to the card return operation as shown in FIG. 31, for example, the P car determines that the game prohibition request is present (SS1). In this case, the P unit prohibits the firing of the ball (SS2), and further determines whether the value of the playing ball counter at this stage is 0, that is, whether or not the floating ball is present (SS3) . When the value of the in-game ball counter is 0, an operation response including "no game, game completion ON" is transmitted to the CU. Subsequently, although it is determined that the winning of the floating ball is generated (SS11), if it immediately proceeds from SS2 to SS3 and advances to SS10, since the winning of the floating ball can not occur, always at SS11. The determination is NO, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the in-game ball counter is not 0 in SS3 after prohibiting the launch, an operation response including "prohibit game, completion of game OFF" is transmitted to the CU (SS4). Subsequently, a floating ball processing timer (wait time) of 15 seconds is counted (SS5). Then, when a prize due to a floating ball occurs in the meantime (YES in SS6), prize-related information is transmitted to the CU each time (SS7). The prize related information is information such as the number of additional balls accompanying the prize and the number of gaming balls at the current time. In addition, if a foul ball or a merging ball is detected while counting the floating ball processing timer for 15 seconds, that is, since the floating ball decreases, the playing ball counter is decremented and updated (SS9) . As a result, if the value of the in-game ball counter becomes 0 while counting the floating ball processing timer for 15 seconds, it is judged as YES in SS3 and the operation response including "game prohibition, game completion ON" is sent to CU. It is sent (SS10). After that, when a prize due to the floating balls is generated later, it is determined as YES in SS11, and the prize information is stored as unsent data to the CU (SS12).

  On the other hand, if the value of the in-game ball counter does not become 0 while counting the floating ball processing timer for 15 seconds, it is judged as YES in SS13 and the in-game ball counter is initialized ( An operation response including "no game, completion of game ON" is sent to SS14) and CU (SS10). That is, although the playing ball counter is not 0, since the wait time has timed out, at that time, an operation response including “prohibition of gaming, game completion ON” is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, when a prize due to a floating ball is generated after a delay, it is determined as YES in SS11, and the prize information is stored as unsent data to the CU (SS12).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, processing on the CU side regarding floating balls will be described. First, it is judged whether or not the operation of the return button is detected (SS50). When the operation of the return button is detected, an operation instruction including a game prohibition request is transmitted to P (SS 50). Thereafter, operation response from P units is awaited (SS 51), and if the operation response does not come after waiting for the prescribed time, retransmission processing is performed (SS 56).

  On the other hand, when the operation response is received, it is determined whether the operation response is "game prohibition, game completion ON" (SS 53) or "game prohibition, game completion OFF" (SS 57). When "no game, completion of game ON" is returned, it can be determined that no floating ball is present at the time of operation of the return button. In this case, it is determined as YES in SS53, and an operation instruction including a clear request is transmitted to P (SS 54). Thereafter, the current number of game balls is determined as a game result, and the card is discharged (SS 55). Although detailed processing is omitted in the flowchart, as shown in FIG. 31, after the operation instruction including the clear request is transmitted to the P unit, the clear operation from the P unit is performed until the card is ejected. The operation response of the rejection OFF is received, the card return request to the P unit is transmitted, and the card return response from the P unit is received.

  On the other hand, if the response received from the P-unit at SS52 includes "no game, completion of game OFF", it is determined as YES at SS57. If it is determined YES at SS57, the floating ball processing waiting time is counted (SS58). This time is the same as the timed time of the floating ball processing timer of SS5 of FIG. 69, and is, for example, 15 seconds.

  Then, it is determined whether or not winning-related information such as the number of gaming balls, the number of added balls, and the number of subtracted balls has been received from the P during counting of the floating ball processing waiting time (SS59). Here, for example, when winning combination related information of the number of added balls is received, it means that a winning has occurred on the side of P based on the floating balls. In such a case, YES is determined in SS59, and gaming machine information such as the number of gaming balls is updated on the CU side (SS60). Subsequently, an operation instruction is transmitted from the CU side to P units (SS 61).

  Next, it is judged whether or not there is a response of game completion ON (SS 62). That there was a response of game completion ON before timing of floating ball processing waiting time ends, that all floating balls were decided in P stand side, in this case, it advances to SS55, currently The number of game balls is determined as the game result and the card is discharged (SS 55).

  On the other hand, when there is no response of game completion ON, it is judged as NO by SS62, and it is judged whether floating ball processing waiting time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed (SS63). If the floating ball processing waiting time has not elapsed, the process returns to SS 58 again, but if the floating ball processing waiting time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, receiving the game completion ON from P unit Then, the process proceeds to SS55 to execute the card ejection process.

  The floating ball processing waiting time on the P side may be different from the floating ball processing waiting time on the CU side. For example, it is conceivable that the floating ball processing waiting time of P units is set to 15 seconds, while the floating ball processing waiting time on the CU side is set to a longer time (for example, 20 seconds). Thus, for example, the floating ball is determined at the very last stage of timing out on the P side, and although the fact has been notified to the CU along with the number of gaming balls, the CU side determines the time out and discharges the card It can prevent you from

  As described above with reference to FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, or FIG. 31, in the present embodiment, when the game prohibition request is transmitted from the CU based on the pressing of the return button, on the P side, While prohibiting the game, check the presence of floating balls. Then, when there is no floating ball, the card is promptly returned to the player by transmitting the information of the game completion ON to the CU to advance the processing of the game completion. On the other hand, if there is a floating ball, it waits for the result of the game by the floating ball to be finalized during the wait time, and if there are no floating balls, information of game completion ON is waited without waiting for the wait time to elapse. The card is promptly returned to the player by advancing the processing of the game termination by transmitting to the CU. As a result, even when the floating balls can be processed, when the game is not performed, the game end processing can be completed promptly.

  In addition, when a winning is generated by floating balls during the weight period, information on the number of additional balls according to the winning is transmitted to the CU, so that the number of gaming balls of the player can be accurately grasped on the CU side.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68, when the number of gaming balls is 0 (the firing is stopped) and the number of playing balls continues other than 0 for 15 seconds, the value of the playing ball counter is set to 0. Can be regarded as a state in which no floating balls are present, and processing of game completion can be advanced quickly.

  In addition, temporarily, even if the winning by the floating ball occurs after advancing the processing of the game completion by forcibly setting the value of the in-game ball counter to 0, as shown at SS12 in FIG. Since the information is stored as unsent data to the CU, the player can be compensated later based on the storage. In this case, as shown in FIG. 95, the unsent data in this case is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate for display 53, and is displayed on the display 54. As a result, both the player and the attendant at the game arcade can grasp the unprocessed winning balls. The prize ball compensates the player, for example, by POS operation of a valet.

  According to the flowcharts of FIGS. 69 and 70, the P unit transmits the game completion ON to the CU if the floating ball is determined before the floating ball processing waiting time elapses, and the floating ball processing waiting time The game completion ON is transmitted to the CU as a time-out if the floating ball is not determined until the elapse of. However, it is assumed that information on game completion ON to be transmitted when floating balls are determined before time out and information on game completion ON to be timed out and transmitted are made different so that both can be clearly distinguished on the CU side. May be In this case, on the CU side, for example, when information on game completion ON after time-out is received, the game completion is notified, for example, that there is an unconfirmed floating ball present (displayed on a display, for example) Different processes may be executed depending on the difference in the information of

  Furthermore, in SS12 of FIG. 69, when a winning is detected after transmitting the game completion ON, it is considered that the floating ball is delayed and the winning is stored, and the winning information is stored as unsent data to the CU. However, it can not be denied that the player has illegally generated a prize. For this reason, when a winning is detected after transmitting the game completion ON, it may be notified on the P side or the CU side. Alternatively, in addition to the notification, the number of winning balls based on the winning may be written on a card different from the card used by the player, or a screen of P units for hand correction by a game arcade clerk The number of winning balls may be displayed on the screen.

  In the above, the case where the game result is unconfirmed at the time of the return button operation has been described taking the ball game machine as an example, but in the case of a slot machine (S below) to be described later There is no ball. However, in the case of S units, it is assumed that the reel is rotating at the time of operation of the return button, and therefore the game result is unconfirmed. In such a case, after the operation instruction of the game prohibition ON is transmitted from the CU to the S car, the car S is put into the game prohibition state by prohibiting the setting of the new bet number, the game is prohibited for the CU, the game Reply completion OFF. After that, the S unit starts counting a certain wait time, and during that time, when the stop operation of the reel is performed and the game result is decided, the game completion ON is transmitted to the CU at that stage. On the other hand, when the reels do not stop even after the wait time has elapsed, the game completion ON is transmitted to the CU at that time, and the process proceeds to the card ejection process as in the example of the ball game machine. In this case, if a reel is stopped after that and a winning occurs, it should be given to the player based on the winning or the winning as unsent data to the CU, as in the example of the ball-ball game machine. The memory points are stored and displayed on a display provided on the S-unit.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, regarding the communication sequence between the CU and the payout control unit of P units, when there is an addition request from the card unit side, when there is a subtraction request, and an operation mode switching request Explain the case where there is a problem.

  FIG. 71 shows a communication sequence when there is an addition request from the CU. As illustrated, in the state where there is no addition request, the bit representing “addition display” of the operation instruction transmitted from the CU to the payout control unit is OFF. In the present embodiment, as shown in Note 1, a bit of "adding display" is provided for each addition factor, and in the communication sequence diagram, the bit at the time of ball storage replay is "during addition display ( “Replay)”, a bit used to consume a prepaid card balance is described as “during addition display (prepaid lending)”.

  As shown in the figure, when an addition factor occurs when the number of gaming balls is 50, the "addition display" bit corresponding to the addition factor (relaying balls, prepaid consumption, etc.) is turned ON, and it is determined that an addition request is made. A command of operation instruction is transmitted to the payout control unit. The command for operation instruction further includes the number of requested addition balls. In this case, on the CU side, the SQN included in the operation instruction and the value after updating the number of gaming balls with the number of requested addition balls are backed up. In addition, at this stage, the CU determines the consumption (prepaid consumption, consumption of the balls by the replay of the balls) corresponding to the addition request.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 17 having received the operation instruction transmits the received number of requested addition balls and bit data indicating ON during addition display to the effect control substrate 53 for display (see FIG. 91). The effect controller for display 53 receives the data, determines the addition factor, and displays the addition animation on the display 54.

  Further, the payout control unit 17 sends back to the CU an operation response including the number of game balls (= 175) after the addition and update. On the CU side, the addition display (50 → 51 → 52 →...) Of the number of gaming balls is performed on the display unit 312 from the point of time when the operation instruction command for specifying the number of requested addition balls is transmitted. Eventually, when the addition display on the CU side ends, the CU transmits an operation instruction switched from ON to OFF during addition display to the payout control unit. The payout control unit transmits a command of OFF during addition display to the effect control substrate for display 53 based on this (see FIG. 91). As a result, the addition animation display on the display 54 on the P base side controlled by the effect control substrate for display is also terminated in conjunction with the end of the addition display on the CU side.

  Next, the case of a subtraction request will be described with reference to FIG. In the case of a subtraction request, the bit in the subtraction display turns on in the command of the operating CU, but as in the case of the addition request, the subtraction display is performed according to the factor of the subtraction request as shown in Note 1 and Note 2. A bit of is defined.

  As shown in the figure, when the wagon service or the subtraction factor of the ball division occurs while the gaming ball = 5000, the CU has a bit in the subtraction display corresponding to the subtraction factor ON and the subtraction request existence and the number of balls required for subtraction And sends an operation instruction including the above to the payout control unit. Also, the CU backs up the SQN included in the operation instruction and the number of balls requested to be subtracted. However, the CU does not confirm the subtraction at this stage. That is, the number of stored game balls is not decremented and updated.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit having received this operation instruction transmits the received subtraction request ball number and bit data indicating ON during subtraction display to the effect control substrate for display 53 (see FIG. 92). The display effect control board 53 receives the data, determines the subtraction factor, and displays a subtraction animation on the display 54.

  Furthermore, the payout control unit sends, to the CU, an operation response including the number of gaming balls (= 4000) after the subtraction and updating. On the CU side, subtraction display (5000-> 4999-> 4998-> ...) of the number of gaming balls is performed on the display unit 312 from the time when the operation instruction command for specifying the number of balls required for subtraction is transmitted. Eventually, when the subtraction display on the CU side ends, the CU transmits an operation instruction switched from ON to OFF during subtraction display to the payout control unit. Based on this, the payout control unit transmits a command of OFF during subtraction display to the effect control substrate for display 53 (see FIG. 92). As a result, the subtraction animation display on the display 54 on the P base side controlled by the presentation effect control substrate side for display also ends in conjunction with the end of the subtraction display on the CU side.

  Next, the case of operation mode switching will be described with reference to FIG. Here, in the business mode, the case where it is switched to either the maintenance mode or the trial hitting mode by remote control operation will be described.

  First, a mode switching signal is input to the CU by performing a remote control operation for mode switching. Then, the CU determines whether the card balance is 0 and the number of game balls is 0 (0 yen 0 ball state). If one of the card balance and the number of game balls is not zero, the mode switching signal input by remote control operation is ignored. On the other hand, when the card balance is 0 and the number of game balls is 0, the CU transmits a mode change request command to the payout control unit. The mode change request includes the type of mode (transfer destination mode) designated by the remote control operation and other additional information.

  The payout control unit having received the mode change request transmits a mode change request to both of the main control board 16 and the effect control board for display 53, and notifies the details of the mode change (transition destination mode) (FIG. 80) , See FIG. 96). However, the payout control unit does not transmit a mode change request to the main control board 16 and the effect control board for display 53 when a fixed condition is not satisfied, and the mode change response of result = NG is Reply to CU (not shown). In this case, the mode can not be switched.

  With the fixed condition, two conditions of “(1) 0 yen 0 ball state, (2) that the number of balls in game is 0” are established for the main control board 16 It is. On the other hand, for the effect control board 53 for display, “(1) 0 yen 0 ball state, (2) the number of balls in game is 0, (3) mode change from the main control board 16 All three conditions of "the response result is OK" are satisfied.

  That is, when receiving a mode change request from the CU, the payout control unit first determines that the above conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, and if both conditions are satisfied, the main control is performed. A mode change request is transmitted to the substrate 16 to notify the mode change content (transition destination mode). Then, the payout control unit waits for the result (OK or NG) from the main control board 16. If the result from the main control board 16 is OK, then it sends a mode change request to the effect control board 53 for display, notifies the mode change content (transition destination mode), and sends the CU, Send a mode change response of result = OK. However, if the result from the main control board 16 is NG, the mode change response of result = NG is sent back to the CU without transmitting the mode change request to the effect control board for display 53.

  Note that “(1) 0 yen 0 ball state” has already been determined on the CU side, but the determination is a determination based on data stored in the CU, while the payout control unit Since the determination of is based on the data stored in the payout control unit, the data used for the determination is different in both determinations. A communication sequence regarding operation mode switching between the payout control unit and the main control board 16 is shown in FIG.

  As a result, when the above three conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied, a mode change request is transmitted to the effect control substrate for display 53 (see FIG. 96), and the result for the CU is obtained. An OK mode change response is sent. The CU receives the result OK mode change response, and operates according to the operation mode designated by the remote control. That is, the CU changes the mode in response to this mode change response. Then, a screen corresponding to the mode is displayed on the display 312 of the CU. For example, in the case of the maintenance mode, a screen for maintenance is displayed on the display unit 312, and various settings can be made by the touch panel.

  The maintenance screen is also displayed on the display 54 on the P-unit side, and various settings can be made by the touch panel. However, the maintenance screen may be displayed on one of the CU and P displays.

  On the other hand, the operation mode is switched by the main control board 16 and the effect control board 53 for a display, for P units that transmitted the mode change response of result OK. As a result, for example, in the case of the maintenance mode, a screen for maintenance is displayed on the display 54, and various settings can be made by the touch panel.

  Thereafter, when an operation to switch back to the business mode is performed by the remote control, the CU transmits a mode change request for specifying the business mode to the payout control unit. The payout control unit that has received this sends a mode change request to the main control board 16 and determines the above conditions (1) to (3), and the mode in which the result is OK only when all the conditions are satisfied. Send change response to CU. In addition, in this case, the CU transmits a mode change request for switching to the business mode to the effect control substrate for display 53. This switches the mode to the business mode.

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 73, the state of 0 yen and 0 balls is judged on the CU side and also on the side of the payout control unit of P units, and only when both of the judgments are made, Mode switching becomes possible (However, mode switching is not performed unless it is determined that the condition is satisfied on the main control board side as well). For this reason, it is possible to more reliably prevent the mode switching from being performed in the state where the game ball is present or the balance of the card is present.

  The control of the payout control unit in FIG. 73 can also be performed as follows. That is, when the payout control unit 17 receives the mode change request from the CU, the main control board 16 and the effect control board for the display device are determined without determining whether the conditions (1) to (3) of the mode change are satisfied. Send a mode change request to both of them. Subsequently, the payout control unit 17 determines that the above conditions (1) to (3) of mode change are satisfied, and if all of them are satisfied, returns OK to the result and switches the mode, and at least one is satisfied. If not, the result NG is returned to the CU and the mode is not switched.

  When such control is performed, it is determined that the condition of “(1) 0 yen 0 ball state” or “(2) the number of balls in game is 0” is not satisfied on the payout control unit side, and the mode is changed. Although this is not the case, there may be a case where the mode is changed on the side of the effect control substrate for display and the side of the main control substrate. However, for example, “(1) 0 yen 0 ball state” or “(2) the number of playing balls is 0” will be established as time passes. Therefore, the CU repeatedly transmits a mode change request to the payout control unit 17 even if the result NG is received from the payout control unit side, and eventually the above "(1) 0 yen 0 ball state" and "(2) game ball" When the number is “0”, the payout control unit 17 switches the mode to the main control board 16 or the effect control board for display 53 delayed.

  Furthermore, although switching by remote control operation has been described here, an operation unit for switching the mode is provided on the CU side, and a mode switching signal is generated by operating this operation unit, and the CU generates a signal The mode change request may be transmitted to the payout control unit based on the above.

  Further, in the present embodiment, by connecting the pseudo card unit and turning on the power of both the pseudo card unit and the P unit, a mode change request as shown in FIG. 73 is transmitted from the pseudo card unit, Switch to test mode. However, instead of this, the test mode may be switched by the remote control operation as well as the maintenance mode and the test hitting mode.

  Furthermore, instead of or in addition to the remote control operation, a mode switching command signal from a management apparatus such as the hall management computer 1 is input to the CU, and the CU performs a mode based on the switching command signal. A change request may be sent.

  Alternatively, the command signal by remote control operation or the command signal from the management device may be directly input to the P unit without passing through the CU, and the P unit may switch the mode upon receiving the command signal. .

  As described above, in order to change the mode by receiving a mode change request from the CU, the P unit can provide a gaming system having a high degree of cooperation between the CU and the P unit with respect to mode switching.

  Next, communication between the payout control unit and the main control board 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 80. First, communication commands will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76.

  The command sent from the payout control unit 17 to the main control board 16 is a “device information request” requesting the main control board 16 to transmit the main chip ID, and the number of prize balls etc. for the main control board 16 There is a "table state inquiry request" requesting transmission of gaming machine information, and a "mode change request" requesting the main control board 16 to change the operation mode. Of these commands, the platform status inquiry request includes SQN.

  The command sent from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 sends a chip ID etc. to the payout control unit 17 “device information response”, and the payout control unit 17 the number of balls etc. There is a “table state inquiry response” that transmits information, and a “mode change response” that transmits the change result of the operation mode to the payout control unit. Among these commands, the platform status inquiry response includes SQN.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the “device information response” includes information on the main chip ID, the chip maker code, the gaming machine maker code, and the gaming machine product code. In addition to the SQN, the “table state inquiry response” includes various information for transmitting to the CU from the payout control unit of the P units, such as the number of winning balls, the number of symbol determinations, and the game state. The payout control unit 17 transmits various types of information to the CU based on the “table state inquiry response” received from the main control board 16.

  As shown in FIG. 76, “mode change request” includes type information of the specified operation mode. Also, the “mode change response” includes the processing result, that is, the result of whether or not the mode has been changed. If the result is NG, data indicating the cause may be further included in the “mode change response”.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram for describing control of SQN between the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 17. As shown in FIG. 74, the SQN is included in the table status inquiry request transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the main control board 16 and the table status inquiry response transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 Be

  When the main control board 16 receives a table state inquiry request from the delivery control unit 17, it transmits a table state inquiry response in which one obtained by adding 1 to SQN included therein is SQN, and stores the transmitted SQN. Similarly, when the delivery control unit 17 receives a platform status inquiry response from the main control board 16, it transmits a platform status inquiry request having SQN as a result of adding 1 to SQN contained therein and stores the transmitted SQN. Do.

  When the main control board 16 receives the command of the platform state inquiry request from the payout control unit 17, as shown in FIG. 77, the main control board 16 compares a value obtained by adding 1 to SQN transmitted last time and SQN included in the command received this time. If they match, it is determined that the SQN is normal. In this case, the command including the scheduled information is transmitted as it is.

  On the other hand, the value obtained by adding 1 to the SQN transmitted last time is compared with the SQN included in the command received this time, and when the latter is large, it is judged as SQN abnormality (advance on the delivery control unit side). to correct. That is, the value obtained by adding 1 to the stored SQN is stored again. As a result, the command of the table state inquiry response transmitted from the main control board 16 next time includes the SQN obtained by incrementing the SQN included in the command received from the payout control unit 17. However, the information such as the number of game balls included in the platform state inquiry response is not corrected. This is because the fact that the SQN on the payout control unit side is advancing means that the table state inquiry response transmitted one time ago has reached the payout control unit 17.

  Conversely, the value obtained by adding 1 to the SQN transmitted last time is compared with the SQN included in the command received this time, and if the former is larger, it is judged as SQN abnormality (delivery control unit side delay) and sent last time Calculate the value obtained by adding the data such as the number of gaming balls included in the table status inquiry response and the data such as the number of updated gaming balls thereafter, and include the total value in the table status inquiry response Send. The fact that the SQN on the payout control unit side is delayed means that the table state inquiry response transmitted one time before has not arrived at the payout control unit 17. When transmitting the sum value, the corrected SQN is added.

  On the other hand, when the payout control unit 17 receives the command of the platform state inquiry response from the main control board 16, as shown in FIG. 77, a value obtained by adding 1 to SQN transmitted last time and SQN included in the command received this time Are compared, and if they match, it is determined that the SQN is normal. In this case, the received information (the number of game balls, etc.) is fetched.

  On the other hand, a value obtained by adding 1 to the previously transmitted SQN is compared with the SQN included in the command received this time, and if the latter is larger, it is determined that the SQN is abnormal (advance on the main control board side). In this case, there is a possibility that the payout control unit side has not received from the main control board 16 although there is a stand state inquiry response that has been transmitted one before.

  Conversely, a value obtained by adding 1 to the previously transmitted SQN is compared with the SQN included in the command received this time, and if the former is larger, it is determined that the SQN is abnormal (main control board side delay). In this case, the received stand-state inquiry response is data that has already been received.

  Even if the value obtained by adding +1 to the previously transmitted SQN is smaller or larger, the payout control unit 17 discards the received information and retransmits the command of the table state inquiry request. As a result, when the command of the previous platform status inquiry response from the main control board 16 is not delivered, the platform status inquiry response including the total value including the portion which was not delivered is returned, or If the command of the table status inquiry response sent from the main control board 16 has already been transmitted, the next new table status inquiry response will be returned.

As a result, the payout control unit can receive necessary information without omission.
Next, a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80.

  First, power-on will be described with reference to FIG. When the power is turned on, a command of device information request is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the main control board 16, and after waiting for this command, the main control board 16 sends back a device information response including the main chip ID and the like. Do. The payout control unit 17 transmits various information included in the received device information response to the CU.

  Thereafter, the payout control unit 17 transmits to the main control board 16 a stand state inquiry request in which SQN = 0. In response to this, the table state inquiry request and the table state inquiry response are exchanged while updating the SQN between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16. When the main control board 16 receives a stand state inquiry request of SQN = 0, it returns a stand state inquiry response of game console reset ON. As illustrated, the main control board 16 continues to return a platform state inquiry response of game console reset ON for 30 seconds from the power on only at the cold start. In response to this, the payout control unit 17 notifies the CU of a game reset.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the game will be described. During the game, in response to the table state inquiry request from the payout control unit 17, the main control board 16 finely notifies of changes in the number of award balls in the game and the number of times of symbol determination by a table state inquiry response. The main control board 16 is provided with a predetermined storage area 1 for storing changes such as the number of winning balls in the game, the number of winning, and the number of symbol determinations. The main control board 16 sets data such as the number of winning balls to the number of winnings stored in the storage area 1 in the transmission buffer when transmitting the platform status inquiry response, and also stores those data in another storage area. Backup to 2. Then, at the stage, by clearing the storage area 1, it is possible to newly store the award ball, the winning, and the like that newly occur after that in the storage area 1. Thereafter, data of the set transmission buffer is transmitted as a stand state inquiry response.

  Next, when a platform status query request for which SQN is correct is sent in response to the platform status query response sent, the storage such as the number of prize balls to the number of winning prizes backed up in the storage area 2 is cleared.

  On the other hand, as shown in the figure, when the same machine status inquiry request of SQN = m as the previous time is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 because the machine status inquiry response of SQN = m + 1 is not delivered to the delivery control unit 17 The control board 16 determines that the previously transmitted data has not arrived, and it is necessary to retransmit the data.

  In this case, the main control board 16 stores data such as the number of prize balls to the number of prizes, which has been backed up in the storage area 2, and the prize balls stored in the storage area 1 from the previous command transmission to the present. A total of data such as the number of items to the number of winning items is set in the transmission buffer, and a table state inquiry response based on the set data is returned. As a result, the payout control unit 17 receives various data included in the table status inquiry response which has not been delivered last time, and data such as the number of prize balls to the number of prizes collected by the main control board 16 thereafter. The sum value of is delivered.

  As a result, it is possible to increase the transmission efficiency of the information while retransmitting the information that has not been delivered, although the information can be transmitted reliably.

  Note that various information included in the table status inquiry response transmitted from the main control board 16 in FIG. 79 is included in the operation response transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU. That is, among the command data of the table state inquiry response shown in FIG. 75, information from the number of winning balls to the error state of the game table is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 as a table state inquiry response. It is included in the operation response and sent from the payout control unit 17 to the CU. Specifically, if a winning occurs, the main control board 16 calculates the number of winning balls based on the winning, and the calculation result is included in the platform status inquiry response as the number of winning balls and the payout control unit from the main control board 16 Sent to 17 The payout control unit 17 adds and updates the number of winning balls to the addition ball number counter, and includes the value of the addition ball number counter as the number of addition balls in the operation response at the timing of transmission of the operation response to the CU to the CU Send.

  Therefore, for example, various information included in the table status inquiry response transmitted from the main control board 16 in FIG. 79 during the game corresponds to the operation response shown in FIG. 29 or FIG. It is included and transmitted from P to CU.

  Next, the case of operation mode switching will be described with reference to FIG. When receiving the mode change request from the CU, the payout control unit 17 transmits the mode change request to the main control board 16. The mode change request includes the type of the transition destination mode being requested. When the main control board 16 receives the mode change request, the main control board 16 determines whether the condition for the mode change is satisfied. As shown in the figure, with the condition of mode change, all three conditions of “(1) pattern not changing, (2) not being big hit, (3) not being small hit” are satisfied It is.

  As a result, for example, when the symbol is changing in the variable display device, mode switching is not performed since the condition (1) is not satisfied. In this case, the main control board 16 sends back a mode change response of result = NG to the payout control unit 17 (not shown).

  On the other hand, when the above three conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied, a mode change response indicating that the result is OK is transmitted to the payout control unit 17. Also, the main control board 16 switches to the requested mode. As a result, the operation mode is changed from the CU to the specified one.

  Thereafter, when an operation to switch back to the business mode is performed by the remote control, the CU transmits a mode change request for specifying the business mode to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 receiving this transmits a mode change request to the main control board 16. The main control board 16 again determines the above three conditions, and if all the three conditions are satisfied, it sends back a mode change response of result OK and switches the mode to the business mode.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 96, communication between the payout control unit 17 and the effect control substrate 53 for a display will be described.

  First, communication commands used between the payout control unit 17 and the effect control substrate 53 for a display will be described with reference to FIGS. Between the payout control unit 17 and the effect control substrate 53 for display, one-way communication is made from the payout control 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and from the effect control substrate 53 for display to the payout control 17 No data is entered. For this reason, the communication command used between the delivery control unit and the effect control substrate for display 53 is only the command transmitted from the former to the latter. This command is shown in FIG. 81, "start instruction", "game machine information notification", "current time notification", "card insertion notification", "card return notification", "mode change request" and "card unit not sent" It is seven kinds of commands of "data display request".

  The “start instruction” is a command for notifying the effect control substrate 53 for a display that the power of the payout control unit 17 has been turned on.

  The “notification of gaming machine information” is a command for notifying the effect control substrate 53 for a display of gaming machine information such as the number of gaming balls. The details are shown in FIGS. 82 and 83. In particular, FIG. 83 shows information in which the information provider of the command is CU and the main control board 16 among various information included in the “notification of gaming machine information”. The payout control unit 17 receives the “CU status” and the “card balance” from the CU, and generates data corresponding to each of the gaming machine information notification commands based on the received information. Further, the payout control unit 17 receives "the number of prize balls" and "the data in the other timing state inquiry response" from the main control board 16, and based on the received information, data corresponding to each of the gaming machine information notification commands. Generate

  On the other hand, FIG. 82 shows data in which the payout control unit 17 itself is an information providing source. That is, the payout control unit 17 determines "playing ball total number information", "back ball addition information (addition)", "playing ball launch number information (subtraction)", and "out ball" based on the detection results of various detectors. Pass information "and" game machine error state "are generated, and they are used as respective data of the game machine information notification command.

  The payout control unit 17 transmits the gaming machine information notification command generated in this manner to the effect control board 53 for a display.

  “Current time notification” is a command for notifying the effect control board 53 for a display that a card has been inserted.

  The “card insertion notification” is a command for notifying the effect control substrate for display 53 that the card has been returned. The “card return notification” is a command for notifying the effect control substrate for display 53 that the card has been returned. The details of the “card insertion notification” and the “card return notification” are shown in FIG. For example, "card insertion notification" notifies of the ID of the card inserted in the card unit. Further, the ID of the card stored in the payout control unit 17 is notified by the “card return notification”. As a result, in the effect control substrate for display 53, comparison determination of match / mismatch of cards becomes possible.

  The “mode change request” is a command for requesting the mode change to the effect control board 53 for a display. The details of the “mode change request” are shown in FIG. For example, the data of the mode transition designation designates the type of test mode, maintenance mode, trial hitting mode, and sales mode.

  The “card unit unsent data display request” is a command for requesting the display effect control board 53 to display unsent data that can not be transmitted to the card unit. Details of “card unit unsent data display request” are shown in FIGS. 86 and 87. In particular, FIG. 86 shows data in which the information provider is the payout control unit 17 itself, and FIG. 87 shows data in which the information provider is the main control board 16. That is, the payout control unit 17 generates a “card unit unsent data display request” based on the data generated by itself and the data received from the main control board 16 and sends this to the effect control board 53 for display Send.

  As described in [Note] in FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, when the command for “display request for non-transmission of card unit” is received, the effect control substrate for display 53 has been displayed on the display 54 until then. After the contents of the data are backed up, the contents of this command are displayed on the display 54. Then, if the command received after the next time is a "game machine information notification command", it is determined that the unsent data to the card unit is lost, and the received data of the backup data and the current game machine information notification command Reflect on the display content.

  For example, when a power failure occurs in the CU and the payout control unit 17 can not transmit data to the CU, a command of “card unit unsent data display request” is transmitted to the effect control substrate 53 for display, Thereafter, when the communication between the CU and the payout control unit 17 returns to normal, for example, due to restoration of power failure, unsent data disappears. Then, the command of "card unit non-transmission data display request" is not transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate for display 53, and instead, a "gaming machine information notification command" is transmitted. Based on receiving this command, the effect controller for display 53 determines that the unsent data to the card unit has disappeared. In this case, the display effect control board 53 updates the display content of the display 54 based on the data backed up and the data of the "game machine information notification command" newly received this time.

  Next, a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 and the effect control substrate for display 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 97.

  First, the case of power-on will be described with reference to FIG. This communication sequence is performed in conjunction with the communication sequence of FIG. 78 described above.

  When the power is turned on, the start instruction is transmitted only once, thereby notifying the effect control substrate 53 for display that the power of the payout control unit 17 is turned on. Thereafter, notification of gaming machine information is periodically transmitted. Further, when receiving the communication start request from the CU, the payout control unit 17 transmits a notification of current time to the effect control board 53 for a display. The display effect control board 53 backs up the current date and time included in this command. Thereafter, the gaming machine information notification is repeatedly transmitted. The gaming machine information notification includes data such as the number of gaming balls which changes in accordance with the progress of the game, and the effect control substrate 53 for a display is the number of gaming balls in the display 54 based on the gaming machine information notification. While updating and displaying information, etc., backup the received data each time.

  Next, the case where the card is inserted will be described with reference to FIG. The communication sequence shown in FIG. 89 is performed in conjunction with the communication sequence of FIG. 24 described above.

  First, in a state in which the animation display corresponding to the card not inserted is continued by the effect control substrate 53 for a display, if a card is inserted into the CU, the payout control unit 17 selects gaming machine information ON during card insertion processing. A notification is sent to the effect control board 53 for a display. Receiving this, the presentation effect control board 53 for a display starts an animation display in communication (an animation display to the effect that information such as a ball is being acquired by communication with the server based on the inserted card).

  Thereafter, when the inquiry of the inserted card is completed, the payout control unit 17 transmits a card insertion notice to the effect control board 53 for display. The display effect control board 53 backs up the card ID and type data included in the card insertion notice to the card ID storage unit. Then, in the effect control substrate 53 for a display unit, it is determined whether or not the received card ID matches the previously stored card ID, and when it matches, the future game result is stored in the personal gaming history stored last time Perform processing to be added to the data. On the other hand, when they do not match, the personal gaming history data stored last time is cleared, and the future gaming results are processed as new personal gaming history data.

  In the display effect control board 53 provided with the display effect control portion 292, as described above, the game history data is accumulated and stored in association with the card ID, but separately from the display effect control board 53, Also in the payout control unit 17, the LSI 799 may be provided with a game history data storage unit, and game history data may be accumulated and stored in the game history data storage unit in association with a card ID. Specifically, when storing the card ID received from the card unit 3 in the payout control unit 17, the game history data collected by the game history data management unit 291 provided in the payout control unit 17 is And the game history data storage unit.

  Next, the payout control unit 17 displays gaming machine information notification including ON during addition display (card insertion) indicating that addition display is being performed based on the information specified by the inserted card, and card balance It is transmitted to the effect control board 53 for dexterity. Based on this, the display effect control board 53 performs addition animation display. Thereafter, when the gaming machine information notification including OFF during addition display is received from the payout control unit 17, the effect control board for display 53 terminates the addition animation display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the case of payment (cash insertion) will be described. Here, the case where the card balance is 0 is taken as an example. When 10,000 yen is inserted into the CU while the animation display is being performed continuously by the effect control substrate 53 for display, the payout control unit 17 turns on the payment processing to the effect control substrate 53 for display. , Gaming machine information notification including a card balance of 0 yen is transmitted. Receiving this, the effect controller for display 53 starts an addition animation display for adding the balance. Thereafter, when the deposit process is completed on the CU side, the payout control unit 17 transmits gaming machine information notification of the card balance 10,000 yen to the effect of the deposit process OFF to the effect control board for display 53. In response to this, the effect control board for display 53 terminates the addition animation display and displays the card balance of 10,000 yen.

  Next, the case of the addition request will be described with reference to FIG. The communication sequence shown in FIG. 91 is performed in conjunction with the communication sequence of FIG. 71 already described, and [Note 1] and [Note 2] are the same as FIG.

  As described with reference to FIG. 71, when an addition factor occurs, the CU causes the payout control unit 17 to turn on the “addition display in progress” bit corresponding to the addition factor (such as reservoir replay, prepaid consumption, etc.) The command of the operation instruction for which the addition request has been made is transmitted to the payout control unit 17. At the timing when the payout control unit 17 receives this command, the bit of "displayed in addition" corresponding to the addition factor is turned on in the effect control board for display 53, and the card balance and the game ball number related information are The game machine information notification including is transmitted to the effect control board 53 for a display.

  The effect control board 53 for a display that has received this determines the addition factor (repooling of balls, prepaid consumption), and performs addition animation display according to the determination result. As a result, on the display 54, a display is performed in which the number of game balls is added in accordance with the ball replay or the prepaid consumption. The number of game balls to be added and the number of game balls after the addition are included in the game ball number related information.

  Eventually, when the gaming machine information notification including OFF during addition display is transmitted from the payout control unit 17, the effect control board for display 53 ends the addition animation display.

  Here, referring to FIG. 97, a display example will be described. When the addition factor of the game balls is prepaid lending, display control is performed to cause the display 54 to perform prepaid lending animation display as shown in (A1) to (A3) of FIG. The prepaid lending animation display becomes a display during prepaid lending as in (A2) of FIG. 97 from the display before prepaid lending as in (A1) of FIG. 97, and then prepaid as in (A3) of FIG. It will be displayed after lending. In the display during prepaid lending, the value of the card balance (“balance” in the figure) is gradually converted to the value of the possessed ball (“handled ball” in the figure), and the animation display in which the possessed ball increases Is done. Then, when such animation display is finished, it becomes a display after prepaid lending as shown in (A3) of FIG. As described above, in the prepaid lending animation display, it is specified that the adding factor is the prepaid lending by the display of the card balance value being changed to increase the number of balls.

  Further, when the addition factor of the game ball is the replay lending, display control is performed to cause the display 54 to perform the replay lending animation display as shown in (B1) to (B3) of FIG. From the display before replay lending as shown in (B1) of FIG. 97, the replay play lending animation display becomes a display during replay play as shown in (B2) of FIG. 97, and thereafter, as shown in (B3) of FIG. It becomes a display after such replay lending. In the display during replay lending, the value of the card balance (“balance” in the drawing) is not changed, and animation display is performed in which the number of balls (“balls” in the drawing) gradually increases. Then, when such animation display is finished, it becomes a display after replay play lending as shown in (B3) of FIG. As described above, in the replay lending animation display, it is specified that the additional factor is the replay lending by displaying that the number of balls increases without changing the value of the card balance.

  Next, the case of a subtraction request will be described with reference to FIG. The communication sequence shown in FIG. 92 is performed in conjunction with the communication sequence in FIG. 72 already described, and [Note 1] to [Note 3] are the same as in FIG. Further, in the communication sequence of FIG. 92, “addition” of FIG. 91 is replaced by “subtraction”, and the addition factor of FIG. 91 is replaced by wagon order or ball division as a subtraction factor. That is, when a subtraction factor occurs, the payout control section 17 turns on the “under subtraction display” bit corresponding to the subtraction factor, and transmits the command of the operation instruction for which the subtraction request is made from the CU to the payout control section 17 Be done. At the timing when the payout control unit 17 receives this command, the "subtractive display" bit corresponding to the subtraction factor is turned on to the effect control substrate for display 53, and gaming machine information including gaming ball number related information A notification is sent to the effect control board 53 for a display.

  The display effect control board 53 that has received this determines the subtraction factor (wagon service, ball division), and performs subtraction animation display according to the determination result. The number of game balls to be subtracted and the number of game balls after subtraction are included in the game ball number related information.

  Eventually, when the gaming machine information notification including OFF during subtraction display is transmitted from the payout control unit 17, the effect control board for display 53 ends the subtraction animation display.

  Next, the case of playing a game will be described with reference to FIG. When a big hit occurs, gaming machine information notification including big hit ON and big hit end OFF is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for a display. Receiving this, the presentation effect control board 53 for a display starts an animation display during a big hit. After that, when the big hit ends and the stage of the big hit end is reached, gaming machine information notification including big hit ON and big hit end ON is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control board 53 for display. Receiving this, the effect control board 53 for a display starts an animation display indicating the end of the big hit.

  Eventually, when the big hit end effect ends, the gaming machine information notification including the big hit OFF and the big hit end OFF is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for display. In response to this, the effect control board 53 for display ends the big hit end animation display, and starts the animation display during the game.

  Next, the case of card return will be described with reference to FIG. The communication sequence shown in FIG. 94 is performed in conjunction with the communication sequence of FIG. 31 described above.

  When the CU return button is pressed, the payout control unit 17 stops the firing of the ball and prohibits the game. Further, when floating balls are present as described with reference to FIG. 31, the payout control unit 17 enters a wait period and waits for game completion. Meanwhile, the payout control unit 17 transmits gaming machine information notification including ON during card return processing and OFF during clear display to the effect control substrate for display 53. In addition, when a prize is generated during a wait period (between game prohibition and game completion), a gaming machine information notification including the prize information is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control board 53 for a display. In response to this, the effect controller for display 53 displays the state of the change in the number of winning game balls on the display 54.

  When the floating ball eventually becomes 0 or the timer of the wait period times out, the game is completed. In this case, gaming machine information notification including ON during clear display is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate for display 53. Receiving this, the effect controller for display 53 starts the animation display in the clear display.

  As described with reference to FIG. 31, in response to the clear request from the CU, an operation response of clear rejection OFF is returned from the P unit to the CU, and a card return request is transmitted from the CU to the P unit. In response to this, the P delivery control units 17 return a card return response to the CU (see FIG. 31), and transmit a card return notification to the effect control board 53 for a display. In response to the card return notification, the display effect control board 53 starts displaying the card return animation.

  After that, when the card is ejected on the CU side, the memory of the card ID and its type is cleared, and then, as shown in FIG. An operation instruction including is sent. Receiving this, the P payout control units 17 transmit gaming machine information notifications including clear display OFF and card return processing OFF to the effect control substrate 53 for a display. Receiving this, the presentation effect control board 53 for a display starts an animation display while waiting for a customer.

  However, as described in [Note], after the card is returned, that is, even when the customer waiting animation display is started, C-ID backed up by the presentation control substrate 53 for display when the card is inserted Do not delete the type, keep it in memory. For this reason, when a card is inserted next time, the effect control board for a display 53 may perform the match determination between the card inserted this time and the card inserted last time based on the stored data. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the case where there is unsent data to the CU will be described. For example, during a game, if a failure occurs such as power-off of the CU before the transmission of the number of gaming balls from the payout control unit 17 is completed, the payout control unit 17 accurately counts the number of game balls immediately before power-off. Even though the memory etc. is stored, the memory of the CU is not reflected in the memory itself. In such a case, unsent data to the CU will be present.

  At normal times, the game ball number related information such as the number of game balls which fluctuates according to the progress of the game is periodically transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU and is also transmitted to the effect control board 53 for display. As shown in FIG. 95, the game ball number related information is periodically transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for display as gaming machine information notification, and the effect control substrate 53 for display It is backed up as received data.

  However, if a communication error or a power failure occurs in the card unit, the payout control unit 17 can not transmit the newly generated game ball number information to the CU. In this case, the payout control unit 17 determines that communication with the CU is impossible. Then, the payout control unit 17 repeatedly transmits the command of the CU non-transmission data display request to the effect control substrate 53 for display, not the gaming machine information notification. The command of the CU non-transmission data display request includes information on a gaming machine error state in addition to the game ball number related information which is non-transmission data. In the unsent data, as shown in FIG. 86, "game ball total number information", "back ball addition information (addition)", "game ball firing number information (subtraction)", "out ball passage information", " The game ball number acquisition number information, "design fixed number of times 1 and 2", "starting openings 1 to 3", "big winning openings 1 and 2", and "winning openings 1 to 4" are included. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the gaming machine error state includes an error generating device (card unit, main control board 16, payout control unit 17) and an error number in the device.

  When receiving the CU non-transmission data display request, the effect control substrate for display 53 backs up the currently displayed gaming machine information. The gaming machine information includes the number of game balls, the balance, the number of balls, the number of winnings displayed as the game history, the number of times the variable display device has been started, and the like.

  The display effect control board 53 backs up the gaming machine information and then displays the received unsent data. The data to be displayed includes a gaming machine error state (error number or the like) included in the CU unsent data display request. Hereinafter, the CU unsent data display request is repeatedly transmitted until the failure is recovered. The display effect control board 53 continues to display the unsent data until the failure is recovered and the notification of the gaming machine information is transmitted instead of the CU unsent data display request.

  When the communication error or the power failure of the CU is recovered soon, the unsent data is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU as an operation response. As a result, the unsent data does not exist, and the payout control unit 17 transmits the gaming machine information notification to the effect control board 53 for display instead of the CU unsent data display request. When the type of the reception command is switched in this way, the effect control board for a display 53 determines that the failure has been recovered and there is no unsent data. Then, for the backup data of the gaming machine information backed up when starting the display of the unsent data, the effect control board 53 for a display, the unsent data displayed so far and the newly transmitted game A display 54 that displays the game ball number related information included in the machine information notification is displayed as the game machine information.

  The way of reflecting depends on the type of information included in the gaming machine information notification. As described in the lower part of FIG. 95, among the information of the (a) gaming machine information notification, the one representing the accumulated value so far, the game transmitted first when the failure of the card unit is recovered. The information itself contained in the machine information notification is displayed on the display 54 as gaming machine information. For example, game ball total number information etc. correspond to this.

  On the other hand, with regard to (b) information of the gaming machine information notification that represents the updated value each time, information included in the gaming machine information notification that has been transmitted first when the failure of the card unit is recovered. The sum of the backup data and the unsent data is displayed on the display 54 as gaming machine information. For example, the game ball acquisition number information, the number of times of symbol determination, etc. correspond to this.

  As a result, after recovery from a failure, the display 54 can display accurate gaming machine information. In addition to the unsent data, the display 54 may also display data backed up before displaying the unsent data.

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 95, when receiving the CU non-transmission data display request, the effect control substrate for display 53 backs up the currently displayed gaming machine information. Therefore, the display contents can be updated using the backup data after recovery from the failure. In addition to displaying unsent data, backup data may also be displayed.

  Next, the case of operation mode switching will be described with reference to FIG. The communication sequence shown in FIG. 96 is performed in conjunction with the communication sequence of FIG. 73 and FIG. 80 described above.

  In the sales mode, the effect control board for display 53 displays a screen in the sales mode. For example, when the player is playing a game, the number of balls played by the player is displayed, and when waiting for a customer, a demonstration screen for waiting for a customer is displayed.

  As described with reference to FIG. 73, the payout control unit 17 receives a mode change request from the CU, and determines that the main control board 16 changes the mode when it is determined that the conditions for switching the mode are satisfied. To request. Then, when the mode change response of the result OK is received from the main control board 16, as shown in FIG. 96, a mode change request is transmitted to the effect control board 53 for a display. The display effect control board 53 switches the operation mode in accordance with the transition destination mode included in the mode change request. Specifically, display according to the operation mode designated from the card unit is performed.

  Thereafter, a mode change request for requesting a change to the business mode is transmitted from the card unit to the payout control unit 17, and a mode change request is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for display. Then, the effect control substrate for display 53 switches the operation mode to the business mode, and displays the screen in the business mode.

  Next, management of security related information in the upper server 801 and the card unit (CU) 3 will be described.

  The security related information includes, for example, authentication operation specification information including setting information such as at least a base abnormality detection setting value, a game machine test mode setting value, and a subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value. As described above, the security related information includes predetermined setting information including threshold data for determining whether or not the numerical value of the gaming information generated when the gaming machine is in operation. Further, such security-related information includes numerical data indicating the version number of information for the entire security-related information. Data indicating the version number of such information is updated (for example, addition update of numerical data of version number) when any one of the security related information as described above is changed. In addition, the data of the version number of such information is not limited to the case where it is set as the whole of security related information, and authentication including a base abnormality detection set value, a game machine test mode set value, and a subtraction ball abnormality detection set value. Each data of the operation specification information may be individually set and updated. Such security-related information is stored in a security-related information storage unit provided in each of the upper server 801, CU3, and P unit 2.

  As such security related information, standard setting information is preset as default data (data of “initial value” of various information to be described later), and a predetermined input operation such as a keyboard provided in the upper server 801 In the means, the manager of the game arcade can change (update) the data by manually inputting the data. Therefore, when no change operation is performed on the security related information in the upper server 801, the security related information is set to data of "initial value". In the case where the security related information is manually input in the upper server 801, for example, manually inputting each gaming machine for each gaming machine in the game arcade or inputting and setting a unified threshold for each model It is possible. In the upper server 801, security related information may be acquired and used as follows. When the machine type information of the gaming machine and the setting information of the security related information are associated in advance, that is, when the model information and the setting information of the security related information correspond on a one-to-one basis, the setting information is input The model information is downloaded to the upper server 801 from a server higher than the upper server 801 to be set, and the upper model server 801 stores the downloaded model information so that the security is one-to-one corresponding to the model information. The upper information server 801 may select and store the related information, and use the security related information. In addition, such security related information can be automatically changed (updated) to predetermined data at predetermined timing (for example, periodic timing) without manual input. You may do so.

  The base abnormality detection setting value is data for setting the presence / absence of the base abnormality detection when detecting an abnormal state of the base in the CU 3 or P base 2 and its constant (threshold). The base abnormality detection set value includes a low base time threshold used as a base abnormality detection set value in a low base state and a high base time threshold used as a base abnormality detection set value in a high base state.

  The low base threshold value has a set value in the range of 0 to 100% and an initial value of 30%. Such a low base threshold indicates “no detection” when it is set to 0%, and “detected” when it is set to other than 0%. Thus, base abnormality detection is performed using the set low base threshold value when the low base threshold is other than 0%, and base abnormality using the low base threshold when the low base threshold is 0%. Detection is not performed.

  The high base threshold value has a set value in the range of 0 to 150% and an initial value of 120%. Such a high base time threshold indicates "not detected" when it is set to 0%, and indicates "detected" if it is set to other than 0%. Thus, base abnormality detection using the set high base threshold is performed when the high base threshold is other than 0%, and base abnormality using the high base threshold when the high base threshold is 0%. Detection is not performed.

  The gaming machine test mode setting value is data for setting the presence or absence of a trial operation mode such as gaming machine nail adjustment. In the game machine test mode set value, "test game mode present" or "test game mode not present" is indicated, and the initial value is "test game mode not present".

  The subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value sets the presence / absence of detection of an abnormal state of the number of subtraction balls (number of balls subtracted from the number of game balls based on the emission detection signal) in CU3 or P platform 2 and its constant (threshold) It is data to do. The abnormal state of the subtraction ball set here is detected based on the occurrence of winning of the game ball continuously for the set number of balls despite the fact that the game ball is not fired. The threshold value of the subtraction ball abnormality detection set value is data for setting the number of winning balls in which the continuous winning is determined to be an abnormal state of the number of subtraction balls. The set value of the subtraction ball abnormality detection set value is in the range of 0 to 99 balls, and the initial value is 5 balls. Such a subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value indicates "detection absent" when it is set to 0 ball, and indicates "detection present" when it is set to other than 0 ball. Thereby, when the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is other than 0 ball, subtraction ball abnormality detection is performed using the set subtraction ball number threshold value, and when the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is 0 ball, subtraction ball abnormality Detection is not performed.

  Such security related information is, for example, at the time of establishment of communication between the upper server 801 and CU3 (communication connection establishment), and at a predetermined timing such as at the time of setting value change of security related information Is sent to the P platform 2. However, the version numbers of the security related information are managed by the upper server 801, CU3 and P2. When the CU 3 and the P unit 2 hold (store) information of the same version number as the upper server 801 at the predetermined timing, transmission of security related information is not performed.

  Next, a specific example of security related information processing for managing security related information in the upper servers 801, CU3 and P2 will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing processing relating to security related information in the upper server 801 and CU3. In FIG. 98, (A) shows security related information management processing as processing executed on the upper server 801 side, and (B) shows security related processing as processing executed on the CU3 side (main control unit 323). Information setting processing is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 98A, at the time of establishment of a communication connection establishment state between upper server 801 and CU 3 in upper server 801 (for example, change of setting of security related information is required to be completed in S713 described later). It is determined whether or not it is during a predetermined short-term period after the start of communication establishment, such as a time obtained by adding a predetermined margin to a standard time (S701). In this case, when the establishment state of the communication connection starts, the upper server 801 is always in operation, CU3 is powered on before business hours starts, and CU3 is powered as in the case where power is shut off after business hours. It means that the establishment state of the communication connection between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 due to the input is started. When it is in the establishment start state of the communication connection, the process proceeds to S703 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the establishment start state of the communication connection, it is judged whether it is time to change the setting of the security related information in the online state (S702). At the time of setting change of security related information, for example, the setting of any data of the base abnormality detection set value, the game machine test mode set value, and the subtraction ball abnormality detection set value as described above is manually performed (for example, After the security related information management process is executed after the manual change by the operation input of the clerk). Specifically, when the upper server 801 and CU3 are online and the setting of security related information is changed, a predetermined change flag is set, and in S702, when such a change flag is set. It is determined that the setting of security related information is changed. Further, such a change flag is reset when it is confirmed that the setting change of the security related information has been made also in the CU 3 and the P unit 2 according to the setting change of the security related information in the upper server 801. In addition, such a change flag is not set when the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are online and the setting of the security related information is changed. That is because when the upper server 801 and the CU3 are in the offline state, even if the setting of the security related information is changed by the upper server 801, the changed security related information can not be immediately transmitted to the CU3. At the start of the establishment state of the communication connection when the power is turned on, it is possible to transmit the security related information after the change to the CU 3 by proceeding from S 701 to the processing of S 703 and later described later.

  The upper server 801 changes the setting of the security related information when the communication status with the CU3 which is the setting target of the security related information is offline and when the communication status with the CU3 which is the setting target of the security related information is online It is possible to execute in either case. However, when the communication status between the upper server 801 and CU3 is online, the security related information after the setting change can be immediately transmitted to CU3, but when the communication status is offline, the setting is made. The changed security related information can not be immediately sent to CU3. In this embodiment, in S702, when the communication state with the CU 3 which is the setting target of the security related information is online, it is determined whether or not the setting change of the security related information has been made.

  Note that the change flag is set and held when the setting change of security related information is done while the upper server 801 and CU3 are offline, and after turning on the power of CU3 next time, bypass S701 and go to S702. It is judged that it is time to change the setting of related information (it is judged that it is time to change the setting of security related information if the change flag is set), and the same as when security related information is changed immediately in online state. By performing the processing, the security related information after the change may be able to be transmitted to the CU 3 after the next power-on of the CU 3. Further, in the upper server 801, the setting change of the security related information may be executable only when the communication state with the CU 3 which is the setting target of the security related information is online. Further, the setting change of the security related information may be executable only when the communication state with the CU 3 which is the setting target of the security related information is offline.

  The setting change of the security related information may be changed by the following method other than the change by the manual operation input as described above. Automatic setting change such that the upper server 801 sets data corresponding to the model of the P-unit 2 to which the CU 3 is connected among the plurality of setting data stored by itself based on the received gaming machine information May be performed. In addition, CU3 is connected by the upper server 801 performing data communication with an external server (for example, a server provided at a game machine maker) provided outside the game arcade based on the received game table information. Setting data corresponding to the P model may be downloaded, and automatic setting change may be performed based on the setting data.

  If it is determined that the setting of the security related information is not changed at S702, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S702 that the setting of the security related information is changed, the process proceeds to S703. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting of security related information is not changed at S702, that is, when the condition of S702 is not met, ie, when the setting of security related information is not changed. The process ends because it is not necessary to transmit data related to the setting change of the security related information to CU3.

  In S703, it is determined whether the first security related information version number request command has not been sent (S703). Here, the first security related information version number request command is a command for requesting a response of data of the version number of the security related information stored in the CU 3 and the P-unit 2. Specifically, in step S703, it is determined whether the first security related information version number request command has not been sent to CU3 in the state where it is determined that it is the transmission timing of the security related information in step S701 or S702. . Whether or not the first security related information version number request command has been sent to CU3 is determined based on whether a version number requested flag described later is set. When the first security related information version number request command is transmitted to CU3, as described later, the first security related information version number request command is transmitted from CU3 as a second security related information version number request command. It is sent to platform 2. Here, even for commands of the same content, those sent from the upper server 801 are called “first”, and those sent from the CU 3 are called “second”.

  If it is determined in S703 that the first security related information version number request command has not been sent, processing for sending the first security related information version number request command to CU3 is performed (S704), and the processing is ended. Do. The transmission in S704 is performed only once, and as described above, the CU 3 that has received the first security related information version number request command transmits it to the P-unit 2 as a second security related information version number request command. When the first security related information version number request command is transmitted once in S704, the version number requested flag described above is reset. On the other hand, when it is determined in S703 that the security related information version number request command is not sent yet, it is determined whether it is time to receive the security related information version number response from CU3 (S705). Here, with the security related information version number response, the response in which the CU3 returns data of the version number of the security related information stored in the CU3, and the security related information in which the P base 2 is stored in the P base 2 It is a response that returns data of the version number of information via CU3. Specifically, in S705, after it is determined that the security related information version number request command has already been transmitted in S703, the security related information version number response from CU3 or the security related information version number response from P unit 2 is CU3. It is determined whether it is the timing received via the route. The security related information version number response is first returned from the CU3 to the upper server 801, and thereafter the security related information version number response from the P-unit 2 is returned to the upper server 801 via the CU3.

  If it is determined in S705 that the security related information version number response has not been received, the process proceeds to S709 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S 705 that the security related information version response is received, the version specified by the received security related information version response and the version stored and managed by the upper server 801 The numbers are compared (checked) and it is determined whether they match (S706). In the upper server 801, when the security related information as described above is changed, data indicating the version number is updated. On the other hand, in CU 3 and P base 2, when security related information from the upper server 801 is received, version number data included in the information is stored and managed as updated version number data.

  When it is determined in S706 that the version numbers match, the security related information stored in CU3 and P2 is the appropriate information, and the security related information is newly transmitted to CU3 and P2 The process ends because there is no need. On the other hand, when it is determined in S706 that the version numbers do not match, the security related information stored in CU3 or P unit 2 is improper information, and is stored in CU 3 or P unit 2 Since it is necessary to change (update) the security related information to the latest information stored and held in the upper server 801, processing for transmitting the latest first security related information to the CU 3 is performed (S707). End the process. The CU 3 that has received the first security related information transmits it to the P-unit 2 as second security related information.

  As described above, when the version numbers of the security related information do not match in S706, when the security related information is changed in the upper server 801 when the power of at least one of CU3 and P unit 2 is on, CU3 and When security related information is changed in the upper server 801 when at least one power of P unit 2 is off, replacement of the off state is performed when at least one power of CU 3 and P unit 2 is off Etc. When the CU side device or P base side device is replaced, and at least one of CU3 and P base 2 is in the ON state, incorrect security related information is stored in the ON state due to a communication failure. And noise when the power of at least one of CU3 and P2 is on Security-related information stored in the way of the on-state are included such as when changes to incorrect information by. Here, when at least one of CU3 and P unit 2 is replaced, the security related information stored in CU3 or P unit 2 before replacement and the security stored in CU3 or P unit 2 after replacement The version number may be different from related information. Therefore, even when such a device exchange is performed, the version numbers of the security related information stored in the upper server 801 and the CU3 or P unit 2 may not match, and thus the upper server 801 and CU3 or It is necessary to make the security related information stored in P unit 2 coincide with each other.

  Next, timing of response waiting time is started (S 708). Here, the response waiting time is the response from the CU 3 to the transmission of the first security related information (security related information for CU) from the time when the first security related information (CU related security related information) is transmitted (security related information setting described later) Response from response time from P unit 2 to CU3 in response to the transmission of the information from the time until the response is received or the second time security related information (security related information for P unit) is sent This is the time until the (security related information setting response described later) is received, is clocked by a predetermined software timer process, and times out when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  When transmission of security related information occurs, for example, when CU3 and P unit 2 are operating normally and the communication state between CU3 and P unit 2 and the upper server 801 is normal, for example, for a predetermined time for response waiting time-out to time out. The standard time required from when the security related information setting response is received to the time when the predetermined margin is set is set. That is, the predetermined time for response waiting time to timeout is set to a time when it is acceptable to recognize that the communication state between CU3 and P2 and the upper server 801 is normal and CU3 and P2 are operating normally. It is done.

  In S709, it is determined whether or not the response waiting time is not waiting for the response waiting time as a state waiting for reception of the security related information setting response from CU3 or via P3 via CU3 without timeout. S 709). If not waiting for a response, the process ends. On the other hand, when in the response waiting state, it is determined whether the security related information setting response has been received from the CU 3 or from the P platform 2 via the CU 3 (S 710).

  If it is determined in S710 that the security related information setting response has been received, it is determined whether or not the security related information setting response is the first reception, and in the case of the first time the process ends, while in the second case. Ends the response waiting state (S713), and the process ends. If it is the second time, counting of the response waiting time is ended in S713. On the other hand, when it is determined in S710 that the security related information setting response has not been received, it is determined in S708 whether the response waiting time for which clocking has been started has timed out after the predetermined time has elapsed (S711) . If it is determined in S711 that the timeout has not occurred, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S711 that a timeout has occurred, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the information communication, and processing for blocking communication between the upper server 801 and CU3 is performed (S712), and a response is made in S713. End the wait state.

  The process of checking the version numbers of the security related information as described above and transmitting the security related information to the CU 3 when there is a mismatch is a periodic timing other than the timing determined in the above-described S701 and S702. The predetermined period after the transition from the low base state to the high base state, the predetermined period after the transition from the high base state to the low base state, and a predetermined period when the jackpot gaming state occurs As described above, it may be executed at the timing when the gaming state changes, or may be executed at all times.

  Further, it is determined whether the above-mentioned S701 is the establishment of the communication connection to the network in the game arcade when the power of the upper server 801 is turned on, and the process proceeds to S703 when the establishment is established, and the communication connection is established. After that, it may be determined in S702 whether or not the setting of the security related information has been changed. In that case, the above-mentioned change flag is set when there is a setting change of security related information regardless of whether or not the setting between security related information is online between the upper server 801 and CU3 at the time of setting change of the security related information. When the change flag is set, the process may proceed from S702 to S703.

  Also, when power is always on in each of the upper servers 801 and CU3, and in a constantly on / off state between them, communication connection between the upper server 801 and CU3 except when an abnormal state such as a power failure occurs. Is always established, so when security related information is changed and set in the upper server 801, the process always proceeds from S702 to S703.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98 (B), CU3 determines whether or not it is at the time of reception of the first security related information version number request command from higher order server 801 in the security related information setting process (see FIG. S751). If it is determined that it is not the time of reception of the first security related information version number request command in S751, the process proceeds to S755 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S751 that the first security related information version number request command is received, the version number data of the security related information stored in the security related information storage unit in CU3 is checked (S753), Processing for transmitting a security related information setting response as a response for identifying the confirmed version number data to the upper server 801 is performed (S754), and the control proceeds to S759.

  On the other hand, in S755, it is determined whether it is time to receive the first security related information transmitted from the upper server 801 in S707 described above. If it is determined that it is not the time of reception of the first security related information, control proceeds to S759. If it is determined that the first security related information has been received, it is determined whether the security related information has already been updated in the CU 3 (S756). If the security related information received in S755 is the first one, it means that the security related information has not been updated in CU3 yet, and the received first security related information is the security related information in CU3. The information is stored (updated) in the storage unit (S757). Thereby, the first security related information transmitted from the upper server 801 is stored and held in CU3. Then, the security related information setting response is transmitted to the upper server 801 as a response to the upper server 801 in response to storing the first security related information (S758).

  On the other hand, if the first security related information has already been updated in CU3, a determination of YES is made in S756, the control proceeds to S759, and the anti-P security related information processing is executed. In the present embodiment, the base monitoring process is executed not only in CU3 but also in P unit 2 (see FIGS. 101 and 102).

  Due to that, it is necessary to store (update storage) not only CU3 but also the P-unit 2 security related information transmitted from the upper server 801. Therefore, the anti-P security related information processing in this S759 is executed.

  In addition, in order to determine whether or not the security related information stored in the upper server 801 and CU3 and P base 2 is different, data of the version number of the security related information from CU3 or P base 2 to CU3 The example of receiving the transmission of and comparing whether or not the version numbers match is shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the transmission of the setting value data of the security related information from CU3 or P platform 2 via CU3 Whether or not the set value data match may be compared. In this way, when CU3 or P unit 2 is replaced, P unit 2 of a different model is connected to CU3 and the setting value data of security related information is different, but the version number of security related information When the data happens to coincide with the version number data of the security related information stored in the upper server 801, it is possible to prevent the abnormality detection from being performed with the wrong setting value.

  Next, the specific control contents of the security-related information processing with respect to P units in S759 will be described based on FIG. First, the main control unit 323 of the CU 3 determines whether it is time to receive the first security related information version number request command (S 760). When the first security related information version number request command is not transmitted from the upper server 801, the control proceeds to S761 and it is determined whether it is time to receive the security related information version number response or not. When the security related information version number response has not been sent, it is determined whether or not the first security related information is received in S762, and when the first security related information is not sent from the upper server 801, S763. Thus, it is judged whether or not the security related information setting response has been received, and when the security related information setting response has not been sent from the P-base 2, this processing ends.

  If the first security related information version number request command is transmitted from the upper server 801 while repeatedly executing the processes of S760 → S761 → S762 → S763, as described above, the determination of YES is made in S751. After the processing of steps S753 and S754 is performed, the control proceeds to step S759. Then, a determination of YES is made by this S760, and a process of transmitting the received first security related information version number request command to the P-unit 2 as a second security related information version number request command is performed (S764). This second security related information version number request command is received and determined in S770 in the P-unit security related information setting process shown in FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 100, this P-unit security related information setting process is a process executed by payout control unit 17 of P-unit 2 and the second security-related information version number request command in S764 described above is P-unit 2 If it is transmitted to the terminal, a determination of YES is made by this S770. Then, processing for confirming version number data of security related information is performed (S772). Processing for transmitting a security related information setting response as a response for specifying the confirmed version number data to the CU 3 is performed (S773), and the processing ends.

  If the security related information response in S773 is sent to CU3, a determination of YES is made in S761 of FIG. 99, and the main control unit 323 in CU3 sends the received security related information version number response to the upper server 801. Perform the process.

  The upper server 801 having received this security related information version number response makes a determination of YES in the above-described S705, executes the processing of S706 and S707, and transmits the necessary first security related information to the CU3. Be In the main control unit 323 of CU3 that has received it, a determination of YES is made in S755, a determination of YES is made in S756, the process proceeds to S759, a determination of YES is made in S762 of FIG. 99, and the received first security A process of transmitting the related information to the P-unit 2 as the second security related information is performed (S766).

  The payout control unit 17 of the P-unit 2 having received the second security related information makes a determination of YES in S771 of FIG. 100, and performs processing of storing (updating and storing) the received security related information (S774). Then, the security related information setting response is transmitted to the CU 3 (S775).

  The main control unit 323 of the CU 3 having received the security related information setting response makes a determination of YES in S 763 of FIG. 99 and performs processing of transmitting the received security related information setting response to the upper server 801 (S 767) . The upper server 801 having received this makes a judgment of YES in the above-mentioned S710, and executes the process of ending the response waiting state in S713.

  Next, a base monitoring process executed by the CU 3 (main control unit 323) to monitor the base on the basis of the security related information stored (held) in the CU 3 as described above will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the base monitoring process performed by CU3. The base monitoring process is executed in a state other than the jackpot gaming state.

  In the base monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball shot number information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 has been received (S801). When it is determined that the game ball launch number information has been received, data of the launch number counted by the launch information number counter in CU 3 is added and updated based on the received game ball launch number information (S802), S803 Go to On the other hand, if it is determined that the shipping number information has not been received, the processing proceeds to step S803 without updating the data of the number of launchings. As a result, in the CU 3, it is possible to count and manage the number of shots.

  In S803, it is determined whether the game ball acquisition number information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 has been received (S803). When it is determined that the game ball acquisition number information is received, the data of the acquisition number counted by the acquisition number counter in CU 3 is added and updated based on the received game ball acquisition number information (S 804), and S 805. move on. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball obtained number information is not received, the process proceeds to S 805 without updating and updating the obtained number data. As a result, in CU 3, it is possible to count and manage the acquired number.

  In S805, it is determined whether or not a predetermined base calculation timing has come (S805). In CU3, for example, in order to perform processing to calculate a base each time a predetermined time such as one minute elapses, an elapsed time is counted using a predetermined software timer after the card is inserted in CU3, and the timer is determined Every time the time (for example, one minute) is counted and timed out, it is determined in S805 that the base calculation timing has come.

  If it is determined in S805 that the base calculation timing has not come, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S805 that the base calculation timing has come, a process of calculating the base is performed based on the number of shots counted in S802 and the number obtained in S804 (S806). Specifically, in step S806, the base is calculated by performing an operation using an arithmetic expression such as “acquired number / projected number × 100” (%).

  Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the low base state (S807). In S807, the current gaming state is in the high base state, for example, based on the information on whether the high base is in the high base specified by the data of "playing state 2" transmitted from P unit 2 and received. It is determined whether there is any.

  When it is determined in S807 that the high base state is not set, that is, the low base state, the low base threshold among the security related information stored in the security related information storage unit in CU3 is set as the base abnormality detection setting value. The setting is made (S808), and the process proceeds to S810. On the other hand, when it is determined in S807 that the high base state is set, the high base threshold is set as the base abnormality detection setting value among the security related information stored in the security related information storage unit in CU3 (S809), Go to S810.

  In step S810, it is determined whether the base value calculated in step S806 is equal to or greater than the base abnormality detection setting value set in accordance with whether the high base state is determined in step S808 or S809. If it is determined in S810 that the value is not the base abnormality detection set value or more, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S810 that the value is equal to or greater than the base abnormality detection setting value, an error notification is issued in the display unit 312 to notify that the base has an abnormality. The upper server 801 is notified of the error information for which the abnormal state is specified (S812). Then, if it is determined that the result of base abnormality monitoring in P platform 2 is abnormal, an error notification is sent to the CU in S832 described later, and the main control unit 323 of CU 3 having received it notifies P in S813. It is determined that there has been an error notification from the platform, and the upper server 801 is notified of error information (P platform error notification) specifying that an abnormality has occurred in the base in the P platform (S 814), and the process ends. . In addition, as an error notification, instead of or in addition to that performed by the display unit 312, the abnormality notification lamp provided in the CU 3 is turned on (or blinks), or an abnormality notification is performed by voice from a speaker. You may make it In addition, such display, light emission, and notification by sound may be performed by a display, a lamp, and a speaker provided on the upper server 801, and a display (for example, a display provided on the P platform 2) , Etc.), a lamp, and a speaker. In addition, this error notification is not notified where a player such as the card unit 3 or the pachinko machine 2 can check, and an error notification is provided where a manager or an attendant of the game arcade can recognize only. It is also good. This error notification is not an error notification due to the fact that the fraud has been properly performed, but is an error notification of the determination result that there is a possibility that an abnormality due to the fraud has occurred. When an error notification is issued, a player who has not made any fraud acts as if it is treated as a fraud, and in order to prevent such a disadvantage, an error notification is made at a place where the player can not confirm it. Good to do.

  Next, P base monitoring processing will be described based on FIG. The payout control unit 17 of the P platform 2 determines whether or not there is a detection of the launch ball (S820), and the control proceeds to S822 if there is no detection of the launch ball. If it is input to the payout control unit 17, a determination of YES is made in S820, and addition processing of the number of fired balls is performed (S821).

  Further, it is judged whether or not the addition ball has been received from the main control board 16 (S822), and when the addition ball has been received, the addition processing of the acquired number is performed (S823). Furthermore, the payout control unit 17 determines whether or not there is a detection of a foul ball (S 824), and when a detection signal of a far ball is input from the far ball detection switch 33, the determination of YES is made in S 824, Addition processing is performed (S823). And control after S825 is performed. The processes of S825 to S832 are the same as the processes of S805 to S812 of FIG. 101 described above. However, in S832, the error notification destination is CU3 in comparison with S812. This point is the only difference.

  As error information notified by S812 and S814, occurrence date and time, error code (data of large classification), error information (data of small classification), BB serial number, main control chip information (main chip ID), and payout Control chip information (delivery chip ID) is included. As error information notified by S 832, occurrence date and time, error code (data of large classification), error information (data of small classification), main control chip information (main chip ID), and payout control chip information (disbursement chip) ID is included. Here, the error code is information indicating a large classification error code in the case where the type of error is roughly classified according to a predetermined classification standard. Further, the error information is information indicating an error code of the small classification when the large classification error code is finely classified according to a predetermined classification standard.

  As described above, when it is determined that the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the P-unit 2 is incorrect, the error information for specifying the type of the error corresponding to the game information determined to be improper is from CU3 In order to be transmitted to the upper server 801, the upper server 801 can grasp the type of error that has occurred.

  As the base calculation timing in S805 and S825 and the abnormality detection timing in S810 and S830, respectively, instead of the periodic timing as described above, it is high for a predetermined period after transition from the low base state to the high base state. It may be set to the timing when the gaming state changes, such as a predetermined period after transition from the base state to the low base state, and a predetermined period when the big hit gaming state is entered, and the base monitoring The base may always be calculated when the process is performed.

  In addition, CU3 (main control unit 323) and P stand 2 (disbursement control unit 17) also execute subtraction ball monitoring processing to monitor subtraction balls based on the security related information stored (held) in CU3 and P stand 2. Be done. In the subtraction ball monitoring process by CU3, it is recognized based on the game ball shot number information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 whether or not the shot ball is in a state, and the payout control is performed in the state determined that there is no shot ball. Recognizes the winning balls detected based on the winning information (starting openings 1 to 3, large winning openings 1 and 2, winning openings 1 to 4) transmitted from the section 17, and the winning balls are stored (held in CU3) When it is determined that the winning is continuously made more than the set value (for example, 5 balls) of the number of winning balls relating to the subtraction abnormality included in the security related information), it is determined that the number of balls is abnormal. In the subtraction ball monitoring process in the P stand 2, the payout control unit 17 recognizes whether or not the firing ball is present based on the game ball firing number information, and it is determined that the firing ball is not present, the winning information Recognized winning balls detected on the basis of (starting openings 1 to 3, large winning openings 1 and 2, winning openings 1 to 4), security related information stored (held) in P stand 2 concerned winning balls When it is determined that winning has been made continuously for at least the set value (for example, 5 balls) of the number of prize balls related to the subtraction abnormality included in, it is determined that an abnormality of the number of subtraction balls has occurred.

  Then, when it is determined that a subtraction ball abnormality has occurred, as in the case of the base abnormality described above, an error notification for specifying the abnormal condition and an error notification are performed.

  In addition to the base abnormality and the subtraction ball abnormality described above, the following security related information is stored in each of the upper server 801, the card unit (CU) 3 and the P unit 2, and the base abnormality as described above and Similar to the subtraction ball abnormality, the transmission process of the set value and the error monitoring process may be executed.

  A ball that is judged to be an abnormality in the number of balls when the difference between the number of balls stored in CU3 and the number of balls stored in P platform 2 becomes equal to or greater than a set value (for example, 1 ball) A number anomaly may be used as the security related information.

  Winning information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU 3 (starting openings 1 to 3, large winning openings 1, 2) in a state where there is no winning count based on the gaming ball acquisition number information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU 3 Alternatively, an addition ball abnormality may be used as the security related information in which it is determined that the CU 3 is an abnormality of the addition ball when a prize ball is detected based on the winning openings 1 to 4). In addition, in a state where the payout control unit 17 does not have a winning count on the basis of the gaming ball earning number information, the winning balls are on the basis of the winning information (starting openings 1 to 3, large winning openings 1, 2 and winning openings 1 to 4). An addition ball abnormality that is determined to be an abnormality of the addition ball when the P-unit 2 is detected may be used as the security related information.

  Based on the game ball acquisition number information and the game ball launch number information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to CU3, it is determined that CU3 is abnormal when the number of balls stored in CU3 becomes a negative value A negative ball abnormality may be used as the security related information. In addition, the payout control unit 17 determines that the P base 2 is abnormal when the number of balls stored in the P base 2 becomes a negative value based on the game ball obtained number information and the game ball released number information. Negative ball abnormality may be used as the security related information.

  The number of winning balls per unit time is equal to or greater than the set value based on the winning information (starting openings 1 to 3, large winning openings 1 and 2, winning openings 1 to 4) transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to CU3. The unit time prize ball number abnormality that determines that the CU 3 is abnormal may be managed as the security related information, and the payout control unit 17 may also control the winning information (starting openings 1 to 3, large winning openings 1, 2) The unit time prize ball number abnormality which is judged to be abnormal when the number of prize balls per unit time becomes the set value or more based on the prize openings 1 to 4) is managed as the security related information You may In that case, the first set value (for example, 50 balls / 1 minute) for the big hit gaming state and the second set value for the non-big hit gaming state (for example, 10 balls / 1 minute) as set values. It should be divided and managed.

  When the difference between the number of inserted balls transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU 3 and the number of collected balls is equal to or greater than the set value, a drop number abnormality determined that the CU 3 is abnormal is used as the security related information. In addition, when the payout control unit 17 determines that the difference between the number of inserted balls and the number of collected balls is equal to or more than the set value, the above-mentioned security-related matter is the number-of-balls abnormality judged that the P base 2 is abnormal. You may use as information.

  When the number of big hit average starts as the average number of starts (number of fluctuation start of variable display) required until one big hit occurs corresponding to the big hit occurrence probability, the start number is abnormal An abnormality determination value determined to be determined may be provided, and the abnormality determination value may be managed as security related information.

  Also, as security related information, in addition to the authentication operation designation information described above, the authentication control information is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the CU 3 or P 2, and such authentication control information is transmitted to the upper server 801 and the CU 3. It may be stored and managed by the P platform 2. Here, the authentication control information is predetermined setting information including threshold data related to the various types of authentication described above, and whether the setting information is transmitted at the same timing as the authentication operation designation information described above If the determination is made and the version number stored in the upper server 801 does not match the version number stored in CU3 or the version number stored in P unit 2 as in the authentication operation designation information described above It may be transmitted.

  As described above, as the security related information, predetermined setting information including threshold data for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in operation is appropriate. Then, data of such setting information is transmitted from the upper server 801 to CU3 and further to P2 via CU3 and stored by the upper server 801, CU3 and P2 in CU3 and P2 It is used to determine whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the game machine is in operation is appropriate.

  As the base abnormality detection set value, a low base threshold used in the low base state and a high base threshold used in the high base state are shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a big hit threshold used in the big hit gaming state is provided and included in security related information and transmitted from the upper server 801 to be used for abnormality detection similarly to the low base time threshold and the high base time threshold. It is also good. In that case, the base may be calculated even during the jackpot gaming state, and the calculated base and the jackpot threshold may be compared with each other to detect a jackpot base abnormality.

  Also, based on the C-ID (card ID) inserted in the CU 3 and the gaming information corresponding to the C-ID, a player having a high frequency of occurrence of an abnormal state such as base abnormality is identified, and the player In the case of the security related information, special security related information in which data such as a threshold different from other players (for example, a threshold that makes it easier to detect an abnormal state, etc.) is set to By setting the data, the setting contents of the security related information may be made different according to the occurrence frequency of the abnormal state.

  As described above, the setting information related to security-related information such as the base abnormality detection setting value is transmitted from the upper server 801 to CU3 to P unit 2 via CU3, and CU3 and P unit 2 store them. By monitoring an abnormality related to security related information such as a base abnormality based on the setting information in CU 3 and P base 2, compared with the case where the upper server 801 monitors an abnormality related to security related information by itself, Processing burden can be reduced. Further, since the monitoring process of the security related information is shared by the upper server 801, the CU 3 and the P unit 2, it is possible to perform the abnormality determination by the more subdivided threshold. Even in such a case, the upper server 801 only manages the setting value, and the CU 3 and the P base 2 only perform the abnormality judgment based on the transmitted setting value, thus suppressing an increase in the processing load on both of them. be able to.

  Furthermore, the following effects can be obtained in order to monitor the abnormality related to the security related information on both the CU side and the gaming machine side.

  When an abnormality occurs on the gaming machine side or the fraud is performed, the CU side can appropriately determine the presence or absence of the abnormality of the game information sent from the gaming machine side, and the abnormality can be detected. For example, in determining base abnormality, base value data of an abnormal value is transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU even if the gaming machine side is tampered with and the abnormality detection function of the gaming machine is disabled. Abnormality can be determined on the side.

  Further, in the case where an instruction to operate the “number of requested addition balls” as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27 is frequently transmitted from the CU to the gaming machine on the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, for example, In the gaming machine, the addition control is performed according to the operation instruction, and when the number of game balls as the addition result is transmitted to the CU, the number of game balls stored and managed on the CU side and the number of transmitted game balls are By making a difference, an abnormality can be detected. In addition, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, the memory is stored on the CU side in the case where the “subtracted ball number” shown in FIG. 29 among the operation responses transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU is not transmitted. An abnormality can be detected by the difference between the number of managed gaming balls and the number of gaming balls transmitted from the gaming machine side.

  In addition, as described above, the version number of the security related information stored in the upper server 801 is compared (checked) with the version number of the security related information stored in the CU3 and the P unit 2 and the version number is Since the transmission of the security related information is performed when there is no match, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game is continued with the setting of the stored security related information being incorrect. Also, the security related information stored in the upper server 801 matches the security related information stored in the CU3 or P unit 2 and the security related information stored in the CU3 or P unit 2 is updated. It is possible to prevent wasteful communication of security related information even though it is not necessary. It should be noted that transmission of security related information is always performed without comparing the version numbers at predetermined timings such as the above-mentioned communication connection establishment start state and when the set value of security related information is changed. It is also good.

  Further, in this embodiment, the upper server 801 is taken as an example of the gaming management apparatus which manages setting information such as the threshold value of the security related information, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the hall management computer 1 may manage setting information such as a threshold value of security related information.

  Also, in the upper server 801, when inputting threshold data of security related information, for example, instead of directly inputting data such as 10%, 20%, 30% and so on, each data is set. Manage in multiple stages (for example, setting 1, setting 2, ...) separately, and associate the threshold with each setting stage (for example, setting 1: 10%, setting 2: 20%, setting 3:30 %, Etc., for example, by inputting and setting setting step information such as setting 1, setting 2, setting 3 and so on, the data of the threshold is indirectly specified and stored in the upper server 801. May be

  Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. Referring to FIG. 103, in the slot machine 2S, the front door 2b is provided so as to be able to be opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 2a with the left edge thereof as a swing center.

  A pair of upper and lower engagement protrusions 6aS and 6bS are provided near the end edge of the front door 2bS on the opposite side to the swinging center. The engagement protrusions 6aS and 6bS are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7aS and 7bS are provided at positions of the main body frame 2aS opposed to the engagement protrusions 6aS and 6bS. By pressing the front door 2bS in the open state against the main body frame 2aS, the engagement projections 6aS, 6bS ride over the engagement receiving pieces 7aS, 7bS, and in a state of riding over the engagement reception tabs 7aS, 6bS downward due to the biasing force of the spring. Move and lock.

  A front door open solenoid 110 (not shown) is provided on the back side of the front door 2bS, and the front door open solenoid 110 is excited to excite the front door open solenoid 110 against the biasing force of the spring. The projections 6aS, 6bS are pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement of the engagement projections 6aS, 6bS with the engagement receiving pieces 7aS, 7bS is released, the lock release state is established, and the front door 2b is opened.

  A front door closing detector (not shown) is provided at a position contacting the front door 2bS in the upper part of the main body frame 2aS, and it is detected that the front door 2bS is pressed against the main body frame 2aS and becomes locked. Ru.

  A touch panel type display 510 is provided in a portion surrounding the reel of the slot machine 2S, and the display 510 displays various game history, unsent data to CU, error display, and is not for business use. Various operations in the mode (for example, various settings in the maintenance mode, etc.) are performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 104, main ones of various data stored in each of the CU side and the S base side and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, on the CU side, the fluctuation of the S-point holding points is calculated to manage the current holding points. The S-point side also calculates and stores the current points earned. However, on the S side, the number of points is only to prevent the game from starting as soon as possible when the number of points becomes less than the minimum required number (for example, 0) for setting the number of bets. It is a secondary thing used for In the present embodiment, since the main management of the number of points is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of points on the S side, and the cost of the S units is maximized accordingly It can be suppressed.

  In particular, compared with CU, the S has a short replacement cycle in the game arcade and replacement is performed early. In relation to that, by giving the main management function on the S side to the CU side to reduce the cost of the S side, the running cost of the game arcade introducing the S can be reduced. is there.

  FIG. 104 shows stored data of the RAM provided in the main control unit 323 on the CU side and stored data of the RAM mounted on the payout control unit (not shown) on the S side. First, when the power is turned on in a state where the S unit (slot machine 2S) and the CU (card unit 3) are electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the game arcade, the payout control unit on the S unit side The main control board (not shown) sends main chip ID, chip maker code, gaming machine maker code and gaming machine product code, and the main chip ID, chip maker code, gaming machine maker code and gaming machine product code While transmitting to the CU side, the payout chip ID stored in the payout control unit itself is transmitted to the CU side. In FIG. 104, the chip maker code, the gaming machine maker code, and the gaming machine product code are not shown. The main chip ID, the chip maker code, the gaming machine maker code, and the gaming machine product code are stored in a memory such as a ROM of the main control board. Since these various codes have already been described based on FIG. 6, repeated description is omitted here.

  The CU side stores the transmitted main chip ID and the payout chip ID. Next, data of the connection time, that is, the time when the CU side and the S side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the S side, and the S side stores the transmitted connection time. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the S base side. After that, when the power is turned on, those three pieces of information, ie, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data, are transmitted from the S-unit to the CU.

  The CU side collates the transmitted data with the already stored data, and determines whether the same S-unit as the previous one is connected. As for connection time data, new connection time data for which communication between CU side and S side is started every time the power is raised is sent from CU side to S side and the new connection time data Is stored on the S platform side.

  Also, every time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted on the CU side and S side, the sequence number (SQN) is added and updated by one each on the CU side and the S side, and the sequence number is updated on the CU side. And stored on the S platform side. This SQN is a communication number for checking whether the number is updated and communication is properly performed whenever data is transmitted / received between the CU and the S unit. The SQN is the last updated number of the updated communication number.

  A specific aspect of backup of SQN in CU and S in this embodiment will be described. The CU back-stores the SQN transmitted to the S in response to the operation instruction, and then, upon receiving the SQN from the S, rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup into the received SQN. Then, when transmitting the next operation instruction, the SQN stored in the backup storage is updated by 1 and transmitted to S, and the transmitted SQN is stored in a backup storage. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, the SQN received from the CU in the operation instruction is backed up and stored, and then when the operation response is transmitted from the S unit to the CU, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by one and transmitted. Backup and store sent SQN. Then, when the next operation response is received, the backup SQN is rewritten to the received SQN and stored. Such processing is repeated on the S unit.

  Then, when a communication break occurs in the middle of communication, SQN is backed up and stored until communication reconnection, but on the S unit side, the operation response is always sent regardless of the time of the communication break. Because of this, the SQN stored as a backup until communication reconnection is always the last transmitted SQN. On the other hand, on the CU side, since the operation instruction has been sent or the operation instruction has been received according to the time of occurrence of communication disconnection, the SQN that has been backup-stored until communication reconnection is sent last Or the last received one.

  For example, the CU side transmits a certain operation instruction to the S side, and transmits the sequence number n at that time, and the S side stores the transmitted sequence number n. Then, when an operation response is returned from the S-unit side to the CU side, the one (n + 1) obtained by adding 1 to the stored sequence number n is also transmitted. On the CU side, it is judged that data communication has been normally performed because 1 is added to the already-stored sequence number n + 1, and the sequence number is incremented by one when the operation instruction is sent next time. Then, the n + 2 sequence number is sent to S side.

  Next, the current point related information (point related information in counting) is transmitted from the S-base side to the CU side. This current point related information is stored by each counter in the current point related information storage area of the RAM.

  As shown in FIG. 104, a total of four types of counters, ie, an addition counter, a subtraction counter, an external output information counter, and a holding point counter, are provided in the current holding related information storage area of the RAM. There is.

  The addition number counter is a counter for counting the number of points to be added according to the occurrence of the winning. When a winning is generated on the S unit, an addition number signal capable of specifying the point addition number from the main control board is transmitted to the payout control unit. The payout control unit adds and updates the addition number counter based on the addition number signal.

  The subtraction number counter is a counter for counting holding points to be subtracted according to the bet number setting. When the bet number setting operation is detected, a bet number setting signal is transmitted from the main control board to the payout control unit. The payout control unit adds and updates the subtraction number counter based on the bet number setting signal.

  The external output information counter is a counter for counting the number of times that the game state has changed. As an external output information counter, a counter that counts the number of bets set by the operation of the one-piece BET switch 500 or the MAX BET switch 600, a counter that counts up when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating, and a start operation A counter that counts the internal winning combinations for each winning combination when the internal lottery is executed, a counter that counts the operations for each of the first to third stopping operations when the reel stop operation is performed, and the display result is determined The counter includes a counter that counts up at a time, a counter that counts up according to the gaming state when the gaming state changes, and a counter that counts up according to the error type when an error occurs.

  Note that the counters that count up according to each gaming state when the gaming state changes include a counter corresponding to BB, a counter corresponding to RB, a counter corresponding to RT, and the like. The payout control unit adds and updates the corresponding external output information counter based on various types of external output information transmitted from the main control board.

  The point counter is a counter for storing the player's point (the total number of points) at the present time. The payout control unit adds and updates the holding point counter by the addition of the addition counter when adding and updating the addition counter, and subtracts the holding point by the addition of the subtraction counter when adding and updating the subtraction counter Update.

  A command is sent from the CU to the S units at regular time intervals to request data transmission. Unit S transmits the values of the four types of counters (addition number counter, subtraction number counter, external output information counter, and holding point counter) to CU at the timing when the command is received. Furthermore, for each of the three types of counters except the number-of-points counter among the four types of counters, the S unit backs up the counter value in the storage area of “previous point-related information” each time data is transmitted.

  That is, the value of the addition number counter is stored as "addition number", the value of the subtraction number counter is set as "subtraction number", and the value of the external output information counter is stored as "external output information" respectively. It is stored in the area. In addition, at the time of storage in the storage area, data previously stored is erased. That is, new data is overwritten and stored (rewritten) in the storage area of the "previous point related information".

  The addition number counter, the subtraction number counter, and the external output information counter whose counter values are backed up in the storage area of "previous point related information" are then initialized (0 clear) to prepare for the next data count. Be

  As a result, in the addition number counter, the subtraction number counter, and the external output information counter, the amount of change (non-transmission to CU) of each data (point, external output information) after data transmission to CU last time Data) will be stored. Then, when the data transmission request is received from the CU next time, the amount of change of the data from when the data transmission request was received last time to when the data transmission request is received this time is sent to the CU. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the total number of points at the current stage is stored in the point counter that is not initialized for each data transmission. Then, every time a transmission request for data is received from the CU, the total number of points at the current stage is transmitted to the CU. That is, every time the S receives a command instructing transmission of the data change amount, it transmits the data change amount between the previous reception of the command and the current reception.

  In other words, data of addition number, subtraction number, external output information, which is the current holding related information transmitted to the CU side immediately before in the storage area of the last holding related information (the current holding related information transmitted immediately before) Are stored as backup data. This backup data includes not only the value of each counter at this time but also the value of each previous counter that was not transmitted in the next transmission when the current holding related information is not transmitted from the S unit to the CU side. Is also intended to enable transmission.

  On the CU side, the total addition number (addition total), total subtraction number (subtraction total), external output information total, and holding points are stored in the total data storage area in the RAM.

  The CU updates the total addition number and the number of remaining points based on the value of the addition number counter transmitted from the S-unit side. Further, the total subtraction number and the holding points are updated based on the value of the subtraction number counter transmitted from the S-unit side. Furthermore, the cumulative total number of external output information is updated based on the value of the external output information counter transmitted from the S-unit. The total number of external output information is updated according to the type of each external output information counter. As a result, on the CU side, according to "number of bets", "reel start", "internal winning by winning combination", "first to third stop operation", "display result", and "change in gaming state" The number (count) is accumulated.

  As described above, the CU can manage the latest holding points by updating the holding points according to the current holding related information transmitted one by one from the S-unit. Similarly, the CU can manage the latest information by updating the total addition number, the total subtraction number, and the total number of external output information according to the current holding related information transmitted one by one from S. Become.

  Although the CU receives the count value of the holding point counter in addition to the values of the addition number counter and the subtraction number counter from the S side, the holding points stored by itself are the values of the addition number counter and the subtraction number counter. The value is updated based on the value, and the count value of the holding point counter sent from the S base is not used. Therefore, even if the points sent from the S unit do not match the points managed by the CU, the points held by the CU are updated with the points sent from the S unit. It will not be done.

  Further, the CU collates the value of the holding point counter transmitted from the S-unit side with the current holding points updated on the CU side, and determines the consistency as to whether or not they match.

  The CU transmits normal (normal) operation request (command) and normal (normal) operation response with the S unit, on condition that determination that the unit matches (consistent confirmation) is performed. Continue receiving the response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control to shift to an error state, for example, an error notification is performed by the display unit 312, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, the hall management computer An error notification may be issued according to 1), or a predetermined notification may be given to prompt an artificial response by a person in charge.

  Alternatively, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU may generate a command for correcting the holding points to the holding points managed by the CU, and then transmit the command to the S-unit. Conceivable. In this case, the S unit is provided with a function of correcting the number of points stored in itself according to the correction instruction command. Note that, as the correction instruction command, even as a command specifying the number of points managed on the CU side, or the difference between the number of points managed on the CU side and the number of points stored on the S-unit side It may be a command indicating.

  In this way, the CU receives the values of various counters transmitted from the S-unit side, and calculates and manages the current points, particularly based on the values of the addition / subtraction counters. have. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function on the S-unit. By that amount, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. Note that, in the present embodiment, the holding points are stored also on the S side for the purpose of enabling to prohibit the game immediately when the holding points become zero. However, it is possible not to provide the holding point counter for storing the holding points on the S-unit side.

  The CU does not match the function of performing a match score determination process that checks whether the calculated current score at the current point in time and the value of the score counter transmitted from the S base are matched or not. It has a function to perform control to shift to an error state (error control at non-coincidence).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, although the holding points are stored also on the S base side, it can be determined whether or not the holding points are consistent with the holding points managed and stored on the CU side. Yes (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the credit points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the credit points managed and stored on the CU side due to an unfair act or other circumstances, that effect can be checked. Here, although the determination function is provided on the CU side, for example, the points stored on the CU side and the points stored on the S base side are stored by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU. And may be determined to determine whether or not both are consistent.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 104, the CU further has a storage area for storing the stored medals and a storage area for storing the card balance of the received (inserted) prepaid card (game card). The main control unit 323 of the CU subtracts a predetermined number of stored medals from the storage area storing the stored medals according to the input requesting use of the stored medals (for example, the input of pressing the replay button 319 provided for the CU). Do. In addition, the main control unit 323 of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area storing the card balance in response to an input requesting use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation to use for a game by deducting the value from the game-owned value (for example, the prepaid balance, the points recorded on the card, or the number of stored medals) owned by the player, The number of requested additions for adding holding points for the withdrawal amount to the holding point counter is transmitted from the CU side to the S-base side. On the S side, in response to that, the holding point counter is added and updated.

  On the other hand, when an operation is performed to order a so-called wagon service or the like in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink etc., the number of requested withdrawals for the gaming value owned by the player is from the CU side. It is sent to S side. In response to that, on the S side, the holding point counter is decremented and updated.

  FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram corresponding to storage control of gaming history data in P units and CUs shown in FIG. 7, and is a diagram showing storage control of gaming history data in S units and CU. In FIG. 105, compared to FIG. 7, the gaming machine is changed from P to S. Even in this case, the same control as in FIG. 7 is performed. Since FIG. 105 is the same as FIG. 7, the description will not be repeated here.

  As shown in FIG. 105, switching between the business mode and the non-business mode is also possible in the case of the S unit. As a result, in the same manner as in the P unit, the S unit switches the operation mode to the business mode, the maintenance mode, the trial hitting mode, and the test mode in response to the mode change request from the CU.

  The maintenance mode, the strike mode, and the test mode on the S unit conform to those on the P unit. Although each mode of P units is shown in FIGS. 8 to 10, the transition operation method and end operation method of each mode in S units are the same as those shown in FIGS. In addition, in each mode in S units, no point management is performed (data concerning point is not transmitted to CU), gaming history data such as the number of big bonus times and the number of symbol rotations are not backed up, and the gaming state in the mode Is taken over even after the mode change.

  Mode transition conditions are "point = 0 and card balance 0", "the symbol is not changing in the variable display device", and "not being in the big bonus". Furthermore, "the bet number setting = 0" may be added.

  The end condition of the mode is "the symbol is not changing in the variable display device". Furthermore, "the bet number setting = 0" may be added.

  In the maintenance mode, for example, a setting in which the big hit is substituted for the big hit described in FIG. 8 is possible. During the test mode, for example, a test of a partial function such as a test of rotating the reel (variable display device) by the operation of the start lever, a left reel stop operation, a middle reel stop operation and a right reel stop operation. A test for displaying various screens on the display unit 510, and further, an entire test (test game) shown in FIG. 9 is possible. In the trial mode, it is possible to operate all the functions of the S units to actually play a game. Further, FIG. 11 is similarly applied to the case of the S unit.

Next, modifications and feature points in the embodiment described above will be described below.
(1) FIG. 106 shows a modification of the card unit 3 shown in FIG. 1, and shows one in which the card unit 3 is incorporated inside the pachinko machine 2.

  At a lower position of the game area 27, a card unit 3 is incorporated as shown by a broken line. The player can insert a card from the card insertion / discharge port 309 provided in the card unit 3, and the player can insert a banknote from the bill insertion port 302 provided in the card unit 3. ing. Further, the display 312 of the card unit 3 is provided next to the display 54 of the gaming machine in a state where the player can visually recognize. In the figure, 320 is an IR light receiving unit, 319 is a replay button, 321 is a lending button, 322 is a return button, and 798 is a calling button.

  Although the modification of the card unit shown in FIG. 106 is one incorporated in the pachinko machine 2 as an example of a gaming machine, the gaming machine to be incorporated is not limited to the pachinko machine 2, and FIGS. It may be the slot machine 2S shown in 105.

  (2) Next, a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 7, 25 and 105 will be described. FIG. 107 is an explanatory view for explaining a modification of the control mode for storing the game history data of each of the CU side and the P base side shown in FIG. 7. Here, differences from FIGS. 7, 25 and 105 will be mainly described.

  In the case of FIG. 7, the game history data is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch 293 provided in the P-base 2. However, in the modification shown in FIG. 107, the hall management computer 1 is used. The game history data is cleared based on the clear command transmitted to the CU 3 from the. It is necessary to clear the game history data for each gaming machine installed in the game arcade before the start of business of the game arcade. Therefore, it is more convenient to clear the game history data not by the operation of the RAM clear switch installed for each gaming machine but by simultaneous distribution of the clear command signal from the hall management computer 1 to each CU 3.

  The hall management computer 1 is operated by the hall management computer 1 or the clock function built in the hall management computer 1 causes the hall management computer 1 to be at a predetermined time before the start time of the game hall operation. A clear command signal is simultaneously distributed to each CU3. The CU 3 that has received the clear command signal erases the storage of the corresponding P game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 by the function of the clear processing unit provided in the gaming history data management unit 391. As a result, the display of the current P game history data by the display unit 312 is erased (cleared). Further, the clear command signal is transmitted to the game history data management unit 291 of the P-unit 2 by the function of the clear processing unit.

  The game history data management unit 291 which has received the clear command signal erases the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the effect control unit for display 292 by the function of the clear processing unit, and the P game history data of this P unit The oldest stored data is erased from the stored data for 10 days of the storage unit, and the remaining 9 days of stored data is shifted and stored in the storage area of the older day one by one. As a result, the newest storage area (storage area on the current day) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data is stored in this vacant area (storage area on the day).

  Further, in the modified example shown in FIG. 107, after the player has left the seat, the determination of the identity between the player who left the seat and the player who will play the next game is performed on the CU 3 side. The current player gaming history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 stores C-ID, which is player identification information of the player who has left the seat. Thereafter, when the player inserts a card into the CU 3 to play a game again on the P stand 2 which has left the seat, the information of the inserted card is read and the C-ID included in the inserted card information and the current player The C-ID of the player who has left the seat stored in the game history data storage unit is compared to determine whether or not both match. When it is determined that the two match, the same command is transmitted from the gaming history data management unit 391 of CU3 to the gaming history data management unit 291 of the P-base 2, but it is determined that the two do not match. The difference command is sent.

  If the game history data management unit 291 receives the same / different command, in the case of the same command, the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit and the game history data are stored in the current player game history data storage unit. Control to restore and store. On the other hand, when a different command is received, control is performed to delete backup data stored in the backup data storage unit.

  FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram of a modification corresponding to storage control of gaming history data in P units and CUs shown in FIG. 107, and is a view showing storage control of gaming history data in S units and CU. The control similar to that of FIG. 106 is performed, and the difference is that S units are used instead of P units. Since the others are similar, only the disclosure of the drawings will be made here and the repetition of the description will be omitted. In FIGS. 107 and 108 as well as FIGS. 7 and 105 described above, the identity of the player is confirmed only when the C-ID of the member card is read, not the visitor card, and the current player gaming history is confirmed. It memorizes in the data, it inherits the game history, it counts.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing control of insertion processing in the modification shown in FIGS. 107 and 108. The control of FIG. 109 is a modification of a part of the control shown in FIG. 25. The same control steps are assigned the same step numbers, and the differences will be mainly described here. Also in FIG. 109, solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and arrows of two-dot chain lines indicate the flow of transmitted information. In FIG. 109, the CU executes the steps S1, S2, S4 to S7, S20, and S21, and the P units execute S22, S10, S12, S13, and S15.

  If it is determined in S1 that the process is not interrupted, the control proceeds to S20, in which C-IDs of the currently inserted card and the previously inserted card are compared to determine whether they match. Next, at S21, control is performed to transmit a command based on the determination result to the P-unit. Specifically, the same command is transmitted in the case of the determination result of the match, and the difference command is transmitted to the P units in the case of the determination result of the non-match.

  In the P unit, it is determined in S22 whether the transmitted command is a match command or not, and the game history data of the backup area (backup data storage unit) is stored in the current area (condition that matches). A control (S12) is performed to return to the current player gaming history data storage unit) and resume updating of the gaming history data.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 109, the control of S14 shown in FIG. 25 is not executed.

  In this modification, instead of transmitting the same command as described above, the gaming history data a stored in the current area (current player gaming history data storage unit) of the data storage unit 392 is It may be transmitted to the platform 2S). The gaming machine (P 2 and S 2 S) that has received the gaming history data a stores the received gaming history data a in the current area (current player gaming history data storage unit) and takes over the gaming history data a. Add and update new game history data. In this case, a backup area (backup data storage unit) is not necessary in the gaming machine (P unit 2 or S unit 2S).

(3) The invention of the following composition is indicated by the embodiment mentioned above.
A gaming system comprising a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game, and a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) communicably connected to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
First control means (main control board 16) for controlling the gaming machine;
And second control means (LSI 799) communicably connected to the first control means,
The first control means is
Error determination means (CPU of main control board 16) for determining an error occurring during control of the gaming machine;
Abnormality notification control means (a CPU of the main control board 16 and an I / O port) for performing control to notify an abnormality when the error determination means determines the occurrence of an error;
The second control means is
Communicably connected to the gaming device (connected by a connector),
An abnormality determining unit (an authentication sequence of FIG. 15) for determining an abnormality of the first control unit;
Output means (main control board 16 detected abnormality) outputting abnormality notification information notifying that an abnormality has occurred when abnormality of the first control means is judged by the abnormality judgment means The payout control unit 17 includes a P communication control unit 81 and an S communication control unit (not shown) to notify the CU communication control unit 80),
The gaming apparatus is characterized in that control is performed to notify an abnormality when the abnormality notification information is received.

  According to such a configuration, the second control means determines the abnormality of the first control means itself having a control function of notifying an abnormality when an error occurs during control of the gaming machine. A first control having an abnormality notification control function at the time of occurrence of an abnormality in order to perform control to notify the occurrence of an abnormality of the control means itself to the game apparatus from the first control means and to notify the abnormality in the game apparatus Even when there is an abnormality in the means itself, abnormality notification control can be performed well.

  (4) In the above embodiment, the CU communication control unit 80 and the P communication control unit 81 receive the information sent from the main control unit 323 and the payout control unit 17 and use that information as they are. Although transmitted to the CU, the received information may be processed (protocol conversion, serial / parallel conversion, etc.) and the processed information may be transmitted.

  (5) Although the authentication sequence and the business message sequence in FIGS. 14 to 22 are the control of the main control unit 323 and the communication control unit 80, the control of the authentication sequence and the business message sequence in FIGS. It may be performed by the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2 and the P unit communication control unit 81, or may be performed by the payout control unit of the slot machine 2S and the S unit communication control unit. It may be performed in the other gaming machines (card issuing device, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange device, etc.).

  In addition, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 22 may be performed between, for example, an island computer connected to hall computer 1 and the computer of the gaming machine, and further includes a main control unit and a communication control unit. In the Z counter, the communication control unit is connected to the prize management device, and may be performed between the main control unit and the communication control unit. Furthermore, for example, a communication control unit connected to the ball storage management device may be provided in the card unit, and the business message sequence shown in FIG. 22 may be executed between the communication control unit and the main control unit of the card unit.

  (6) Although the BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 17 is authentication using two types of SIDs, the SID of the main control unit and the SID of the CU communication control unit, one type of SID (for example, SID for CU ) May be used to authenticate the main control unit and the CU communication control unit. In this case, authentication of storing the same SID is performed.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, the number of gaming balls is displayed by the display 312 provided on the CU side, and the number of gaming balls is displayed by the display 54 on the P base side. There is. When the number of game balls is displayed by the display on the CU side, there is an advantage that the number of game balls can be displayed by applying the CU in the present embodiment to P units without a display unit. On the other hand, when the game ball number display unit is provided on the P-base side, the display control may be performed on the CU side. Alternatively, the display control may be performed on the P side. When the display control is performed on the P side, the information on the number of game balls to be displayed is received from the CU side, and the number of game balls managed in CU is displayed on the number display portion of game balls. It is possible to In addition, as described above, when the display control is performed on the P side, there is an advantage that it is possible to display the number of decorative (rendering) high value game balls. When the display control is performed on the P platform side, information on the number of gaming balls to be displayed is not received from the CU side, but based on the value of the gaming ball number counter stored in the P itself. The display control of the number may be performed.

  (8) In FIG. 34, a weight of 10 seconds is provided for the floating ball processing waiting time on the P platform side, but instead, on the P platform side, the number of fired balls-number of far balls-number of out balls Even if it is determined that the processing of the floating balls is completed, it is determined that the number of balls-number of balls = zero, or the number of balls-number of balls-number of balls detected by the out ball detection switch = 0. Good.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the drive of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped and the bat firing is stopped in the P car that receives the command of prohibition request, and the stop or start winning memory of the variable display device during fluctuation. Although it has been shown that the fluctuation of the variable display device based on the above does not stop, the fluctuation of the variable display device may also be stopped instead.

  (10) In the embodiment described above, when the game balls are subtracted by the wagon service etc., as described based on FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of gaming balls stored on the CU side is sufficiently large compared to the number of balls of the subtraction request (for example, larger than 30 balls), the CU without waiting for a response from P units. The game balls may be subjected to subtraction processing alone, and then an operation instruction of a subtraction request may be transmitted to P units.

  (11) In the embodiment described above, the command is sent from the CU to the P unit, and the P unit responds to it, and the response is sent back to the CU. Conversely, the command is sent from the P unit to the CU Also, it may be a communication form in which the CU responds to it and returns a response to the P unit.

  Specifically, the command (operation instruction) generated by the payout control unit 17 is transmitted to the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the S-unit communication control unit, and the command (operation instruction) is transmitted to the P-unit communication control unit 81, S It transmits to CU from the table communication control unit. A response (operation response) corresponding to the command (operation instruction) is returned from the CU to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit, and the response (operation response) is transmitted to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication The control unit transmits to the payout control unit 17.

  In this case, the payout control unit 17 executes retransmission (not shown) of the command. That is, the payout control unit 17 sends the command to the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the S-unit communication control unit when the response can not be received from the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the S-unit communication control unit for one second after the command transmission. resend. Further, the payout control unit 17 also executes transmission of the communication state request and retry of confirmation of the communication state shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b). That is, after the payout control unit 17 transmits the operation instruction to the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the S-unit communication control unit, it transmits the communication status request, and is returned from the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the S-unit communication control unit. The communication status is confirmed based on the incoming communication status response. Then, if it is determined that the confirmation result is abnormal, the operation instruction is transmitted again, and then the communication state request is transmitted, and the communication state confirmation retry is executed.

  (12) Furthermore, in the above embodiment, communication is performed between the CU and P units periodically (for example, 200 ms), but instead, when the need for communication arises, CU Alternatively, data may be transmitted from one of the P units to the other for communication.

  (13) In the above-mentioned embodiment, the operation response including the refusal signal not complying with the request such as addition refusal ON, subtraction refusal ON, clear refusal ON from P to CU is sent back to CU, Is to determine that the request is rejected based on the rejection ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of sending back an operation response of rejection ON, the operation response including the number of addition / subtraction balls and game balls not complying with the request from the CU is sent back to the CU. On the side, it is determined whether the returned data (the number of added balls, game balls, etc.) is the one according to the request, and it is determined whether the request is rejected or not. Good.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, when the power-off at the CU or the communication disconnection between the CU and the P-unit is detected, the bat unit firing is stopped on the P-unit side to put the play stop state Although what was shown, it is not limited to it and you may control to the state which can continue a game, without stopping a batted ball shot in P side. In that case, the cumulative subtraction memory of the number of added subtraction balls and the number of starting openings generated with the continued game from the occurrence of the communication interruption until the recovery and activation of these abnormalities is accumulated on P side Alternatively, the data and the game ball data may be transmitted to the CU at startup to correct the backup value of the data on the CU side.

  (15) In the above-mentioned embodiment, when no command from the CU is transmitted for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), the P-unit determines that the communication is disconnected by a predetermined process. However, the communication disconnection may be determined in the following manner.

  The pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection detector for detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 are electrically connected. The CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are connected by the signal line as described above, but in addition to the signal line, a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) from the card unit 3 is input to the pachinko machine 2 side Connection detection signal lines. The connection detection signal line and the signal line between the CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are constituted by the same cable, and the cable is disconnected or the connector is disconnected, and further, the power of the card unit 3 is disconnected. In the case where the voltage of the connection detection signal line is 0 V, the connection detector detects the voltage and the detection signal is input to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 determines that the disconnection of the cable, the disconnection of the connector, and the power failure of the card unit 3 have occurred by the input of the detection signal.

  (16) In the process of FIG. 23, when the communication start request (correction request) including correction ON is received, the P unit is programmed so that the correction request can not be rejected by the P unit. However, in P units, despite receiving a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON, there may be a case where a serious error in which the game ball etc. can not be corrected has occurred. In consideration of such a severe error condition, the CU side checks the content of the operation response transmitted from P after transmitting the communication start request (correction request) including correction ON, and the P side It may be determined whether or not the game ball or the like is properly corrected, and if it is not corrected, control may be performed to shift to an error state.

  In other words, the CU is determined in advance when it is determined that the addition of the game ball or the like can not be made in the gaming machine (for example, P units) even after receiving the communication start request (correction request) including correction ON in FIG. Error control means for performing control to shift to the specified error state.

  As control to shift to an error state, for example, the display unit 312 notifies a severe error, and the hole management computer 1 notifies that a serious error has occurred, and the hole management computer 1 issues an error notification. It is possible to do it and urge human resources to respond by personnel.

(17) On the P base side, the number of added balls may be counted as follows.
A counter A and a counter B are provided on the side of P as counters for counting the number of added balls. First, the number of added balls is counted by the counter A. At the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter A is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter A is maintained, and thereafter, the number of added balls is counted by the counter B. At the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter B is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, while maintaining the value of the counter B, the count value of the counter A is cleared to 0, and thereafter, the counter A counts the number of added balls. Thereafter, the above counting by the counters A and B is repeated.

  The above counting method may be used to count the number of subtraction balls on the P-unit side. Alternatively, it may be used to count the number of starting opening 1 winnings and the number of starting openings 2 winnings.

  (18) The P unit does not transmit two pieces of information of the number of added balls and the number of reduced balls to the CU, but transmits one piece of information after adding and subtracting the number of added balls and the number of reduced balls to the CU It is also good. That is, "update information capable of specifying the amount of change" is also configured by such information.

  (19) The communication method is not limited to the above command-response method. The P unit may transmit ball-related information such as game balls to the CU at predetermined time intervals without waiting for a command from the CU. Alternatively, instead of transmitting ball-related information at predetermined time intervals, the P-unit may transmit ball-related information to the CU each time a predetermined amount of information is obtained. For example, in the case of an addition ball, it is conceivable to configure to transmit the number of addition balls to the CU each time one or two or more predetermined numbers of addition balls are generated.

  (20) In the present embodiment, two counters, the addition ball number counter and the subtraction ball number count, are provided on the P base side. However, instead of these two counters, one addition / subtraction counter may be used which is added by the increase of the game balls (the occurrence of winning or the like) and is decremented by the decrease of the game balls (the bullet release, etc.). In this case, the value of this one addition / subtraction counter is transmitted from P to CU.

(21) The present embodiment includes the following configuration.
After the gaming device transmits a command for instructing subtraction of points to the gaming machine, the gaming device reestablishes a communication connection with the gaming machine before receiving a response to the command. If it has shifted to the above, it is determined whether or not the command for instructing subtraction of points has reached the gaming machine based on the data transmitted from the gaming machine side in the process of reestablishing the communication connection. And the command transmission unit cancels the instruction to subtract the point by the command when it is determined by the arrival determination unit that the command to instruct subtraction of the point has arrived. Command is transmitted to the gaming machine, and the additional point updating means cancels the subtraction instruction of the points by the command for instructing the subtraction of the points. When a command is received, whether the point has already been subtracted based on the command for instructing subtraction of points or the point is not subtracted due to lack of points, either The point corresponding to the cancellation amount of the subtraction instruction is added to the point stored in the point storage means.

  (22) In the present embodiment, by operation of the return button 322, a signal requesting the end of the game is input to the CU. However, the CU may be configured to be able to input a signal requesting game termination from the management computer or the like.

(23) The CU and the P may be communicably connected not by wired connection but by wireless.
(24) The payout control unit 17 may not be provided on the pachinko machine 2 by providing the function of the payout control unit 17 on the main control board 16.

  (25) The payout control unit 17 performs control to stop the driving of the bat firing motor 18 when the gaming ball number counter stored on the pachinko machine 2 side becomes 0. However, the payout control unit 17 may execute the control when the gaming ball counter reaches a predetermined value other than zero. For example, the player can designate and input the predetermined value in advance using a predetermined operation switch of the gaming machine. The payout control unit 17 stops driving the bat firing motor 18 when the game ball counter reaches a predetermined value designated by the player. Thus, the player can automatically stop the game when the remaining number of game balls reaches the number of balls specified in advance.

  (26) In the embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 2 side is provided with the effect part (effect control part 292 for display) and various displays are performed by the display 54. However, the effect part is provided. The pachinko machine 2 may not be. In that case, even if a command including an operation instruction such as card insertion processing ON, addition display ON, computer display ON, clear display ON, etc. is sent to P base 2, in P base 2, Display control according to the command is not performed, and the display is performed only by the display 312 on the CU side.

  (27) Instead of RAM clear by manual operation by the RAM clear switch 293 shown in FIG. 7, a clock function may be provided so that the RAM clear signal is automatically output at the business start time of the game arcade. The game history data is cleared as described above by the RAM clear signal that is automatically output.

  (28) In the embodiment described above, in the recovery process of the number of game history balls such as the number of determined symbols 1, 2 and the starting openings 1 to 3, the big winning openings 1 and 2, the winning openings 1 to 4, etc. Although control to match the data is performed, since these game history data are information managed by the P unit, basically based on the game history data held by the P unit side regardless of the match or mismatch. Control may be performed to update the game history data on the CU side. However, the data on the total number of game balls, the cumulative addition balls, and the cumulative subtraction balls are matched with the stored data on the CU side.

  (29) In the embodiment described above, the transition to the non-business mode is performed by remote control operation by a game arcade clerk, but instead or in addition to this, a transition command from the upper server 801 or a game arcade Control may be performed to shift to the non-business mode by inserting a test card by the store clerk into the CU. Such transition to the non-sales mode can be made transition to the non-sales mode by remote control operation or the like while waiting for a customer (even in the case of a definite change). Then, as the non-operating mode, two types may be provided: a first non-operating mode used as an event outside the business in the game arcade, and a second non-operating mode for confirmation after nail adjustment.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when the game ball (or the number of points held) runs out in the non-business mode, the CU sends the game ball addition command (or the number of points addition command) to P (or S) The addition of game balls (or the addition of points earned) is thereby made possible to play a game, but P units (or S cars) are sent without sending a game ball addition command (or a score addition command) from the CU side. The game may be controlled so that the game can be continued even if the game ball (or the number of points earned) is lost.

  (30) The C-ID described above is composed of fixed code data that never changes, but instead, the C-ID read from the card changes dynamically according to the reading time It may be an ID code. Then, when a card is inserted into the CU and the CU reads the C-ID, the CU stores the C-ID together with the read time, and the player is based on both the read time and the C-ID data. May be configured to be identified. For example, when the CU reads a C-ID, the current time T is input to the card, and in the card, the C-ID is encrypted with T using ET (C-ID), and the ET (C-ID) and T And in pairs. CU deciphers its ET (C-ID) with T and extracts a C-ID by DT (ET (C-ID)).

  (31) In the above embodiment, the player is specified based on the C-ID to determine whether the same player is playing a game, but instead or additionally To provide biometric information reading means for reading biometric information such as fingerprints and veins of the player on the CU or P, and determine the identity of the player based on the biometric information reading means read by the biometric information reading means Biometrics authentication may be employed.

  (32) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, data stored in the current player gaming history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored along with the return of the card. However, in response to the return of the card, the current player gaming history data storage unit is switched to the backup data storage unit and the backup data storage unit is switched to the current player gaming history data storage unit. You may control as follows. In that case, the stored data of the switched current player gaming history data storage unit is displayed by the display 54.

  (33) In the above embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 7 and the like, the C-ID match determination is performed on the P base side, but the match determination may be performed on the CU side. In that case, the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit of P unit 2 is sent to the CU side, and the C-ID recorded on the inserted card is received on the CU side that received it. To determine whether the read C-ID matches the C-ID transmitted from the P-unit. Then, if it is determined in CU3 that the C-IDs do not match, a clear command is transmitted to P base 2. In the P-unit 2 that has received the clear command, the data stored in the backup data storage unit is erased.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in CU3 that the C-IDs match, the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is returned to the current player game history data storage unit with respect to P unit 2 Command information for performing addition update of new game history data is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2 by taking over the game history data. This command information may be code data such as handover command information or the like, but the backup gaming history data for handover is stored on the CU side, that is, the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit of P unit 2 Alternatively, the backed up game history data may be transmitted to the P-unit 2 as handover command information. In that case, the backup data storage unit in P units is not necessary.

  (34) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, 58, 59, 62, 63, and 66, the determination of C-ID identity is performed on the CU side. Although one has been shown, this identity determination may be performed on the P base side. That is, the gaming machine may have the following configuration.

It is possible to play a game by means of points, a game medium is fired in the game area to play a game, and a communication unit for communicating with a game device for adding points using game value owned by a player is provided, and winning is achieved A gaming machine to which points are added according to the occurrence of
Specifying means for specifying the amount of change in points according to use for games and occurrence of winnings;
Point storage means for storing points;
Point updating means for updating the points stored in the point storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means for performing control to transmit the update information capable of specifying the amount of change and the points stored in the point storage means from the communication unit to the gaming apparatus;
Player specifying information storage means for storing player specifying information for specifying a player who plays a game;
The same as the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storing means when communication is started by being connected to the gaming apparatus Same determination means for determining whether or not a player of
A game machine comprising: an identical determination result transmission control means for performing control to transmit a determination result by the identical determination means from the communication unit to the gaming apparatus.

  (35) In the embodiment described above, the operation history is displayed again on the non-business mode by touching the operation button icon such as the recounting button displayed on the display unit 312. Alternatively, or in addition, it may be controlled to recount the game history data in the non-business mode by detecting the opening of the glass door.

  (36) The contents of the above-described embodiment can be applied not only to pachinko machines but also to gaming machines such as slot machines.

  Here, a pachinko gaming machine type gaming machine receives a recording medium (card) and has a player-owned value (prepaid balance, the number of balls, or a player-owned value specified by recording information recorded in the recording medium) A gaming machine including a communication unit (P unit communication control unit 81) for communicating with a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that enables the use of the number of stored balls for playing a game, and playing game media by firing game media in the gaming area It is a pachinko machine 2).

  In other words, with a pachinko gaming machine type gaming machine, it is possible to play a game with points, and a game medium is fired in the game area to play a game, and the gaming value owned by the player is A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) including a communication unit that communicates with a gaming apparatus that uses points to add points, and points are added according to the occurrence of a winning.

  On the other hand, a slot machine type gaming machine is a player-owned value-value prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls specified by the recording information received and recorded on the recording medium (card). Includes a communication unit (P unit communication control unit 81) for communicating with a game device (card unit 3) that enables the game to be used for playing a game, and a variable display device whose display state can be changed. The game can be started by setting “1”, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, and one game is ended, and the display result derived and displayed becomes a predetermined specific display result. It is a gaming machine (slot machine 2S) in which winning can occur.

  In other words, a slot machine type gaming machine can play a game with points, and a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that adds points using a gaming value owned by a player (S communication control unit) and a variable display device capable of changing the display state, the game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display device is derived A game can be generated when one game is ended by being displayed and the display result derived and displayed becomes a predetermined specific display result, and a point is added according to the occurrence of a prize Machine (slot machine 2S).

  (37) In the above embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 6 and FIG. 104, the number of game balls stored and the number of points stored by the CU, and the number of game balls and the number of points transmitted from the game machine are The CU determines whether they match or not, and if they do not match, it transmits a command for correction to adjust the number of gaming balls on the gaming machine side or the number of points held on the gaming machine to the number of game balls on the CU side or the number of points held. C-ID match / mismatch may be further added as a judgment criterion of. For example, even if the number of game balls stored and the number of points stored by the CU do not match the number of game balls and the number of points sent from the game machine, that alone does not transmit a correction command, and further from the game machine If the CU determines that the sent C-ID does not match the stored C-ID of the CU, it transmits a correction command. Thus, when an abnormality such as noise or the like that causes C-ID data to go wrong is generated, a correction command is transmitted to correct the number of game balls and the number of points held on the gaming machine side to a correct value. Can.

  Furthermore, when the CU determines that the C-ID sent from the gaming machine matches the stored C-ID of the CU, a correction command may be transmitted. Thus, when an abnormality occurs such that the number of gaming balls on the gaming machine and the number of points in the gaming machine go out without the player being replaced, a correction command is transmitted to set the number of gaming balls and the number of gaming points on the gaming machine side. It can be corrected to the correct value.

  (38) In the above embodiment, the oldest stored data is erased from the stored data for 10 days of the P game history data storage unit by the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293, and the remaining 9 days Although one minute of memory data is shifted and stored in the memory area of an old day one by one, it is a time zone before the opening of the game arcade as a condition to execute the shift control of such P game history data It may be added. That is, on the condition that the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293 is performed in a predetermined time zone before the opening of the game arcade, shift control of the P game history data is executed.

  (39) In the above embodiment, the mutual authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, but in addition to that, the LSI 799 of the gaming machine and the main control boards 16, 116 Between the payout control units 17 and 117 and the P-unit communication control units 81 and 82.

  (40) In the modification described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108, the clear command transmitted from the hall management computer 1 is shown to be input to the CU3, but instead of or in addition to that, the CU3 is input to the CU3. By providing a clear switch and operating the clear switch, the above-described processing of clearing the game history data may be performed. The game history data may be cleared by remote control operation. Specifically, when the staff of the game arcade directs the remote control to the IR light receiving unit 320 of CU3 and performs the clear operation, the IR light receiving unit 320 receives the operation signal (infrared) and clears the game history data. Do.

  (41) In the above embodiment, the slot machine that does not need to use any physical game media such as medals in the game has been described as an example of the slot system of the point system. When such a slot machine is adopted, since the game medium is not required, it is not necessary to provide a transport path for the game medium and a storage unit for the game medium in the slot machine. As a result, the structure of the slot machine can be simplified, and the slot machine can be miniaturized or reduced in cost.

  However, in place of such a slot machine, a slot machine is adopted in which the points are updated in conjunction with moving a game medium such as a medal or a game ball in a predetermined direction while adopting the point system. It is also conceivable to do.

  For example, the gaming machine is enclosed in a slot machine, and a circulation path is provided for circulating the enclosed gaming medium in a predetermined direction. In addition, you may provide the discharge | emission / insertion part which can discharge | release and insert a game medium as needed at the predetermined location of a circulation path.

  When the condition for adding points is established, the slot machine generates a number of game media according to the number of points to be added among the plurality of game media in the circulation path, from the predetermined first place in the circulation path to the second one. While moving to a location, add and update stored points, and send a response command for adding points to the CU. The CU adds and updates the stored holding points.

  In addition, when the condition for subtraction of points is established, the slot machine selects the number of game media corresponding to the number of points to be subtracted among the plurality of game media in the circulation path from the second location in the circulation path. While moving to one location, the stored point is memorized and updated, and a response command for subtracting the point is sent to the CU. The CU subtracts and updates the stored holding points.

  Note that even when the subtraction condition is satisfied, the game medium may be moved from the first place to the second place as in the case where the addition condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the game medium may be moved only when the addition condition is satisfied, or the game medium may be moved only when the subtraction condition is satisfied.

  In addition, it is possible to see through the game medium moving between the first place and the second place in order to make the player recognize that the points are updated corresponding to the movement of the game medium. It is desirable to provide the see-through portion at a predetermined position on the front side of the slot machine.

  Furthermore, if a plurality of moving paths for moving game media are provided between the first portion and the second portion, the holding path should be updated under the condition of one addition or subtraction condition. A game medium corresponding to the number of point renewals when the number of point renewals is large (for example, when the number of payouts based on winnings is large, when the number of additions based on the lending instruction is large, when the number of bets is the MAX value) Can be moved quickly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation having a sense of discomfort such that the movement of the game medium continues endlessly even though the update display of the points is ended.

  In addition, if the first portion and the second portion are arranged so as to be in the relationship between the upper portion and the lower portion in the vertical direction, the game medium is naturally moved by its own weight from the first portion to the second portion. It can be dropped and the movement mechanism of the game media can be simplified. In this case, it is assumed that the game medium is made to flow from the first place to the first place in both the addition update and the subtraction update of the points. Alternatively, the game medium may be made to flow from the first portion to the first portion only in one of the point addition update and the point subtraction update. Alternatively, a flow-down path for point addition update and a flow-down path for point subtraction update may be separately provided, and a perspective window for addition update visual check and a perspective window for subtraction update visual check may be respectively provided. Good.

  In particular, when a game ball is used as the above-mentioned game medium, since the game medium is spherical, circulation of game medium can be performed more smoothly than when medals are used. In addition, as the game ball, it is conceivable to adopt a pachinko ball normally used in a game arcade. In this case, for example, assuming that five pachinko balls correspond to the value of one medal of the slot machine (value of holding point = 1), the updating holding score of 5 when the holding points are updated. Double pachinko balls will be moved between the first place and the second place. In addition, pachinko balls that are viewed from the see-through window provided between the first place and the second place are "show balls" exclusively for showing the player that the points are being updated. Will function as

  (42) In the embodiment described above, the launcher (not shown) uses a motor as a drive source. Alternatively, a solenoid may be used as a drive source. In that case, the plunger position in the non-excitation state of the solenoid is detected by the origin sensor as the origin, and the payout control unit 17 determines various errors described above based on the detection output of the origin sensor. Good.

  (43) Loading the pachinko balls by driving the transport motor at the time of installation of the pachinko machine 2 by operating the ball removal switch provided on the relay substrate or the like, and the ball of the enclosed ball by driving the deburring motor You may remove it. Also, instead of or in addition to it, the IR light receiving unit 320 of the card unit 3 receives infrared rays emitted by operating the remote control possessed by the staff of the game arcade from the card unit 3 to the pachinko machine 2 The delivery control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2 receives a predetermined command, and the delivery control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2 drives the transport motor at the time of installation of the pachinko machine 2, loading of pachinko balls, and sealing by driving the ball removal motor Ball removal may be performed.

  (44) In the above-mentioned embodiment, both CU side and P base side monitor game information (base value etc.) based on security related information, and at that time, CU side and P base side In the above, it is determined as abnormal based on the same judgment criteria (such as a threshold). However, the present invention is not limited to the same determination criterion, and the abnormality determination may be performed based on different determination criteria (such as a threshold) on the CU side and the P base side. For example, on the P side, abnormality is determined based on the determination criteria (such as a threshold value) incorporated in the program of the gaming machine by default (stored as a fixed value in ROM etc), and on the CU side, nail adjustment etc. Abnormality determination is made based on a determination criterion (such as a threshold) that fluctuates in consideration. On the other hand, on the CU side, abnormality is determined based on the judgment criteria (such as threshold values) incorporated in the program of CU by default (stored as fixed values in ROM etc.), and on the P side, nail adjustment etc. The abnormality determination may be made based on a determination criterion (such as a threshold) which fluctuates in consideration of the above.

  Furthermore, the target of abnormality determination based on the same or different determination criteria (such as threshold) may be made different between the CU side and the P side. For example, on the side of CU, abnormality determination of game information is performed throughout the entire game, on the side of P, for example, an abnormality of some game information such as the number of winnings in a big hit etc. is determined. While performing abnormal judgment (for example, judgment of abnormality of total game information from the time of power on to the present time etc.), short-term abnormality judgment (for example, judgment of abnormality of game information at intervals of 10 minutes) on P side May be used. Conversely, on the P side, the game information of the entire game is determined to be abnormal, and on the CU side, the abnormal state of some game information such as the number of winnings in the big hit is determined, or the P side So while long-term abnormality judgment is performed, short-term abnormality judgment is performed on the CU side, and long-term abnormality judgment (for example, judgment of total game information abnormality from when the power is turned on etc.) On the other hand, on the CU side, short-term abnormality determination (for example, abnormality determination of gaming information at intervals of 10 minutes) may be performed on the CU side.

  (45) In the above embodiment, the security related information is set in conjunction with the upper server 801, CU3 and the gaming machine (see FIGS. 98 to 100), but the upper server 801 and CU3 are used. , CU3 and the gaming machine may be set separately. When setting is performed in conjunction with the higher-level server 801, CU3, and the gaming machine, if there is a delay in communication in any of the three parties, it is also possible to send communication in other places. The problem arises that the setting takes a long time as a whole. However, in the case where the upper server 801 and CU3, CU3 and the gaming machine are set separately, it is possible to prevent the problem that the communication delay spreads to other places.

  (46) In the embodiment described above, for example, as shown in FIG. 26, when playing with a card with a prepaid balance of 1000 and a ball count of 50 (game balls), all ball counts (game balls) The number of withdrawals from the prepaid balance 125 is added to 50, and all of them (175 balls) can be used for gaming. However, instead of that, CU3 stores all 50 or a part (for example, 30) of the number of balls as a value that can not be used for gaming, and 125 of the withdrawals from the prepaid balance or the number of balls The remaining portion (for example, 20) excluding the part can be used for the game, and when the game is ended, the number of game balls (for example, 500) at the time of the operation can be held by operating the count button provided on CU3 or P stand 2. The total number of balls is added to all 50 or a part (for example, 30) of the number of balls to make the total number of balls, and by operating the return button 322, the total number of points held is added to the card (or associated with the card) May be controlled to eject the card.

  (47) In the present embodiment, the game prohibition request is transmitted from the CU side to the gaming machine. However, instead of this, the gaming machine side may determine the number of gaming balls = 0, in which case the gaming machine may be voluntarily set to the game prohibition state, and the result may be notified to the CU. Further, in the present embodiment, the gaming prohibition request and the clearing request are managed on the CU side and transmitted from the CU to the gaming machine, but conversely, these managements are performed on the gaming machine side. The game machine side may take the initiative to determine whether or not to set the clear state, and notify the CU of the result. Further, in the present embodiment, management of points is performed on the CU side, but management of points may be performed on the game machine side. For example, the gaming machine constantly updates the various information (including the number of game balls (points)) shown in FIG. 6 during the game, and collectively transmits the information to the CU at the end of the game. The player may record the game ball number information of the cards in a discriminable manner and eject the card.

  (48) The floating ball processing waiting time on the P side and the floating ball processing waiting time on the CU side described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 may be different. For example, it is conceivable that the floating ball processing waiting time of P units is set to 15 seconds, while the floating ball processing waiting time on the CU side is set to a longer time (for example, 20 seconds).

  In addition, when the floating ball processing waiting time-out has timed out before receiving the game completion ON from P unit, the CU controls (i) notification (error notification) to that effect with a display or other lamps. (Ii) ignoring the possibility of floating balls and forcibly determining the game result with the current number of game balls and discharging the card, (iii) not discharging the card, Any one of the processes may be performed. Moreover, you may use together said (i) and (ii) or (iii). Further, regarding (ii), although the card is ejected, processing different from that when the game completion ON is received may be performed. The different processing may be, for example, any processing that can specify that the normal processing has not been performed, in addition to the notification of (i) described above. Directly record data that means that regular processing was not performed for the card of the player who was playing (or store it in association with the card ID in the management computer, instead of directly recording it on the card) Or the like may be used. Furthermore, it may be processing of directly recording on the card data indicating that the normal processing has not been executed and storing the data in association with the card ID in the management computer.

  The following will list the effects obtained from combinations of various means and the like included in the present embodiment.

(1-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) which can play a game by holding points and to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, etc.) owned by the player Alternatively, the gaming system includes a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) which adds points by using the number of balls and is communicably connected (connector and connection wiring) to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
Specification means (microcomputer for game machine control, number-of-additions ball counter, number-of-balls counter) for specifying the amount of change of points (number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) according to use for games and occurrence of winnings;
Information transmitting means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting update information (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) capable of specifying the amount of change to the game apparatus;
The gaming device is
Main point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing the number of game balls);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
And a point update means (main control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the main point storage means based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

(1-2) The gaming machine is
Secondary point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points;
And D. point updating means (disbursement control unit 17) for updating the points stored in the additional point storage means according to the amount of change.
The game machine performs game control based on the points stored in the additional point storage means (when the number of game balls counter reaches 0, the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped),
When the signal for requesting the end of the game (the operation signal of the return button 322) is input, the gaming device determines the points stored in the main point storage means as the points at the end of the game. It includes point determination means (main control unit 323; FIG. 31).

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are decided on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point deciding function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much It can be suppressed.

(1-3) The gaming device is
A point display unit (display 312) for displaying the points stored in the main point storage means;
Instruction information transmitting means (CU communication control unit 80) for transmitting information (operation instruction) for instructing transmission of the update information to the gaming machine;
The gaming machine is
Including instruction information receiving means (payment control unit 17) for receiving information for instructing transmission of the update information;
Each time the information transmission means receives the information for instructing transmission of the update information, the information transmission means updates the amount of change (current ball related information) from the previous reception of the information to the current reception. The information is transmitted (values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter in FIG. 6, FIG. 29).

  According to such a configuration, in response to an instruction from the gaming device, the gaming machine transmits, to the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change based on the previous transmission of the update information. . For this reason, the gaming device can perform the latest point management by updating the points by the update information transmitted one by one.

(1-4) The information transmitting means transmits the points (the value of the game ball counter) stored in the additional point storage means to the gaming apparatus (the value of the game ball counter of FIG. 6) , Figure 29),
The gaming device is
It includes a determination means (FIG. 6; determination of coincidence of the number of game balls) for determining the consistency between the points stored in the main point storage means and the points stored in the additional point storage means. ,
When it is determined by the determination means that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification by the display unit 312, recovery processing is performed, and the data correction request Bit 2 is “1” data (playing ball correction ON) And a communication start request including data of the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P unit, and correction of matching the storage of the number of game balls in the P unit with the number of game balls of the CU is performed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored in the gaming machine are not consistent with the points stored in the gaming apparatus. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to cope with the processing when there is an inconsistency.

(1-5) The instruction information transmitting unit stores, when the determination unit determines that there is a mismatch, the main point storage unit stores the points stored by the additional point storage unit. Sending correction information (a communication start request including the game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) for correcting to a point to the gaming machine,
The instruction information transmission means transmits the correction information to the gaming machine (transmission of a communication start request including the game ball correction ON and the number of game balls to P).
The gaming machine is a point correction means for correcting the points stored in the additional point storage means based on the correction information. Correction according to.

  According to such a configuration, an abnormality occurs in the size of the memory point stored on the game machine side due to an illegal act or other causes, and the memory point stored on the game apparatus side and the game machine side Even when the stored points do not match, the points stored on the gaming machine can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming apparatus side.

(1-6) The gaming machine is a ball and ball gaming machine (pachinko machine 2),
The information transmitting means sequentially transmits the update information at intervals shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball (one shot at 0.6 s).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at intervals shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball, the change amount of the points notified by the update information is made as small as possible. As a result, it is possible to finely notify the amount of change in points to the gaming device.

  (1-7) The gaming machine determines whether or not the remaining number of remaining points required to continue the game based on the points stored in the additional point storage means (the payout control means (payout control) Part 17 (FIG. 30).

  According to such a configuration, since the transmission of the update information is not in time at the time of determination, the points stored in the gaming apparatus and the actual points (the number of gaming balls stored in the gaming machine) and Even if there is a gap between them, it is possible to make a judgment based on the actual points.

(1-8) The instruction information transmitting unit transmits information for instructing to prohibit the game to the gaming machine (operation instruction (with prohibition request) in FIGS. 31 to 35).
A gaming prohibition means (the payout control unit 17 stops the driving of the striking ball firing motor 18) for making the gaming by the points not be performed when the gaming machine receives the information for instructing the gaming prohibition. 33 to 35) are included.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming apparatus can control the prohibition of the game by the gaming machine.

(1-9) The instruction information transmitting means transmits information for instructing the gaming machine to set the value of the points stored in the additional point storage means to the initial value (FIG. 31, FIG. 31) Operation instruction (clear request present)) of FIG.
In the gaming machine, the additional point storage means stores the information based on receipt of information for instructing the value of the points stored in the additional point storage means to be an initial value. 31 includes point initialization means (FIG. 31, FIG. 65 (the payout control unit 17 initializes the value of the game ball counter to 0)) that sets the value of the point to the initial value.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to instruct the gaming apparatus side to initialize the points stored in the gaming machine.

(1-10) A player is provided with a connection portion (connector) for communicably connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) capable of playing a game with points and having points added in accordance with occurrence of a prize, A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) which adds points by using the gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, or number of balls stored) of possession,
Point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing "the number of game balls");
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving from the gaming machine update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize;
And a point update means (main control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

  (1-11) Points that the points stored in the point storage means are determined as points at the end of the game when a signal (operation signal of the return button 322) requesting the end of the game is input The determination means (main control unit 323; FIG. 31) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are decided on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point deciding function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much It can be suppressed.

(1-12) When points received by the gaming machine are received from the gaming machine according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize, the received points and the point storage means Including determination means for determining the consistency with the stored points (FIG. 6; determination of match of the number of game balls),
When it is determined by the determination means that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification by the display unit 312, recovery processing is performed, and the data correction request Bit 2 is “1” data (playing ball correction ON) And a communication start request including data of the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P unit, and correction of matching the storage of the number of game balls in the P unit with the number of game balls of the CU is performed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored in the gaming machine are not consistent with the points stored in the gaming apparatus. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to cope with the processing when there is an inconsistency.

  (1-13) The correction information for correcting the points stored in the gaming machine to the points stored in the point storage means when the determination means determines that the points are inconsistent It includes correction information transmission means (transmission of game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) to be transmitted to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, an abnormality occurs in the size of the memory point stored on the game machine side due to an illegal act or other causes, and the memory point stored on the game apparatus side and the game machine side Even when the stored points do not match, the points stored on the gaming machine can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming apparatus side.

(1-14) The gaming machine sequentially transmits the information for instructing transmission of the update information at intervals shorter than a firing time interval (one shot at 0.6 s) of gaming balls in the gaming machine. Send to
The point update means sequentially updates the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information received sequentially (main control unit 323, FIG. 29).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball, the game device has the change in the points on the game machine side reflected finely. Point management becomes possible.

(A1) The present invention is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) having a first control means (LSI 799 having a payout control unit 17) and a second control means (main control board 16), in which a player plays a game. A gaming apparatus connected communicably to a slot machine 2S) and the gaming machine, and enabling gaming on the gaming machine using a player-owned value (such as balance, balls, number of balls, cash, etc.) A gaming system comprising (card unit 3),
The first control means stores first identification information (dispense chip ID) for identifying the first control means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104).
The second control means stores second identification information (main chip ID) for identifying the second control means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104), and responds to a request from the first control means And transmits the second identification information stored therein to the first control means (FIG. 78; main chip ID, chip maker code, gaming machine maker code, and gaming machine product code are transmitted as an equipment report response);
The first control means transmits the stored first identification information and the transmitted second identification information to the gaming device (FIG. 16, FIG. 78; received information, payout chip ID, and the like). To the card unit),
The gaming apparatus includes inquiry means (FIG. 16; inquiring apparatus information (such as chip ID) from the upper server) for inquiring the host apparatus about the authenticity of the transmitted first identification information and the second identification information. .

  According to such a configuration, the authenticity of the first identification information for identifying the first control means and the second identification information for identifying the second control means is determined by the inquiry means provided in the game apparatus In order to be inquired by the host device, it is possible to monitor fraudulent acts on both control means of the first control means and the second control means in the gaming machine. Moreover, since the first identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the gaming device, and the second identification information is also transmitted to the gaming device via the first control means, the game for the first identification information It is possible to use the function of transmitting to the device also for transmitting the second identification information to the gaming device.

  (A2) In the gaming system according to the above (a1), the gaming device is a communication stopping means for stopping communication with the gaming machine when the result of the inquiry by the inquiry means is incorrect (FIG. 16; At the time of NG, the following communication is stopped).

  According to such a configuration, communication between the gaming apparatus and the gaming machine is stopped when the upper-level apparatus is inquired about the authenticity of the first identification information and the second identification information and the result is incorrect. It is possible to prevent the problem that the communication continues normally as in the case where there is a possibility that the at least one of the first control means and the second control means is tampered with.

(A3) In the gaming system of (a1) or (a2), the gaming machine is
It is possible to play a game by points (number of game balls), and points are added according to the occurrence of winnings (additional ball number counter of FIG. 6, adding number counter of FIG. 104, FIG. 29; gaming ball according to winnings) Add 3 to the number 1010),
Specification means for specifying the amount of change (the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls) of the points according to the use for the game and the occurrence of the winnings (the number of added balls counter and the number of subtracted balls counter in FIG. And subtractive counters),
Information transmitting means (P unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit) for transmitting update information (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device ,
The valuable value includes the points (number of game balls),
The gaming device is
Point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing "the number of game balls");
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
And a point update means (main control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

(A4) In the gaming system according to (a3), the first control means includes the identification means and the information transmission means (the LSI 799 of P platform 2 has an addition ball number counter, a subtraction ball number counter, and P table The S-unit 2S LSI includes a communication control unit 81, and includes an addition number counter, a subtraction number counter, and an S-unit communication control unit),
The second control means is a game control means (main control board 16) for controlling the progress of the game in the game machine.

  According to such a configuration, the specifying means for specifying the amount of change in the points according to the use for the game and the occurrence of the winning, and the information transmitting means for transmitting the update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device The first control means including the second control means and the game control means for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine can be monitored for fraudulent acts.

(A5) Another aspect of the present invention has a first control means (LSI 799 having a payout control unit 17) and a second control means (main control board 16), and the gaming value (balance, owned by the player) A connection unit (connector 20) for communicably connecting to a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that adds points by using balls, number of game balls, cash, etc.), and it is possible to play games by points A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2 or slot machine 2S) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize,
The first control means stores first identification information (dispense chip ID) for identifying the first control means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104).
The second control means stores second identification information (main chip ID) for identifying the second control means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104), and responds to a request from the first control means And transmits the second identification information stored therein to the first control means (FIG. 78; main chip ID, chip maker code, gaming machine maker code, and gaming machine product code are transmitted as an equipment report response);
The first control means inquires the host device of the authenticity of the first identification information and the second identification information (FIG. 16; inquires of the host server about device information (chip ID etc.)) to the gaming device, The stored first identification information and the transmitted second identification information are transmitted (FIG. 16, FIG. 78; notification of the received information and the payout chip ID to the card unit).

  According to such a configuration, the gaming apparatus inquires the host apparatus of the authenticity of the first identification information for identifying the first control means and the second identification information for identifying the second control means. In addition, it is possible to monitor fraudulent acts on both control means of the first control means and the second control means in the gaming machine. Moreover, since the first identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the gaming device, and the second identification information is also transmitted to the gaming device via the first control means, the game for the first identification information It is possible to use the function of transmitting to the device also for transmitting the second identification information to the gaming device.

(B1) In the present invention, a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game, and the gaming machine are communicably connected, and the player-owned valuable value (balance, storage, gaming ball) A gaming system (card unit 3) that enables playing with the gaming machine using a number, cash, etc.), the gaming system comprising:
The gaming device is
Player specific information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player specific information (C-ID etc.) for specifying a player who plays a game;
Player specifying information storage means (the card ID in FIG. 24 and the type are stored, S3 in FIG. 25) storing the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means;
Player identification information transmission control means (card ID in FIG. 24, type P for controlling to transmit the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine when starting a game) Notification, including S3) in FIG.
The gaming machine is
Storage means for storing the player identification information transmitted by the control of the player identification information transmission control means (the received card ID in FIG. 24 and the type stored in the payout control unit, S8 in FIG. 25);
Transmission control means for performing control to transmit the player specifying information stored in the storage means to the gaming device when the game is ended (received from the CU when the card of FIG. 31 is inserted, and the payout control portion backs up Sending the C-ID and the type)
In the gaming apparatus, whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information transmitted by the control of the transmission control means and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means 31 includes identification determination means (identification between the stored C-ID in FIG. 31 and the received C-ID).

  According to such a configuration, in the gaming apparatus, the same player is identified by the player identification information transmitted from the gaming machine when ending the game and the player identification information stored at the start of the game. Can be determined.

(B2) In the gaming system according to (b1), the gaming machine is
First control means (payment control unit 17) including the storage means and the transmission control means;
Second control means (effect for display device) receiving the player specifying information transmitted by the control of the player specifying information transmission control means via the first control means and storing the received player specifying information Control substrate 53),
After transmitting the player specifying information under the control of the transmission control means, the first control means erases the player specifying information stored in the storage means (the payout control unit in FIG. 31 is in the process of card return OFF) Clear the card ID and type that were backed up, clear the card ID and type in Figure 94),
The second control means continues storing and holding the player specifying information even after the storing of the player specifying information is performed by the first control means (even if the [note] card in FIG. 94 is returned) The card ID and type backed up by the effect control board for display when the card is inserted are not deleted).

  According to such a configuration, when the transmission control means transmits the player specifying information to the game apparatus when the game is ended, the storage of the player specifying information in the first control means is erased, or the second control is performed. In the means, for example, the player specifying information is stored and held continuously even after the storage of the player specifying information in the first control means is erased, for example, the player who has ended the game and the game started thereafter It is possible to perform determination control using the player specifying information after the end of the game, such as determining the identity with the player.

(B3) In the gaming system according to (b2), the gaming machine further includes a third control means (main control board 16),
The first control means stores first identification information (dispense chip ID) for identifying the first control means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104).
The third control means stores third identification information (main chip ID etc.) for identifying the third control means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104), and identification information from the first control means Of the third identification information stored in response to the request (device information request of FIG. 78) to the first control means (main chip ID of FIG. 78, chip maker code, game machine maker code, game machine Send product code as equipment report response),
The first control means transmits the stored first identification information and the transmitted third identification information to the gaming device (the information received in FIG. 78 and the payout chip ID are transferred to the card unit Notice),
The gaming apparatus includes inquiry means (inquiry of the upper server shown in FIG. 16 for the device information (chip ID)) for inquiring the host apparatus of the authenticity of the first identification information and the third identification information.

  According to such a configuration, the authenticity of the first identification information for identifying the first control means and the third identification information for identifying the third control means is determined by the inquiry means provided in the game apparatus In order to be inquired by the host device, it is possible to monitor fraudulent acts on both control means of the first control means and the second control means in the gaming machine. Moreover, since the first identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the gaming device, and the third identification information is also transmitted to the gaming device via the first control means, the game for the first identification information It is possible to share the function of transmitting to the device to the transmission of the third identification information to the gaming device.

  (B4) In the gaming system according to (b3), the gaming device is a communication stopping means for stopping communication with the gaming machine when the result of the inquiry by the inquiry means is incorrect. The host server is inquired about the device information (chip ID), and when the result is NG, the subsequent communication is stopped.

  According to such a configuration, communication between the gaming apparatus and the gaming machine is stopped when the upper-level apparatus is inquired about the authenticity of the first identification information and the third identification information and as a result is incorrect. It is possible to prevent the problem that the communication continues normally as in the case where the at least one of the first control means and the third control means may be tampered with.

(B5) In the gaming system according to any one of (b1) to (b4), the gaming machine is:
It is possible to play a game by points (number of game balls), and points are added according to the occurrence of winnings (additional ball number counter of FIG. 6, adding number counter of FIG. 104, FIG. 29; gaming ball according to winnings) Add 3 to the number 1010),
Specification means for specifying the amount of change (the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls) of the points according to the use for the game and the occurrence of the winnings (the number of added balls counter and the number of subtracted balls counter in FIG. And subtractive counters),
Information transmitting means (P unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit) for transmitting update information (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device ,
The valuable value includes the points (number of game balls),
The gaming device is
Point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing "the number of game balls");
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
And a point update means (main control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

(B6) In the gaming system according to (b5), the gaming machine includes display means (display 54) for displaying information;
The first control means (the LSI 799 having the payout control unit 17) including the storage means and the transmission control means is the identification means and the information transmission means (the LSI 799 of P base 2 is the addition ball number counter and the subtraction ball number) The S-unit 2S LSI includes a counter and a P-unit communication control unit 81, and includes an addition counter, a subtraction counter, and an S-unit communication control unit.
A second control means (a main control board for receiving the player identification information transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means via the first control means and storing the received player identification information 16) is a display control means (display effect control board 53) for controlling the display means.

  According to such a configuration, not only the first control means but also the display control means can perform display control using the player specifying information in order to store the player specifying information.

(B7) Another aspect of the present invention is provided with a connector (connector 380) for communicably connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by the player, and the player is owned A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that enables playing in the gaming machine using a valuable value (balance, storage balls, number of gaming balls, cash, etc.),
Player specific information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player specific information (C-ID etc.) for specifying a player who plays a game;
Player specifying information storage means (the card ID in FIG. 24 and the type are stored, S3 in FIG. 25) storing the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means;
Player identification information transmission control means (card ID in FIG. 24, type P for controlling to transmit the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine when starting a game) , And S3 of FIG. 25),
The player identification information transmitted when ending the game from the gaming machine storing the player identification information transmitted by the control of the player identification information transmission control means, and stored in the player identification information storage means The same determination means (in which the stored C-ID in FIG. 31 and the received C-ID are determined to determine whether the same player is specified or not) based on the specified player identification information and including.

  According to such a configuration, in the gaming apparatus, the same player is identified by the player identification information transmitted from the gaming machine when ending the game and the player identification information stored at the start of the game. Can be determined.

(B8) In the gaming apparatus of (b7) above, the valuable value owned by the player includes points (number of gaming balls),
Furthermore, the gaming device
Point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing "the number of game balls");
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving from the gaming machine update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize;
And a point update means (main control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

(C1) In the present invention, a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game, and the gaming machine are communicably connected to each other, and the player-owned valuable value (balance, storage, gaming balls) A gaming system (card unit 3) that enables playing with the gaming machine using a number, cash, etc.), the gaming system comprising:
The gaming device is
Player specific information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player specific information (C-ID etc.) for specifying a player who plays a game;
Player identification information transmission control means (card ID in FIG. 24, type P for controlling to transmit the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine when starting a game) Notification, including S3) in FIG.
The gaming machine is
Player identification information storage means for storing the player identification information transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means (the received card ID in FIG. 24 and the type are stored by the payout control unit, S8 in FIG. 25) When,
Based on the fact that the player identification information is transmitted by the control of the player identification information transmission control means, the transmitted player identification information and the player identification stored in the player identification information storage means And an identical determination unit (S95 in FIG. 25) for performing an identical determination process to determine whether the same player is specified based on the information.

  According to such a configuration, when the player specifying information for specifying the player who plays the game is read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information is transmitted from the gaming apparatus to the gaming machine In the gaming machine, the player specifying information is stored, and thereafter, when the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means is transmitted from the gaming apparatus, the transmitted player In order to perform the same determination processing to determine whether or not the same player is specified based on the specific information and the player specific information that has already been stored, the sameness between the previous player and the current player Can be determined, and the inconvenience that they are regarded as the same player despite being different players can be prevented.

(C2) In the gaming system of (c1), the gaming machine is
First control means (payout control unit 17) for receiving the player identification information transmitted by the control of the player identification information transmission control means;
The player identification information including the player identification information storage unit is received via control of the player identification information transmission control unit via the first control unit, and the received player identification information is received. And second control means (display effect control board 53) to be stored in the player specific information storage means.

  According to such a configuration, the same determination processing is performed to determine whether or not the same player is specified using the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage unit of the second control unit. Therefore, the sameness between the previous player and the current player can be determined, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that they are regarded as the same player despite being different players.

(C3) In the gaming system of (c2), the gaming machine further includes a third control means (main control board 16)
The first control means stores first identification information (dispense chip ID) for identifying the first control means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104).
The third control means stores third identification information (main chip ID etc.) for identifying the third control means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104), and identification information from the first control means Of the third identification information stored in response to the request (device information request of FIG. 78) to the first control means (main chip ID of FIG. 78, chip maker code, game machine maker code, game machine Send product code as equipment report response),
The first control means transmits the stored first identification information and the transmitted third identification information to the gaming device (the information received in FIG. 78 and the payout chip ID are transferred to the card unit Notice),
The gaming apparatus includes inquiry means (inquiry of the upper server shown in FIG. 16 for the device information (chip ID)) for inquiring the host apparatus of the authenticity of the first identification information and the third identification information.

  According to such a configuration, the authenticity of the first identification information for identifying the first control means and the third identification information for identifying the third control means is determined by the inquiry means provided in the game apparatus In order to be inquired by the host device, it is possible to monitor fraudulent acts on both control means of the first control means and the third control means in the gaming machine. Moreover, since the first identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the gaming device, and the third identification information is also transmitted to the gaming device via the first control means, the game for the first identification information It is possible to share the function of transmitting to the device to the transmission of the third identification information to the gaming device.

  (C4) In the gaming system of (c3), the gaming device is a communication stopping means for stopping communication with the gaming machine when the result of the inquiry by the inquiry means is incorrect. The host server is inquired about the device information (chip ID), and when the result is NG, the subsequent communication is stopped.

  According to such a configuration, communication between the gaming apparatus and the gaming machine is stopped when the upper-level apparatus is inquired about the authenticity of the first identification information and the third identification information and as a result is incorrect. It is possible to prevent the problem that the communication continues normally as in the case where the at least one of the first control means and the third control means may be tampered with.

(C5) In the gaming system according to any one of (c1) to (c4), the gaming machine is:
It is possible to play a game by points (number of game balls), and points are added according to the occurrence of winnings (additional ball number counter of FIG. 6, adding number counter of FIG. 104, FIG. 29; gaming ball according to winnings) Add 3 to the number 1010),
Specification means for specifying the amount of change (the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls) of the points according to the use for the game and the occurrence of the winnings (the number of added balls counter and the number of subtracted balls counter in FIG. And subtractive counters),
Information transmitting means (P unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit) for transmitting update information (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device ,
The valuable value includes the points (number of game balls),
The gaming device is
Point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing "the number of game balls");
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
And a point update means (main control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

(C6) In the gaming system according to (c5), the gaming machine includes display means (display 54) for displaying information;
The first control means (the LSI 799 having the payout control unit 17) for receiving the player identification information transmitted by the control of the player identification information transmission control means includes the identification means and the information transmission means (P The LSI 2 of the stand 2 includes an addition ball number counter, a subtraction ball number counter, and a P unit communication control unit 81, and the S unit 2S LSI includes an addition number counter, a subtraction number counter, and an S unit communication control unit) ,
The player identification information including the player identification information storage unit is received via control of the player identification information transmission control unit via the first control unit, and the received player identification information is received. The second control means (main control board 16) stored in the player specific information storage means is a display control means (display effect control board 53) for controlling the display means.

  According to such a configuration, not only the first control means but also the display control means can perform display control using the player specifying information in order to store the player specifying information.

(C7) Another aspect of the present invention is to communicably connect with a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that enables player-owned value-added balance, balls, number of balls, cash, etc., to be used for gaming. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) provided with the connection portion (connector 20) of
Receiving means (FIG. 24, FIG. 25, FIG. 5, P unit communication control unit 81) for receiving player specifying information (C-ID etc.) for specifying a player who plays a game when starting a game;
Player specifying information storage means (the received card ID in FIG. 24 and the type stored in the payout control unit, S8 in FIG. 25) for storing the player specifying information received by the receiving means;
It is determined whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information received by the receiving means and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storing means (FIG. 25). S95) and equipped.

  According to such a configuration, when the player specifying information specifying the player who plays the game is transmitted to the gaming machine, the gaming machine stores the player specifying information, and then the player specifying When the information is transmitted, the same determination processing is performed to determine whether or not the same player is specified by the transmitted player specifying information and the already stored player specifying information. Therefore, the sameness between the previous player and the current player can be determined, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that they are regarded as the same player despite being different players.

(D1) The present invention is a connection for communicably connecting to a gaming apparatus (CU) that adds points (number of gaming balls) using gaming value (balance, storage, cash, etc.) owned by a player. It is a gaming machine (P unit) that includes a unit, and can play ball and ball games with points, and that points are added according to the occurrence of a prize in a winning area provided in the game area,
Specifying means (disbursement control unit 17, addition ball number counter, subtraction ball number counter) for specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize;
Update information transmitting means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting update information (the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) capable of specifying the amount of change to the game apparatus;
Undetermined ball number specifying means (game number ball counter, FIG. 68) for specifying the number of undecided balls for which the presence or absence of winning has not been determined among the balls fired to the game area;
Release prohibiting means (SS1, SS2, FIG. 31 in FIG. 69) for prohibiting the firing of a ball when game prohibition request information (game prohibition ON) requesting the game prohibition is received from the gaming apparatus;
Game end information transmission means (SS10 in FIG. 69, FIG. 31) for transmitting game end information (game completion ON) indicating the end of the game to the gaming device based on the reception of the game prohibition request information. Including
The game end information transmission means, when receiving the game prohibition request information, when the undecided ball is in the undecided state, the game is ended when the undecided ball is in the confirmed state. Information is transmitted (NO in SS3 of FIG. 69, and then the playing ball number counter is decremented in SS9, and as a result, it becomes YES in SS3 and proceeds to SS10) while a predetermined fixed waiting period (wait, floating ball processing timer Even when the indeterminate state continues even after the passage of the indeterminate state, the game end information is transmitted after the elapse of the indeterminate waiting period (SS13, SS14, SS10 in FIG. 69),
When the undetermined state continues until the elapse of the predetermined fixed waiting period, the undetermined ball number specified by the undetermined ball number specifying unit is initialized after the fixed waiting period has elapsed. Means (SS14 in FIG. 69).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can complete the processing of the end of the game promptly when the game is not performed while the processing of the undecided ball can be performed.

(D2) In the gaming machine according to (d1),
The specifying means specifies the amount of change in points due to the occurrence of a prize when the prize is generated by the undetermined ball while the firing of the ball is prohibited by the release prohibiting means (SS6 in FIG. 69) ,
The update information transmission means is a game in which the update information capable of specifying the amount of change is specified when the amount of change in points is specified by the specifying means while the firing of the ball is prohibited by the release prohibiting means It transmits to the device for (SS7 of FIG. 69).

  According to the above configuration, even when a winning occurs in the unconfirmed state, it is possible to transmit information capable of specifying the amount of change in points based on the winning to the gaming device, and the gaming device side can obtain accurate information. It becomes possible to grasp.

(D3) In the gaming machine according to (d1) or (d2),
Point storage means (the game ball number counter in FIG. 6) for storing points;
The point updating means (refer to FIG. 6, payout control unit 17) for updating the points stored in the point storage means according to the amount of change;
The undetermined ball number initialization means specifies the undetermined ball number specifying means after the predetermined period has elapsed even when the state where the number of points stored in the point storage means is 0 continues for a predetermined period. The number of undetermined balls is initialized (see FIG. 68).

  According to the above configuration, in the situation where it is possible to determine that the state of the number of points of 0 has passed for a predetermined period and it is possible to determine that the state where the game is not being performed continues, initialize the number of undetermined balls Thus, it is possible to shift to the game completion state as quickly as possible.

(D4) In the gaming machine of (d1) to (d3),
After the number of undetermined balls specified by the undetermined ball number specifying means is initialized by the undetermined ball number initializing means, and a prize due to the unconfirmed ball occurs, the winning of the relevant prize after the game is over The game further includes an after-game change amount storage means for storing a change amount of points according to the occurrence (SS11 and SS12 in FIG. 69).

  According to the above configuration, even when a winning occurs after the initialization of the number of undetermined balls, the amount of change in points based on the winning is stored, so that the player can later determine based on the storage. It is possible to correct the point of the mark to an appropriate value.

(D5) In the gaming machine of (d1) to (d4),
A game uncompleted information transmission unit (SS4 in FIG. 69) that transmits game incomplete information (game completion OFF) indicating the uncompleted state of the game to the gaming apparatus when the game prohibition request information is received and the game is not determined yet. )including.

  According to the above configuration, by transmitting the game uncompleted information, it is possible to notify the gaming device that the undecided state is established.

(D6) In the gaming machine of (d3) to (d5),
Point initialization means for initializing points stored in the point storage means when initialization request information (with clear request) is received from the gaming device after transmission of the game end information Fig. 31; Clear request received, clear memory of the number of game balls).

  According to the above configuration, in order to wait for reception of the initialization request information and initialize the points, for example, compared to the case where the points are initialized early upon transmission of the game end information. , It becomes possible to perform point processing according to the instruction of the game device.

(E1) In the present invention, a ball game is made possible by the use of points (number of game balls), and a point is added according to the occurrence of a prize in a winning area provided in the game area (P units) And a connection unit for communicably connecting to the game device (CU), which adds points by using gaming value (balance, storage, cash, etc.) owned by a player,
Point storage means (area for storing the number of game balls on the CU side in FIG. 6) for storing points;
Information receiving means (main control section 323) for receiving from the gaming machine update information (number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize;
Point updating means (main control unit 323, FIG. 6) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information;
Game prohibition request information transmitting means (SS51 in FIG. 70) for transmitting game prohibition request information requesting game prohibition to the gaming machine when an operation to end the game is detected (SS50 in FIG. 70);
After the game prohibition request information has been transmitted, a determination standby period (wait time, shown in FIG. 70) is determined in consideration of the time required to determine the presence or absence of a prize by the ball after the ball is fired in the gaming area. Waiting for reception of game end information (game completion ON) indicating the end of the game from the gaming machine until the lapse of the floating ball processing waiting time of SS 58, and receiving the game end information, the point storage means Game result determination means (YES in SS 53, SS 55) for determining points stored by the game result as game results.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to promptly complete the processing of the end of the game when the gaming machine is in a state where the game is not performed, although it is possible to cope with the processing of the unconfirmed ball on the gaming machine side.

(E2) In the gaming apparatus according to (e1),
Recording medium reception means (card insertion / discharge port 309) for receiving a recording medium (member card, visitor card) in which information capable of specifying the game value (balance) owned by the player is recorded;
Recording medium discharge processing means (SS 55 in FIG. 70) for discharging the recording medium when an operation to end the game is detected,
The game result determination means associates the points stored in the point storage means with the accepted recording media when the game end information is received, thereby the point storage means. Determine the points stored by the player as game results (SS 55 in FIG. 70),
The recording medium discharge processing means discharges the recording medium which has been associated with the points stored in the point storage means by the game result determination means (SS 55 in FIG. 70).

  According to such a configuration, the game result can be specified by the recording medium in which the information capable of specifying the game value owned by the player is recorded.

(E3) In the gaming apparatus according to (e1) or (e2),
The point update means stores the point storage means based on the update information received from the transmission of the game prohibition request information to the reception of the game end information. Update the points (SS59, SS60 in FIG. 70).

  According to such a configuration, even when a winning is generated on the gaming machine side in the unconfirmed state, the gaming apparatus side can receive points to receive update information based on the winning and update the points. It becomes possible to grasp information accurately.

(E4) In the gaming apparatus according to (e1) to (e3),
The initialization request information transmitting means (FIG. 70) transmits initialization request information for requesting initialization of the points stored in the gaming machine to the gaming machine when the game end information is received. SS 54) is included.

  According to such a configuration, in order to initialize the points stored on the gaming machine side by transmitting the initialization request information, initialization management of the points stored on the gaming machine side is performed on the gaming apparatus side. It is possible to

(F1) In the present invention, it is possible to play games with points (the number of game balls, points), and a game machine (P, S) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a player's possession A gaming system including: a gaming apparatus (CU) connected to the gaming machine so as to be communicably connected to the gaming machine, while adding points by using gaming value (balance, storage, cash, etc.) of
The gaming apparatus includes mode switching command information transmission means (see FIG. 73) for transmitting mode switching command information (mode change request) to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is capable of playing a game based on the received mode switching command information, an operating mode (operating mode for providing a player with a game) and a non-operating mode (FIGS. 8 to 8). 10: Mode switching means for switching to any of maintenance mode, test mode and test hitting mode (FIGS. 11, 73, 80, 96; payout control unit 17, main control board 16, effect control board for display device 53) Including
The mode switching means operates a maintenance mode (see FIG. 8) capable of setting parameters when collecting gaming history data of the player in the business mode, and operates the gaming machine partially to make the operation normal. Of a plurality of types of non-business modes including a test mode (see FIG. 9) which can be confirmed for each part, the non-business mode is switched to one based on the mode switching command information.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine receives the mode switching command information from the gaming apparatus and changes the mode, so that the degree of cooperation between the gaming apparatus and the gaming machine with respect to the mode switching is high for gaming. It is possible to provide a system. Moreover, by switching to the maintenance mode, it becomes possible to set parameters when collecting gaming history data of the player in the business mode, and by switching to the test mode, the gaming machine is operated partially to make each operation normal. It is possible to confirm each part.

(F2) The present invention is provided with a connection portion for communicably connecting to a gaming apparatus that adds points by using gaming value (balance, storage, cash, etc.) owned by a player, It is a gaming machine (P unit, S unit) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize,
Mode switching command information receiving means (see FIG. 73) for receiving predetermined mode switching command information (mode change request) from the gaming apparatus;
When the mode switching command information is received by the mode switching command information receiving means, a business mode in which the player can play a game based on the received mode switching command information Mode switching means (FIG. 11, FIG. 73, FIG. 80, FIG. 96; payout) for switching between business mode to provide and non-business mode (FIG. 8 to FIG. 10; maintenance mode, test mode, Control unit 17, main control board 16, effect control board for display 53),
The mode switching means may operate a maintenance mode (see FIG. 8) capable of setting parameters for collecting game data of the player in the business mode, and operating the gaming machine partially for normality of operation. Of a plurality of types of non-business modes including a test mode (see FIG. 9) which can be confirmed for each part, switching to the non-business mode based on the mode switching command information is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can provide a gaming machine having a high degree of cooperation with the gaming apparatus regarding mode switching in order to receive mode switching command information from the gaming apparatus and change the mode. It becomes. Moreover, by switching to the maintenance mode, it becomes possible to set parameters when collecting gaming history data of the player in the business mode, and by switching to the test mode, the gaming machine is operated partially to make each operation normal. It is possible to confirm each part.

(F3) In the gaming system according to (f1),
The mode switching means switches to the test mode on the condition that a gaming apparatus for a test mode is connected to the gaming machine (see FIG. 9).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent erroneous switching to the test mode in a state where a normal gaming device used at the time of business is connected to the gaming machine and the game is provided to the player.

(F4) In the gaming system according to (f1) or (f3),
A test game for confirming the collection status of gaming history data based on setting parameters in the maintenance mode is possible (see FIG. 8).
The mode switching means does not switch from the maintenance mode to another mode until the result of the test game is determined (see FIG. 8; termination condition).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the mode is switched while the result of the test game is undecided, and the mode of the switched destination is affected by the undecided part.

(F5) In the gaming system according to (f4),
The gaming machine is
Gaming history data storage means (non-operating mode gaming history data storage unit) for storing gaming history data based on the test game in the maintenance mode;
A game history initialization means (see FIG. 8) for initializing storage of the game history data storage means when the maintenance mode is switched to another mode.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the gaming history in the maintenance mode affects the gaming history in the mode after the maintenance mode is switched.

(F6) In the gaming system according to (f1), (f3), (f4), or (f5),
The gaming machine is
Specifying means for specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize (additional ball number counter in FIG. 6, subtraction ball number counter, addition number counter in FIG. 104, subtraction number counter);
Update information transmitting means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104, payout control unit 17) for transmitting update information (the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) capable of specifying the amount of change to the game apparatus;
The gaming device is
Point storage means for storing points (an area for storing the number of gaming balls on the CU side in FIG. 6, an area for storing points on the CU side in FIG. 104);
Information receiving means (main control unit 323) for receiving from the gaming machine update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize;
The point updating means (main control unit 323, FIG. 6, FIG. 104) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information;
The mode switching command information transmitting unit transmits mode switching command information for instructing switching to the maintenance mode on condition that no point is stored in the point storage unit (see FIGS. 8 and 73). ).

  According to such a configuration, since the switching instruction to the maintenance mode is performed on condition that there is no point storage, if there is a point and the player is playing a game, the operation mode is erroneously made from the business mode. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of switching to the maintenance mode.

(F7) In the gaming system according to (f6),
The update information transmission means does not transmit the update information to the gaming device in the non-business mode (see FIGS. 8 to 10).

  According to such a configuration, in the non-business mode, there is no need to manage the update information on the gaming device side, so that the management burden on the gaming device side can be reduced.

(F8) In the gaming system according to (f1), (f3) to (f7),
In the test mode, it is possible to individually check the operation of the game medium firing mechanism, the point display mechanism for displaying points, and the game medium moving mechanism (see FIG. 9).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to individually check the defect of the gaming machine by using the test mode.

(G1) In the present invention, it is possible to play games with points (the number of game balls, points), and a game machine (P, S) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a player's possession A gaming system including: a gaming apparatus (CU) connected to the gaming machine so as to be communicably connected to the gaming machine, while adding points by using gaming value (balance, storage, cash, etc.) of
The gaming apparatus includes mode switching command information transmission means (see FIG. 73) for transmitting mode switching command information (mode change request) to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is capable of playing a game based on the received mode switching command information, an operating mode (operating mode for providing a player with a game) and a non-operating mode (FIGS. 8 to 8). 10: Mode switching means for switching to any of maintenance mode, test mode and test hitting mode (FIGS. 11, 73, 80, 96; payout control unit 17, main control board 16, effect control board for display device 53) Including
The mode switching means is capable of partially operating the gaming machine to check the normality of operation for each part (see FIG. 9), and a trial hitting mode in which the gaming machine can be tried for trial. Of the plurality of types of non-business modes including (see FIG. 10), switching to the non-business mode based on the mode switching command information.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine receives the mode switching command information from the gaming apparatus and changes the mode, so that the degree of cooperation between the gaming apparatus and the gaming machine with respect to the mode switching is high for gaming. It is possible to provide a system. In addition, by switching to the test mode, it is possible to operate the gaming machine partially to check the normality of the operation for each part, and by switching to the trial hitting mode, it is possible to make a trial hit.

(G2) The present invention is provided with a connection portion for communicably connecting to a gaming apparatus that adds points by using gaming value (balance, storage, cash, etc.) owned by a player, It is a gaming machine (P unit, S unit) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize,
Mode switching command information receiving means (see FIG. 73) for receiving predetermined mode switching command information (mode change request) from the gaming apparatus;
When the mode switching command information is received by the mode switching command information receiving means, a business mode in which the player can play a game based on the received mode switching command information Mode switching means (FIG. 11, FIG. 73, FIG. 80, FIG. 96; payout) for switching between business mode to provide and non-business mode (FIG. 8 to FIG. 10; maintenance mode, test mode, Control unit 17, main control board 16, effect control board for display 53),
The mode switching means is capable of partially operating the gaming machine to check the normality of operation for each part (see FIG. 9), and a trial hitting mode in which the gaming machine can be tried for trial. Of the plurality of types of non-business modes including (see FIG. 10), switching to the non-business mode based on the mode switching command information.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can provide a gaming machine having a high degree of cooperation with the gaming apparatus regarding mode switching in order to receive mode switching command information from the gaming apparatus and change the mode. It becomes. In addition, by switching to the test mode, it is possible to operate the gaming machine partially to check the normality of the operation for each part, and by switching to the trial hitting mode, it is possible to make a trial hit.

(G3) In the gaming system according to (g1),
The mode switching means switches to the test mode on the condition that a gaming apparatus for a test mode is connected to the gaming machine (see FIG. 9).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent erroneous switching to the test mode in a state where a normal gaming device used at the time of business is connected to the gaming machine and the game is provided to the player.

(G4) In the gaming system according to (g1) (g3),
The mode switching means does not switch from the trial mode to another mode until the game result is determined in the trial mode (see FIG. 10; termination condition).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the mode is switched while the result of the test game is undecided, and the mode of the switched destination is affected by the undecided part.

(G5) In the gaming system according to (g4),
The gaming machine is
Game history data storage means (game history data storage unit in non-business mode) for storing game history data based on a trial hit in the trial mode;
Game history initialization means (see FIG. 10) for initializing storage of the game history data storage means when the mode is switched from the trial run mode to another mode.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the game history in the trial mode affects the game history in the mode after the trial mode is switched.

(G6) In the gaming system according to (g1), (g3), (g4), or (g5),
The gaming machine is
Specifying means for specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize (additional ball number counter in FIG. 6, subtraction ball number counter, addition number counter in FIG. 104, subtraction number counter);
Update information transmitting means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104, payout control unit 17) for transmitting update information (the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) capable of specifying the amount of change to the game apparatus;
The gaming device is
Point storage means for storing points (an area for storing the number of gaming balls on the CU side in FIG. 6, an area for storing points on the CU side in FIG. 104);
Information receiving means (main control unit 323) for receiving from the gaming machine update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize;
The point updating means (main control unit 323, FIG. 6, FIG. 104) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information;
The mode switching command information transmitting unit transmits mode switching command information for instructing switching to the trial hitting mode on condition that no point is stored in the point storage unit (see FIGS. 8 and 73). ).

  According to such a configuration, a command to switch to the trial hitting mode is issued on condition that there is no point storage, so if there is a point and the player is playing a game, the operating mode is erroneously made from the business mode. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of switching to the trial driving mode.

(G7) In the gaming system according to (g6),
The update information transmission means does not transmit the update information to the gaming device in the non-business mode (see FIGS. 8 to 10).

  According to such a configuration, in the non-business mode, there is no need to manage the update information on the gaming device side, so that the management burden on the gaming device side can be reduced.

(H1) According to the present invention, a gaming machine in which a player plays a game, and a communicable connection with the gaming machine, the valuable value (balance, number of balls, number of gaming balls, cash, etc.) owned by the player is used. A gaming system comprising: a gaming device (card unit 3) enabling gaming with a gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
Gaming machine side setting storage means (S774) for storing a first setting used to determine whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated by the player playing the game is appropriate;
Game machine side suitability determination means (S827 to S830) for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate based on the settings stored by the game machine side setting storage means;
The gaming device is
A gaming apparatus side setting storage unit (S757) for storing a second setting used to determine whether or not a numerical value of game information generated by a player playing a game is appropriate;
The game apparatus side suitability determination means (S807 to S810) for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate based on the settings stored by the game apparatus side setting storage means.

  According to such a configuration, in order to determine whether or not the numerical value of the gaming information is appropriate in the gaming machine, and to determine whether or not the numerical value of the gaming information is appropriate in the gaming apparatus, the management device While the burden of the management device can be reduced compared with the self-determination of the propriety of the numerical value of the game information, the abnormality determination can be properly performed even when any one of the gaming machine and the gaming device is subjected to fraud Can.

(H2) In the gaming system according to (h1), the gaming machine transmits the gaming information to the gaming device (game number of additive balls in FIG. 6 and FIG. 26; Including addition and subtraction numbers),
The game apparatus side suitability determination means determines whether or not the numerical value of the game information transmitted by the game information transmission means is appropriate (S801 to S807).

  According to such a configuration, for example, the gaming information has not been tampered with at all in the gaming machine, and in the communication part between the gaming machine and the gaming apparatus, the fraudulentness is administered and the gaming information has been altered from the gaming machine to the gaming apparatus Is transmitted, the gaming machine side suitability determination means determines that it is appropriate, but the gaming apparatus side suitability determination means makes an abnormality determination, and it becomes possible to determine against injustice in the communication part .

  (H3) In the gaming apparatus of (h1) or (h2), when the gaming apparatus is determined to be improper by the gaming apparatus side suitability determination means (Y in S810), it is inappropriate The apparatus further includes error transmission means (S812) for transmitting error specification information for specifying the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be to the host device.

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined that the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is incorrect, the error specification for specifying the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be improper is specified. Since the information is transmitted from the gaming device to the higher-level device, the gaming management device can grasp the type of error that has occurred.

(I1) In the present invention, a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game, and the gaming machine are communicably connected, and the player-owned valuable value (balance, storage, gaming balls) A gaming system (card unit 3) that enables playing with the gaming machine using a number, cash, etc.), the gaming system comprising:
The gaming machine is
Communication means (payout control unit 17) for communicating with the gaming device;
Display control means (display control board 53) for performing display control according to the command of the communication means;
The gaming device transmits, to the communication means, update value information specifying the update value of the valuable value and update factor information indicating the update factor of the valuable value (the addition request balls in FIG. 26, FIG. 27, and FIG. 71). Send the number and the required number of balls for subtraction shown in FIGS. 28 and 72 and the CU state shown in FIG. 83),
The communication means updates the valuable value based on the transmitted update value information ("update the number of gaming balls to 175" in FIG. 26 and "update the number of gaming balls to 125" in FIG. 27), Update the game ball number to 700), and transmit the updated value and the transmitted update factor information to the display control means (game ball total number information in FIG. 82 and CU in FIG. 83). Send status and),
The display control means updates and displays the valuable value transmitted in such a manner that the update factor can be recognized based on the transmitted update factor information (determines an addition factor as to whether the ball replay or prepaid consumption shown in FIG. 91). , The screen display of FIG. 97 is performed in such a manner that both can be distinguished),
The communication means transmits the updated value and the transmitted update factor information to the display control means at the timing when the update value information is transmitted from the gaming device (see FIG. 71, the addition request ball). The number of requested addition balls received at the timing when the number is received, the bit during addition display is sent to the effect control board for display, the number of requested subtraction balls received when the number of requested subtraction balls shown in FIG. 72 is received, the bit during subtraction display Send to the effect control board for display).

  According to such a configuration, since the update display of the valuable value is performed in a mode in which the update factor can be recognized based on the update factor information, the player can recognize the factor causing the update, and the player feels uncomfortable. Can be prevented.

  (I2) In the gaming system according to (i1), the display control means executes effect display in which the value is gradually updated in a mode according to the transmitted update factor information (screen display in FIG. 97). The display is performed in which the balls are gradually updated).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the valuable value is updated by the effect display in which the valuable value is gradually updated.

(I3) In the gaming system of the above (i1) or (i2), the gaming machine can play a game with points, and points are added according to the occurrence of winnings (FIG. 29; number of game balls 1010) Add 3 additional balls to),
The valuable value includes the points (number of game balls),
The update factor information is information indicating whether the use is due to the use of the balance as the gaming value owned by the player or the use of the earned value acquired by the player as a gaming value owned by the player (FIG. 83; It is characterized in that addition display of Bit 4 (prepaid lending) and addition display of Bit 5 (replay) included in the CU state are included.

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize whether the use of the balance or the use of the earned value acquired by the game is the update factor based on the update factor information.

(I4) Another aspect of the present invention relates to a communication unit for communicating with a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a player-owned value (such as balance, balls, number of balls, cash, etc.) to be used for gaming. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) including a P-unit communication control unit 81 and an S-unit communication control unit),
Communication means (payout control unit 17) for communicating with the gaming device;
And display control means (display control board 53) for performing display control in accordance with an instruction from the communication means.
The communication means updates the valuable value on the basis of the updated value information specifying the updated value of the valuable value transmitted from the gaming device (“updating the number of gaming balls to 175 in FIG. 26, "Update the number of game balls to 125", "Update the number of game balls to 700" in FIG. 28), Update factor for the display control means, and the factor for updating the valuable value transmitted from the gaming device And update factor information indicating the game number (the game ball total number information of FIG. 82 and the CU state of FIG. 83 are transmitted),
The display control means updates and displays the valuable value transmitted in such a manner that the update factor can be recognized based on the transmitted update factor information (determines an addition factor as to whether the ball replay or prepaid consumption shown in FIG. 91). , The screen display of FIG. 97 is performed in such a manner that both can be distinguished),
The communication means transmits the updated value and the transmitted update factor information to the display control means at the timing when the update value information is transmitted from the gaming device (see FIG. 71, the addition request ball). The number of requested addition balls received at the timing when the number is received, the bit during addition display is sent to the effect control board for display, the number of requested subtraction balls received when the number of requested subtraction balls shown in FIG. 72 is received, the bit during subtraction display Send to the effect control board for display).

  According to such a configuration, since the update display of the valuable value is performed in a mode in which the update factor can be recognized based on the update factor information, the player can recognize the factor causing the update, and the player feels uncomfortable. Can be prevented.

  (I5) In the gaming machine of (i4), the display control means executes effect display in which the value is gradually updated in a mode according to the transmitted update factor information (see screen display in FIG. 97). The display will be made in which the balls are gradually updated).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the valuable value is updated by the effect display in which the valuable value is gradually updated.

(I6) In the gaming machine of (i4) or (i5), the gaming machine can play a game with points, and points are added according to the occurrence of a prize (FIG. 29; Add 3 additional balls),
The valuable value includes the points (number of game balls),
The update factor information is information indicating whether the use is due to the use of the balance as the gaming value owned by the player or the use of the earned value acquired by the player as a gaming value owned by the player (FIG. 83; It is characterized in that addition display of Bit 4 (prepaid lending) and addition display of Bit 5 (replay) included in the CU state are included.

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize whether the use of the balance or the use of the earned value acquired by the game is the update factor based on the update factor information.

(J1) The present invention communicably connects to a gaming apparatus (CU) that adds points (the number of game balls, points) using game-use values (balances, balls, cash, etc.) owned by a player. It is a gaming machine (P unit, S unit) provided with a connection unit for making it possible to play games with points, and to which points are added according to the occurrence of winnings,
Game control means (main control board 16) for controlling the game state;
Predetermined game machine information (number of added balls, number of subtracted balls, number of game balls, number of starting openings 1, 2, number of winnings, etc.) connected communicably to the game apparatus through the connection section and including the amount of change in points. A point control means (disbursement control unit 17) for transmitting the number of times the symbol has been determined, etc., to the game device;
The game control means
First gaming machine information transmission means (FIG. 79; main state control board sends a game state inquiry response to the payout control portion) for transmitting the gaming machine information to the point control means;
Arrival determination means for determining the arrival of the gaming machine information to the point control means based on the predetermined arrival confirmation information (SQN) transmitted from the point control means (FIG. 79; on the main control board side Check the SQN of the platform status query request (see Figure 77),
The point control means is
Second gaming machine information transmitting means (operation response shown in FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 40, etc .; P unit (payout control) for transmitting the gaming machine information transmitted from the gaming control means to the gaming apparatus Sent to CU from section 17),
And an arrival confirmation information transmission unit (FIG. 79; sending a table state inquiry request from the payout control unit to the main control board) for transmitting the arrival confirmation information to the game control unit,
The first gaming machine information transmission means transmits the gaming machine information last time when it is determined that the gaming machine information has not been reached by the arrival determination means, and the new gaming machine information generated since the previous time The information obtained by summing up the gaming machine information not reached yet is transmitted to the point control means (see FIGS. 77 and 79).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the information transmission efficiency while securely retransmitting information regarding the gaming machine connected communicably to the gaming apparatus.

(J2) The gaming machine according to (j1), wherein
The game control means includes an addition number specifying means (specifying the number of winning balls shown in FIG. 75) for specifying an addition number to a point when a winning occurs.
The second gaming machine information transmitting means transmits information capable of specifying the added number specified by the added number specifying means as the gaming machine information to the gaming apparatus (the number of winning balls is included in the number of added balls) And sent as an operation response).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to reliably and efficiently transmit information on the number of additions to a point.

(J3) (j1) (j2)
The first gaming machine information transmission means transmits the gaming machine information together with predetermined arrival confirmation information (SQN) to the point control means (see the table state inquiry response in FIG. 79).
The point control means includes a first arrival confirmation information updating means (refer to table status inquiry request in FIG. 79) for updating the arrival confirmation information transmitted together with the gaming machine information.
The arrival confirmation information transmission means transmits the arrival confirmation information updated by the first arrival confirmation information updating means to the game control means (see the table state inquiry request in FIG. 79).

  According to such a configuration, the arrival of the gaming machine information can be confirmed by the presence or absence of the update of the arrival confirmation information and the update status.

(J4) The gaming machine according to (j3), wherein
The game control means includes a second arrival confirmation information updating means (refer to table status inquiry response in FIG. 79) for updating the arrival confirmation information transmitted from the point control means,
The first gaming machine information transmission means responds to the transmission request from the point control means, and the gaming machine information is updated together with the arrival confirmation information updated by the second arrival confirmation information updating means. Send to the point control means (refer to the table status inquiry response in Figure 79),
If the arrival confirmation information transmitted together with the gaming machine information and the arrival confirmation information transmitted to the game control means last time are not in a predetermined relationship, the point control means determines the gaming machine information. It discards and resends the said transmission request (refer FIG. 77).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine information has arrived by updating the arrival confirmation information by both the point control means and the game control means.

(J5) The gaming machine according to any one of (j1) to (j4), wherein
The game control means corrects the arrival confirmation information when it is determined by the arrival determination means that the gaming machine information has not been reached (see FIG. 77).

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined that the gaming machine information has not been reached based on the arrival confirmation information, the arrival confirmation information is corrected. It can be used to confirm the arrival of gaming machine information.

(K1) In the present invention, it is possible to play a game with points (the number of game balls, points), and a game machine (P, S) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and player possession A gaming system including: a gaming apparatus (CU) connected to the gaming machine so as to be communicably connected to the gaming machine, while adding points by using gaming value (balance, storage, cash, etc.) of
The gaming apparatus includes mode switching command information transmission means (see FIG. 73) for transmitting mode switching command information (mode change request) to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
Point control means (FIG. 6, FIG. 6, FIG. 6) for transmitting update information (number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) communicablely connected to the gaming apparatus and capable of specifying the amount of change in points to be added 104, payout control unit 17),
Including game control means (main control board 16) for controlling the game state,
The point control means is
Mode switching command information receiving means (see FIG. 73) for receiving the mode switching command information;
And mode switching request means (see FIG. 80) for requesting the game control means to switch the mode when the mode switching command information is received by the mode switching command information receiving means,
The game control means
When mode switching is requested by the mode switching request means, it is determined whether or not the first mode switching condition (FIG. 80; not changing symbol, not hitting big, not hitting small) is satisfied. First condition determination means (see FIG. 80);
And a business mode in which a player can play a game based on a request for switching the mode when it is determined by the first condition judging means that the first mode switching condition is satisfied. And mode switching means (see FIG. 80) for switching to either of the non-business mode.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine receives the mode switching command information from the gaming apparatus and changes the mode, so that the degree of cooperation between the gaming apparatus and the gaming machine with respect to the mode switching is high for gaming. It is possible to provide a system. In addition, since the mode is switched when the first mode switching condition is satisfied on the gaming machine side, it is possible to prevent adverse effects on the modes before and after the switching by the unconditional switching of the mode.

(K2) The present invention communicably connects to a gaming apparatus (CU) that adds points (the number of game balls, points) using game-use values (balances, balls, cash, etc.) owned by a player. It is a gaming machine (P unit, S unit) provided with a connection unit for making it possible to play games with points, and to which points are added according to the occurrence of winnings,
Point control for transmitting update information (number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) which is communicably connected to the game apparatus via the connection section and can specify the change amount of points to the game apparatus Means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104, payout control unit 17),
Including game control means (main control board 16) for controlling the game state,
The point control means is
Mode switching command information receiving means (see FIG. 73) for receiving predetermined mode switching command information from the gaming machine;
And mode switching request means (see FIG. 80) for requesting the game control means to switch the mode when the mode switching command information is received by the mode switching command information receiving means,
The game control means
When mode switching is requested by the mode switching request means, it is determined whether or not the first mode switching condition (FIG. 80; not changing symbol, not hitting big, not hitting small) is satisfied. First condition determination means (see FIG. 80);
And a business mode in which a player can play a game based on a request for switching the mode when it is determined by the first condition judging means that the first mode switching condition is satisfied. And mode switching means (see FIG. 80) for switching to either of the non-business mode.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine receives the mode switching command information from the gaming apparatus and changes the mode, so that the degree of cooperation between the gaming apparatus and the gaming machine with respect to the mode switching is high for gaming. It is possible to provide a gaming machine in the system. In addition, since the mode is switched when the first mode switching condition is satisfied on the gaming machine side, it is possible to prevent adverse effects on the modes before and after the switching by the unconditional switching of the mode.

(K3) In the gaming system according to (k1),
Includes a variable display that can variably display multiple types of identification information (patterns),
The game control means is a specific game state (big hit state) which is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display device becomes a specific display mode (for example, 7 symbols are aligned or a big bonus symbol is aligned). Control, big bonus),
The first condition determination means determines that the first mode switching condition is satisfied when the variable display device is not in the variable display mode (see FIG. 80).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the mode is switched during the game in which the variable display device performs the variable display.

(K4) In the gaming system according to (k1),
Including a variable display device capable of variably displaying plural types of identification information;
The game control means is a specific game state (big hit state) which is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display device becomes a specific display mode (for example, 7 symbols are aligned or a big bonus symbol is aligned). Control, big bonus),
The first condition determination means determines that the first mode switching condition is satisfied when the specific gaming state is not in progress (see FIG. 80).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the mode is switched during the specific gaming state.

(K5) In the gaming system according to (k1), (k3), or (k4),
The point control means determines whether or not a predetermined second mode switching condition (0 yen 0 ball state, number of playing balls is 0) is satisfied when the mode switching command information is received. 73 includes a second condition determination unit (see FIG. 73), and the mode switching request unit determines that the game is played when it is determined by the second condition determination unit that the second mode switching condition is established. The mode switching is requested to the control means (see FIG. 73).

  According to such a configuration, the presence / absence of establishment of the second mode switching condition is further determined by the point control unit separately from the game control unit, so that the mode before and after the switching is adversely affected by the unconditional switching of the mode. It can be further prevented that it does not affect.

(K6) In the gaming system according to (k5),
The second condition determining means determines that the second mode switching condition is satisfied when the game result is determined (the number of playing balls is 0) (see FIG. 73). ).

  According to such a configuration, mode switching is performed when the result of the game is not determined, and the mode after the switching is affected by the result of the game before switching. It can prevent.

(K7) In the gaming system according to (k5) or (k6),
The gaming device is
Main point storage means for storing points (an area for storing the number of game balls on the CU side in FIG. 6, an area for storing points on the CU side in FIG. 104);
Update information receiving means (main control unit 323, which receives update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to use in games and occurrence of winnings (number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) from the point control means Figure 6, Figure 104),
The main point updating means (main control unit 323, FIG. 6, FIG. 104) for updating the points stored in the main point storage means based on the update information;
The mode switching command information transmitting means sends a mode switching command to the gaming machine on the condition that no point is stored in the main holding point storage means (card unit side; command is transmitted only when 0 ball state) Send the information (see Figure 73),
The point control means is
Secondary point storage means (game ball counter, point counter, FIG. 6, FIG. 104) for storing points separately from the above main point storage means;
Including dual-point updating means (see FIG. 6, FIG. 104) for updating the points stored in the additional-point storage means in accordance with the use of the points for the game and the occurrence of winnings,
The second condition determination means determines that the second mode switching condition is satisfied when no points are stored in the additional point storage means (the payout control unit side; 0 ball state) (See Figure 73).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming apparatus side can determine that there is no point and if it can be determined that the gaming machine side does not have a point, the mode switching is allowed, so that there is a point. It is possible to more reliably prevent the mode switching from being performed in the following state.

(L1) In the present invention, it is possible to play a game by points (the number of game balls, points), and a game machine (P, S) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and player possession A gaming system including: a gaming apparatus (CU) connected to the gaming machine so as to be communicably connected to the gaming machine, while adding points by using gaming value (balance, storage, cash, etc.) of
The gaming device is
A game apparatus side condition judging unit (card unit side in FIG. 73; 0 ball state transmission of command only when the game apparatus side mode judgment condition is satisfied).
Mode switching command information transmission for transmitting mode switching command information (mode change request) to the gaming machine when it is determined that the gaming apparatus side mode switching condition is established by the gaming apparatus side condition judging means Means (see FIG. 73), and
The gaming machine is
Mode switching command information receiving means (see FIG. 73) for receiving the mode switching command information;
When the mode switching command information is received by the mode switching command information receiving means, it is determined whether or not a predetermined gaming machine side mode switching condition is satisfied. Part side: 0 yen 0 ball state, the number of balls in game is 0, the result of mode change response from the main control board is OK, the main control board side of FIG. 80; symbol not changing, not big hit, not small hit) When,
An operating mode in which a player can play a game based on the mode switching command information when it is determined by the gaming machine side condition judging means that the gaming machine side mode switching condition is satisfied. Mode switching means (FIG. 73, FIG. 80, FIG. 96) for switching between the commercial mode for providing a game to the player and the non-business mode (FIG. 8 to FIG. 10; maintenance mode, test mode, and test mode). See).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming system having a high degree of cooperation between the gaming apparatus and the gaming machine by switching the gaming apparatus and the gaming machine to various modes in cooperation with each other. Furthermore, when it is determined that the gaming apparatus side mode switching condition is established on the gaming apparatus side, and it is determined that the gaming machine side mode switching condition is established on the gaming machine side, the mode switching is performed. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the unconditional switching of modes from adversely affecting the modes before and after switching.

(L2) In the gaming system according to (l1),
The gaming machine is
Specifying means (disbursement control unit 17, addition ball number counter, subtraction ball number counter) for specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize;
Update information transmitting means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the game apparatus;
The gaming device is
Point storage means for storing points (area for storing the number of game balls on the CU side in FIGS. 6 and 104);
Update information receiving means (main control unit 323) for receiving the update information;
Including point updating means (main control unit 323, FIG. 6, FIG. 104) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information;
The gaming apparatus side condition judging means judges that the gaming apparatus side mode switching condition is satisfied when no points are stored in the point storage means (FIG. 73; 0 on the card unit side) Ball state determination).

(L3) In the gaming system according to (l1) (l2),
The gaming machine is
A variable display device capable of variably displaying plural types of identification information;
A game control means (main game player) for controlling a specific gaming state (big hit, big bonus) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display device becomes a specific display mode (a big hit mode of 777, a big bonus mode). Control board 16) and
The gaming machine side condition judging means judges that the gaming machine side mode switching condition is satisfied when the variable display device is not in a variable display (FIG. 80; symbol is not changing on the main control board side) Judge).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the mode is switched during the game in which the variable display device performs the variable display.

(L4) In the gaming system according to (l1) (l2),
The gaming machine is
A variable display device capable of variably displaying plural types of identification information;
A game control means (main game player) for controlling a specific gaming state (big hit, big bonus) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display device becomes a specific display mode (a big hit mode of 777, a big bonus mode). Control board 16) and
The gaming machine side condition judging means judges that the gaming machine side mode switching condition is satisfied when the specific gaming state is not in progress (see FIG. 80).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the mode is switched during the specific gaming state.

(L5) In the gaming system according to (l1) to (l4),
The gaming machine side condition judging means judges that the gaming machine side mode switching condition is satisfied when the game result is determined (the number of balls in game is 0) (see FIG. 73). ).

  According to such a configuration, mode switching is performed when the result of the game is not determined, and the mode after the switching is affected by the result of the game before switching. It can prevent.

(M1) In the present invention, it is possible to play a game with points (the number of game balls, points), and a game machine (P, S) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and player possession A gaming system including: a gaming apparatus (CU) connected to the gaming machine so as to be communicably connected to the gaming machine, while adding points by using gaming value (balance, storage, cash, etc.) of
The gaming machine is
Display means (indicator 54, indicator) for displaying gaming machine information (see FIG. 82, FIG. 83; gaming ball total number information, back ball addition information,...) Information according to the progress of the game 510),
Display control means (display effect control board 53) for controlling display of the display means;
Gaming machine information transmission means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting the gaming machine information to the gaming apparatus;
Unsent information transmission means for transmitting the gaming machine information to the display control means as unsent information (CU unsent data display request, FIG. 86, FIG. 87) when communication with the game apparatus is not possible. (With the payout control unit 17, see FIG. 95),
The gaming device is
Game machine information storage means (CU side storage area in FIG. 6, FIG. 104) for storing the game machine information;
Gaming machine information receiving means (see FIG. 6, FIG. 104) for receiving the gaming machine information;
And gaming machine information updating means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104) for updating the gaming machine information stored in the gaming machine information storage means based on the gaming machine information received by the gaming machine information reception means. ,
The display control means displays the unsent information transmitted from the unsent information transmission means on the display means (see FIG. 95).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp information which has not been transmitted due to the occurrence of the communication disconnection between the gaming apparatus and the gaming machine.

(M2) The present invention is provided with a connection portion for communicably connecting to a gaming apparatus (CU) that adds points by using gaming value (balance, storage, cash, etc.) owned by a player, It is a gaming machine (P, S) that can be played by points and points are added according to the occurrence of winnings,
Display means (display unit 54, display unit 510) for displaying gaming machine information that changes in accordance with the progress of the game;
Display control means (display effect control board 53) for controlling display of the display means;
Gaming machine information transmission means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting the gaming machine information to the gaming apparatus;
Unsent information to be transmitted to the display control means as the unsent information (CU unsent data display request, FIG. 86, FIG. 87) when communication with the game apparatus is not possible. Transmission means (disbursement control unit 17, see FIG. 95);
The display control means displays the unsent information transmitted from the unsent information transmission means on the display means (see FIG. 95).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp information which has not been transmitted due to the occurrence of the communication disconnection between the gaming apparatus and the gaming machine.

(M3) In the gaming system according to (m1),
The unsent information transmission means repeatedly transmits the unsent information to the display control means until the communication state determination means determines that communication with the gaming apparatus is possible (see FIG. 95).

  According to such a configuration, since the unsent information is repeatedly transmitted to the display control means, while the display of the unsent information continues, the re-sending of the unsent information is completed to the gaming apparatus side It can be determined that there is nothing, so that it can be specified whether or not the retransmission of the unsent information to the gaming apparatus has been completed.

(M4) In the gaming system according to (m1) or (m3),
The display control means displays the unsent information in a state where the gaming machine information displayed on the display means is stored in a predetermined storage area before the unsent information is displayed (FIG. 95; display) In the game machine information data backup).

  According to such a configuration, by checking the information stored in the predetermined storage area, it becomes possible to specify gaming machine information when a communication interruption occurs.

(M5) In the gaming system described in (m4),
The display control means is configured to reflect the unsent information being displayed on the gaming machine information stored in the storage area when communication with the gaming apparatus is enabled. The information is displayed on the display means (FIG. 95; displaying gaming machine information in which information of gaming machine information notification and unsent data being displayed are reflected on backup data).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to update the display contents of the display means to the latest one after recovery of the communication disconnection.

(M6) In the gaming system according to (m4) or (m5),
The gaming machine is
Point control means (payout control unit 17) including the gaming machine information transmission means, the communication state determination means, and the unsent information transmission means;
Game control means (main control board 16) for controlling the gaming state and transmitting the added value of the points (the number of balls in FIG. 75) according to the occurrence of the winning to the point control means;
The point control means determines that the communication state determination means has changed from a state in which communication with the gaming apparatus is not possible to a possible state, and then adds the additional value transmitted from the game control means. Transmitting the gaming machine information including the information to the gaming apparatus and the display control means (the last notification of gaming machine information in the sequence diagram of FIG. 95);
The display control means is configured to transmit the game machine information and the unsent information being displayed when the game machine information has been transmitted from the point control means after the unsent information has been transmitted. Information reflected on the gaming machine information stored in the storage area is displayed on the display means (see FIG. 95).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to update the display contents of the display means to the latest one after recovery of the communication disconnection.

  It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  2 pachinko machine, 2S slot machine, 3 card unit, 16 main control board, 17 payout control section, 20 connection section, 26 game board, 309 card insertion / ejection slot, 312 indicator, 319 replay button, 320 IR light receiving unit , 321 rental button, 322 return button, 323 main control unit, 330 connection unit, 292 effect control unit for display unit, 54 display unit.

Claims (1)

A connection unit for communicably connecting to a gaming apparatus that adds points by using gaming value owned by a player is provided, a game can be played by the points, and points are added according to the occurrence of a prize. The game machine being
Game control means for controlling the game state;
And a point control means connected communicably to the game apparatus through the connection section and transmitting gaming machine information including a change amount of points to the game apparatus.
The game control means
First gaming machine information transmission means for transmitting the gaming machine information to the point control means;
Arrival determination means for determining the arrival of the gaming machine information to the point control means based on the arrival confirmation information transmitted from the point control means;
And an addition number specifying means for specifying an addition number to a point when a winning occurs.
The point control means is
Second gaming machine information transmitting means for transmitting the gaming machine information transmitted from the gaming control means to the gaming apparatus;
An arrival confirmation information transmission means for transmitting the arrival confirmation information to the game control means;
The first gaming machine information transmission means transmits the gaming machine information together with the arrival confirmation information to the point control means.
The point control means includes first arrival confirmation information updating means for updating the arrival confirmation information transmitted together with the gaming machine information,
The arrival confirmation information transmission means transmits the arrival confirmation information updated by the first arrival confirmation information updating means to the game control means.
When the arrival determination means determines that the game machine information has not been reached, the first game machine information transmission means transmits the game machine information last time, and changes in new points that have occurred since the previous time Transmitting, to the point control means, gaming machine information including a total amount obtained by adding the amount and the amount of change in points of the unreached game machine information;
The second gaming machine information transmitting means transmits information capable of specifying the added number specified by the added number specifying means as the game machine information to the gaming apparatus.
The point control means is
Two-way communication is performed with the game control means in accordance with request information from the game device,
A game machine in which a specific process is executed when a result of performing the two-way communication is a predetermined result.